null  null
Instructions manual
01960
Control panel module for monitor 20550
Sections index 
Automation section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Burglar alarm section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Manual for configuring radio-frequency devices with the EnOcean module used with the By-me
automation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Manual to configure the radio-frequency devices when used with the burglar alarm via bus
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Speacker system section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Section light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Section
Automation
1
2
Index
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Main functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Basic concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Installation topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
5
6
12
3.1 System content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Installation of bus systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Description of terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Putting the system into service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
14
17
18
4. Main configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
19
20
21
22
47
5. Air-conditioning control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Navigating the control panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main screens of the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 General settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.2 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.3Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6. Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.1 Creating a scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Activating a scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Renaming a scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Deleting a scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 Cancelling a button associated with the scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 Remote access to scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
60
62
62
62
62
7. Load control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7.1 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Load management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Associating an indicator group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 LED signals of the module 01855 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
64
65
68
68
8. Programming events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.1Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.2 Example applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
9. Intrusion Detection Alarm System Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
10. Diagnostics and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10.1 Diagnostics and replacement of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
10.2Remote communications management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
10.3Control panel software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11. Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
11.1Turning on SAI via SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
12. Fitting for connection to interface 01998.U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
13. Integration of the By-me system with the Soundsystem, Digibus and Elvox Two Wire video door entry
systems and with the CCTV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
14. Association between the functions of the By-me system and the commands of the Two Wire video
door entry system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
15. Installation regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
16. Standard compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3
Introduction
The By-me automated system via the control panel with its Monitor 20550 and Module 01960 provides integrated
control of comfort, security, energy saving, climate control and remote control in the residential and commercial
sectors.
This manual is arranged in a sequence of sections that provide a complete understanding of the By-me system
and allow the user to take full advantage of the available features:
• Chapter 1 “Main functions”: describes what can be controlled with the By-me system (see page 5);
• Chapter 2 “Basic concepts”: explains some basic concepts necessary for gaining an understanding the Byme system (see page 6);
• Chapter 3 “Installation topology”: describes the structure of the By-me system, and gives the general rules
and information necessary for setting the system structure, and the information necessary for putting into
operation (see page 12);
• Chapter 4 “Main configurations”: describes the configuration procedures and main settings of the By-me
system (see page 19);
• Section 5 “Air-conditioning control”: describes the procedures for setting the climate control programs (see
page 50);
• Chapter 6 “Scenarios”: describes the procedures for creating scenarios where a number of functions are
actuated at the same time (see page 59);
• Chapter 7 “Load control”: describes the procedures for controlling the power drawn from the electric mains in
order to prevent the miniature circuit breaker tripping due to overloading (see page 63);
• Chapter 8 “Programming events”: describes the procedures for advanced management of the By-me system,
in order to be able to initiate functions that perform special operations when certain events occur (see page 67);
• Chapter 9 “Integration of the passive infrared motion detector”: describes the procedures for managing
detectors both as intrusion alarm sensors and motion sensors with lights coming on (see page 78).
• Section 10 “Diagnostics and maintenance”: describes the procedures for monitoring the operation of devices
and managing their replacement where necessary (see page 79);
• Chapter 11 “Remote control”: describes the procedures for remote control of the By-me system via a TP
interface and telephone communicator (see page 81);
• Chapter 12 “Fitting for connection to interface 01998.U”: describes the procedures for fitting the control
panel for connection with the interface 01998.U (see page 82);
• Chapter 13 “Integration of the By-me system with the Sound System, DigiBus and Elvox Two Wire video
door entry systems and with the CCTV system”: describes the procedures for integrating the By-me system
with the modules 01961, 01962 and 01963 (Sound System, DigiBus and Two Wire) for managing the video
door entry system from the control panel and integrating the By-me system with the module 01964 (CCTV) for
managing the video surveillance system (see page 83).
4
Main functions
1. Main functions.
The By-me system makes it possible to manage the installation using the following controls:
• Ambient temperature management, dividing the installation into up to 40 areas controlled by 40 separate
programs;
• Lighting management, with on/off control and light adjustment;
• Shutter control;
• Function centralization and automation (up to 32 scenarios and 16 programs);
• Control of the intrusion detection alarm system;
• Remote control and monitoring of functions;
• Power consumption and load control.
• Control of the speaker system;
•Integration with the video door entry system (by adding the module 01961 or 01962 or 01963) or with the video
surveillance system (by adding module 01964).
COMFORT
SAFETY
Scenarios
Light automation
Shutter automation
Adjustment range
Programmed actions
Load control
Speaker system
Wired burglar alarm system
Radio burglar alarm system
Remote assistance
Technical alarms
Panic alarm
Access control
ECONOMY
REMOTE CONTROL
Power management
Load programming
Adjustment range
Temperature status
Climate programming
Alarm signals
Device actuation
Scenario activation
Intrusion detection alarm system ON/OFF
Diagnostics
PAT.
PEND.
MADE
IN
ITALY
Monitor VIMAR 20550 + Control panel module 01960
5
Basic concepts
2. Basic concepts.
This chapter explains some fundamentally important concepts that are necessary for correctly making full use of
the system.
Note.
Some of the examples contain references to the device codes; for more information, please refer to the instruction
sheet for the product concerned.
•Functional unit: part of a device that can be considered as if it were a separate device. Some examples:
1. Device with one functional unit: the functional unit is equivalent to the device itself, for example actuator with
transfer relay output 16 A 250 V~ (Eikon 20535 series; Idea 16975; Plana 14535).
2.Device with two functional units: in the interface for conventional controls (Eikon 20515 series; Idea 16955
series; Plana 14515 series) each of the two inputs is a functional unit.
3.Device with three functional units: in the control appliance with two toggle switches and actuator (Eikon
20526 series; Idea 16966; Plana 14526 series) there are three functional units: left toggle switch, right toggle
switch and actuator; for user and configuration purposes, there are therefore 3 separate devices.
4.Device with four functional units: in the control appliance with three toggle switches and actuator (Eikon
20547 series; Idea 16987; Plana 14547 series) there are four functional units: left toggle switch, middle
toggle switch, right toggle switch and actuator; for user and configuration purposes, there are therefore
4 separate devices. Another example is the device with 4 changeover relays (art.01851 for installation on
EN50022 rails) where each output is a functional unit.
Note.
Difference between a toggle switch and simple
push-button: a toggle switch can can be pushed
pushed up or down, a simple push-button can only
be pushed down.
During the design phase, each functional unit of
any device must be considered as though it were a
separate device. It is therefore necessary, during the
design phase, to plan the functions to be performed
and only then make a list of the devices needed to
perform these functions.
The diagram opposite shows the functional units of a
control device with three simple push-buttons and an
actuator (Eikon 20545 series; Idea 16985 series; Plana
14545 series).
Relay
actuator
6
Button
left
Middle
button
Button
right
Basic concepts
For example, during installation, the actuator could be used to control load A through the push-button of another
device, the left push-button to control load B through an actuator, the middle button to control load C through a
second actuator and the right button to control load D through a third actuator.
Control appliance with three simple buttons and actuator
(Eikon 20545; Idea 16985; Plana 14545).
Actuator
Front
Rear
Load D
Actuator
Load C
Actuator
Load D
Button
Load A
There are no limits on the use of the functional units of a physical device. When a load is to be controlled, it is
necessary to provide one control device and one actuator connected to the load.
7
Basic concepts
• Connection: logic link between two functional units, which allows a function to be shared (for example: relay
actuator and push-button).
• Configuration: operation that can be used to create the logic connection between various functional units (of
various appliances).
• Functional group (or Group): set of functional units connected to each other logically, which perform a system
function (for example: three different push-buttons that control one actuator, and therefore the same load).
The devices that make up a functional group are connected to each other logically, not by conventional wiring.
Control device with two
toggle switches.
Actuator with relay output.
Eikon20521
Idea16961
Plana14521
Eikon20535
Idea16975
Plana14535
BUS line
IMPORTANT:
A Group must be made up only of homogeneous functional units: any one group cannot contain an
actuator for rolling shutters and an actuator to control the lighting of a lamp.
8
Basic concepts
To control the switching on of a load from different points, it is sufficient to add more functional units; it is not
necessary to modify the wiring.
Eikon20521
Idea16961
Plana14521
Eikon20521
Idea16961
Plana14521
Eikon20535
Idea16975
Plana14535
BUS line
• Group depth: number of groups to which one functional unit can belong. Each functional unit can belong to a
maximum of 4 different groups keeping the same function (for example “dimmer control”).
M
M
1
Eikon20527
Idea16967
Plana14527
Group
Group
Group
1
2
3
3
2
Eikon20527
Idea16967
Plana14527
Eikon20521
Idea16961
Plana14521
= device 1: left button functional unit + device 1 actuator
= device 2: left button functional unit + device 2 actuator
= device 3: button functional unit + device 1 and 2 actuator functional unit.
Actuators are of group depth 2 since they both belong to two groups.
9
Basic concepts
• Scenario: a scenario is an exact positioning of the actuators in one or more functional groups that can be called
up as preferred from a menu on the control panel or with a button configured for this purpose or with the infrared
remote control 01849. For example, the rolling shutters could be lowered and a lamp lit in the room at the same
time. A scenario can also be activated with the programs that can be configured via the Events menu or remotely
with the GSM communicator.
• Parameters: these can be set at the control unit, and are used to modify and customize the operation of each
functional unit. For example, the relay actuator (Eikon 20535 series, Idea 16757 series; Plana 14535 series),
during configuration, behaves as a two-position stable relay. However, it can be configured as a one-position
stable relay; in this case, the deactivation time must also be defined.
• Line: any set of devices.
• Scenario depth: number of scenarios to which a group can belong. Each functional group can belong to a
maximum of 4 different scenarios.
• Bus line: equipment used to carry the electrical or electromagnetic signals associated with the messages
between the system devices.
• Bus system: set of devices and their interconnections creating applications by using a common communications
framework.
• Command: functional unit that sends commands and/or statuses over the bus line.
• Actuator: functional unit that receives commands and/or statuses from the bus line in order to carry out a
predetermined action.
The system in general is made up of three main families of functional unit:
• Controls (for example, push-buttons, sensors and infrared remote controls)
• Actuators (for example, relays and regulators)
• Controllers (for example, the control unit)
10
Basic concepts
Each line can be composed of at most 128 devices and needs one or two power supplies depending on
the number of devices and the length of the bus.
Using line couplers, a number of lines can be connected to each other, up to a maximum of 15 areas x 15
lines; the line couplers allow only authorized messages to pass between one line and another.
On each By-me control panel it is possible to configure up to 254 devices (194 automation devices and 60
intrusion detection alarm system devices).
System configuration starts with the creation of functional groups (it is better to think in terms of functional
groups rather than individual devices), which is the only operation strictly necessary for the system to
function. During the installation phase, the first operation is therefore to assume the functions that are to
be made available.
Subsequent operations, such as placing a number of units together in one scenario or setting a number of
automated functions, should be treated as a system customization or as the use of advanced functions.
After the groups have been created, the control panel no longer has any part to play in the way they operate; the
devices and related functional groups are “connected” to each other and do not require any intervention by the
control panel (the control panel is still needed, however, for managing editing functions, climate control automation
and automation programmes).
In the event of a power failure, when the mains power returns, the actuators will keep their status prior to the event.
Following a Reset applied to an actuator, instead, the actuator will go back to opening the contact (applies both to
relay actuators and roller shutter actuators).
Note: If the By-me system is composed of both the automation system and the intrusion detection alarm system,
always use two power supplies 01801.
11
Installation topology
3. Installation topology.
The main characteristic of the By-me system is that all devices are connected to each other by a bus system cable
(pair) that supplies the devices with the power and the signals carrying the digital control and monitoring data.
Note.
The connecting cable, art. Vimar 01840, is the same as the one used in the burglar alarm bus system and Vimar
bus entrance control system.
Warning:
On a line where a control panel has already been configured (monitor 20550 + module 01960) it is not
possible to configure a second control panel (either Eikon 20550 + 01960 or the Eikon 2-module control
panels 20510 and 20480, Idea 16950 and 16930, Plana 14510 and 14480).
The system is configured through the control unit and the configuration buttons located on the devices.
CONNECTION DIAGRAM with separation coupler from another automation line.
230 V~
Power supply Line 2
L N
492.18012 0B 0409 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
01801
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
120-230V~ 50/60Hz
440-290mA
BUS
29V
IBUS
AUX
29V
I AUX
IBUS + I AUX 800mA
VI
-5°C ÷ +45°C
By-me
29 V
BUS
Linea 2
Monitor 20550 + 01960
230 V~
AUX
Power supply Line 1
L N
IR detector
Controls
492.18012 0B 0409 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
PAT.
PEND.
01801
Line coupler
MADE
IN
ITALY
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
120-230V~ 50/60Hz
440-290mA
BUS
29V
IBUS
AUX
29V
I AUX
IBUS + I AUX 800mA
VI
-5°C ÷ +45°C
By-me
29 V
AUX
BUS
29 V
bus
Linea 1
M
Actuator
with relay
L
N
12
Controls
with actuator
for rolling shutters
Controls
with relay
actuator
Controls
Installation topology
If integrating the automation and intrusion detection alarm systems, refer to the intrusion detection alarm system
section in this manual that shows the connection diagram (see page 91); in this case the control panel must be
installed and configured in “Area 00 - Line 00” of the intrusion detection alarm system. The two automation and
intrusion detection alarm system lines must then be separated with a coupler 01845.
The input of the control panel composed of the monitor 20550 + module 01960 is equal to:
- 150 mA under conditions of normal operation;
- 30 mA in case of a mains power failure and power supply from the back-up unit 01804.14 (if there is also the intrusion
detection alarm system).
3.1 System content.
Each system must always be made up of at least the following devices:
• one control panel;
• one power supply 01801;
• control devices with or without actuators;
• actuators, such as relays or regulators for example;
Module 01960 must be inserted in the compartment on the back of monitor 20550 in correspondence with the
connector bearing the words “CONTROL PANEL”.
You are recommended to do this without the devices being powered and checking that, after hooking up the
module with the monitor, the mechanical coupling is perfect (all the clamps must be properly tightened).
Control panel module 01960.
3.1.1 - Hooking up the control panel module.
13
Installation topology
3.2 Bus system installation.
3.2.1 General rules and system topology.
• For the connections use a VIMAR 01840 sheathed and twisted pair (2x0.5 mm2, nominal insulation voltage
300/500 V). The wire pair distributes both the power supply voltage (29 V d.c.) and the device control
signals, and can be placed inside the same corrugated pipe that carries the electrical mains cables.
• A bus line must be supplied by 1 or 2 power supplies 01801.
Each line can be controlled by a single control panel and can be composed of at most 128 devices and
at most two power supplies, depending on the number of devices and the length of the connecting cable
(pair).
• One control panel can manage up to at most 60 intrusion detection alarm systems.
• If a system is being installed with only one power supply and the number of devices is close to the maximum
number allowed, it is advisable to plan for a second power supply to allow for future extensions of the
system.
• The devices do not have to be connected in any particular order, maintaining the polarities indicated on
the terminals. Linear type connections (figure 3.2.1.1), star type connections (figure 3.2.1.2) or mixed
connections (figure 3.2.1.3) are possible (the rectangle in the figures represents the power supply). The
ideal configuration is the linear type with only one power supply in the middle of the system, or two power
supplies at the ends of the bus cable.
• The total current used by the various devices must not exceed the nominal current of the power supply
(or supplies) installed.
• The voltage at all points on the bus, with all devices at rest, must never go below 23 V d.c. Check particularly
the points furthest away from the power supply and the sections of cable where the load is highest.
• The voltage at all points on the bus, when the most numerous group of shutter actuators is in operation, must
never go below 22 V d.c. (check the points furthest away from the power supply). The delayed actuation
function can be useful for reducing the number of shutter actuators in operation at the same time.
• The By-me control panel can manage up to 20 different users (including the administrator), each one with
their own rights and password.
• The By-me control panel can manage up to at most 480 groups (automation, intrusion detection alarm system,
loads, etc.).
3.2.1.1
3.2.1.2
14
3.2.1.3
Installation topology
• The By-me control panel is able to configure up to at most 254 devices divided over a number of lines
(including the couplers 01845); each device can have from 1 to 4 functional units. If the system does
not have an intrusion detection alarm system, the maximum number of Automation devices that can be
configured in a control panel is 194 (including routers) divided over a number of lines; lastly bear in mind that
a line can have up to 2 power supplies 01801 (which can support up to a maximum input of 1.6 A on the
bus line).
• It is essential to protect the system from the effects of lighting using surge protection devices (SPD).
As a general rule, the power supply side must be protected using a Class 1 SPD downstream of the power
meter, a Class 2 SPD after the magneto-thermal protection device, and a Class 3 SPD at the power supply
input. If a telephone communicator is present, it is advisable also to install an SPD on the telephone line.
3.2.2 System setup.
During the design phase, it is essential to arrange for a switchboard with sufficient capacity to hold:
• conventional devices, magneto-thermal protections, circuit-breakers, etc;
• 1 or 2 power supplies with capacity for nine EN 50022 modules;
• EN 50022 rail devices such as the load control module, GSM communicator, interfaces.
• surge protection devices to protect the installation.
It is advisable to use a dedicate cable trough for the corrugated tubes that carry the Vimar 01840 cable for the
Bus line; however, the ones that carry the mains power cables can also be used.
3.2.3 Bus length: general rules.
• Maximum distance between power supply and device: 350 m.
• Maximum distance between devices: 700 m.
• Maximum length of the bus cable: 1000 m.
• Minimum distance between 2 power supplies: 40 m. It is important for the load to be well distributed between
the two power supplies.
• Essential requirements:
• the distance between two power supplies must never be less than 40 m;
• the load must be well distributed between the two power supplies;
• the two power supplies should be placed at the ends of the one of the circuits of the system that has
the largest number of devices or branches.
In all cases, the optimum configuration is where the power supplies are placed as far as possible from each
other; this also has a positive effect on the minimum voltage present on the bus.
15
Installation topology
3.2.4 Length of the BUS line.
The following is a list of the maximum lengths of the BUS line installed in systems with the linear configuration
(the rectangle in the figure represents the power supply).
POWER SUPPLY
350 m
POWER SUPPLY
350 m
350 m
DEVICE
DEVICE
700 m
POWER SUPPLY
250 m
POWER SUPPLY
500 m
250 m
3.2.5 Bus installation: summary table.
• Installation and system topology:
• BUS line cable laid in dedicated cable troughs; can also be placed in the corrugated tubes that carry
the mains power cable.
• Configurations allowed:
• Linear configuration
• Star configuration
• Mixed configuration
• We recommend using junction boxes
• Type of cable that can be used: sheathed VIMAR 01840 twisted pair (2x0.5 mm2, nominal insulation
voltage 300/500 V)
16
Installation topology
• Devices and distances per line
• Logic capacity (number of addresses): 128
• Maximum distance between power supply and last device: 350 m
• Maximum total length of the bus line: 1,000 m
• Maximum distance between two devices: 700 m
• Minimum distance between two power supplies: 40 m (loads must be balanced between the two
power supplies)
• Optimum position of each power supply: at the centre of the BUS line
• Optimum position of two power supplies: at the ends of the BUS line
• Minimum voltage on the furthest device: 23 V d.c. (at rest)
3.3 Description of terminals.
The control panel module 01960 has two types of connectors:
- removable 6-pin connector: connector for the BUS and video power supply connection (fig. 3.3.1).
- 8-pole PIN-STRIP connector: connector for the cable used to connect the programming
interface 01998.U on the side of the monitor 20550 (fig. 3.3.2).
- 30-pole PIN-STRIP connector: connector on the monitor side for hooking up the control panel module 01960
with the monitor 20550 (fig. 3.3.2).
Connector
PIN-STRIP
30 pins.
Removable
6-pin
connector.
3.3.2
3.3.1
Connector
PIN-STRIP
8 poles.
17
Installation topology
The connector, through which all the connections
are made, has 6 terminals divided according to the
functions given in the table alongside.
Terminal
V+
V–
+
–
C
A
Function
Power supply (+)
Power supply (–)
BUS (+)
BUS (–)
Spare terminal
Spare terminal
• Terminals V+ and V- must be connected to the AUX output + - of the power supply 01801.
• If there is an intrusion detection alarm system, the terminals V+ and V- must be connected to the CENTR output + - of the back-up unit 01804.
• The BUS + and BUS terminals - must be connected to the BUS output + - of the power supply 01801. • If there is an intrusion detection alarm system, the terminals BUS + and BUS - must be connected to the BUS
output + - of the back-up unit 01804.
3.4 Putting the system into service.
To install the devices correctly, carry out the following operations:
Connection terminal
3.4.1
Vimar 01840 twisted pair
1. Lay out the bus cable and connecting terminals, maintaining the correct polarities (figure 3.3.1).
2. Lay out the cable for the electrical connections of the actuators.
3. Wire the control panel, components and power supply.
4. Power up the system.
18
Main configurations
4. Main configurations.
This section describes the configuration procedures and main settings of the system.
All steps can be carried out directly from the control unit menu, except the creation of units, which also requires an
operation to be carried out on the individual devices.
The more advanced system functions are discussed in later sections of this manual.
4.1 Navigating through the control unit menus.
To navigate through the control unit menus, use the 10 buttons on the front, which have different meanings
depending on the context and the menu currently selected.
L
F
E
G
MADE
IN
ITALY
PAT.
PEND.
H
I
M
A
B
C
N
D
Push-buttons A, B, C, D: Home automation menu for daily system management by the user
Push-buttons E, F, L, G, H, I: Home automation menu in the phase of configuration, scrolling through lists, etc.
M: Indicator LED.
N: Connector for connecting with the interface 01998.U
19
Main configurations
4.2 Initial switch-on.
• When switched on for the first time, or after a reset, the control panel asks for the language to be selected, then
the area no. (00-15) and line no. (00-15); this information is essential for identification and group offset, which is
a necessary parameter only when configuring a number of control panels in the same system. The order in which
systems are created must start according to the use of the control panel: if performing the function of a SAI bus
control panel, set the area to 0 and line 0; for the comfort control panel the Area number varies from 1 and the
line numbers between the possible values (from 1 to 15), then passing onto area 2,3…
For the “Group Offset” parameter confirm the prompted value. unless it is necessary to configure a system with
a number of control panels; In this case, on the 1st control panel the “Group Offset” 0xB00 will be set, while for
the others the following Offset values will be set:
- 2nd control panel: 0x2000
- 3rd control panel: 0x4000
- 4th control panel: 0x6000
- 5th control panel: 0x8000
- 6th control panel: 0xA000
- 7th control panel: 0xC000
- 8th control panel: 0xE000.
• The control panel will then ask for the date and time to be entered.
• In addition the first time it requires setting the security code (PIN) for the administrator (5-8 characters) and
afterwards a second time for confirmation. The numbers are entered with the buttons A,B,C,D of the monitor. To
enter digits other than the first one hold down the relevant button and release it on the required character.
• You can now access the main menu or setup of the control panel to go ahead with configuration.
• Create the groups [see paragraph 4.4.1 “Creating a new group”, page 22].
• The system is now ready to use.
If the preconfigured behaviour of the devices is not considered suitable, or to access the advanced functions of the
system, the system can be customized by carrying out one or more of the following operations:
• modify device behaviour [see paragraph 4.4.4 “Modifying the device parameters” - page 27];
• climate control [see chapter 5 “Climate Control” - page 51];
• create scenarios [see Chapter 6 “Scenarios” - page 59];
• load control (if load control module 01855 is available) [see Chapter 7 “Load control” - page 63];
• events [see chapter 8 “Programming events” - page 69].
• SAI Control Panel (only with the intrusion detection alarm system) [seeintrusion detection section]
• Video door entry (only with the modules art. 01961, 01962 or 01963).
• CCTV (only with the module art. 01964).
20
Main configurations
4.3 Main screens of the control panel.
The control panel's main screen displays the icons relating to the main menus:
• Air conditioning;
• Scenarios;
• Audio;
• Events;
• Video door entry unit;
• Burglar alarm control panel (SAI)
• Loads.
The main menus are selected using buttons A, B, C and D (button A -> Climate control, button B -> Audio, etc.).
The load control, video door entry and burglar alarm control panel (SAI) menus are displayed on a second main
screen accessed by selecting the “Others” menu (button D).
If, after a time-out of approximately 90 s, no operation is carried out, the control panel displays a stand-by screen
showing the day, date and/or time (setting what you want to be displayed is done using the “Settings” menu).
If personal security codes have been set (installer PIN, different users, etc.), access to the menus is only possible
after entering the code permitting use, by the user, only of the menus for which the user has been enabled (see
paragraph 4.5.4).
IMPORTANT:
Before proceeding with system configuration (and therefore of the various functional
groups) ALWAYS reset each single device (see chap. 4.4.8 on page 28).
21
Main configurations
4.4 Configuration menu.
N.B.
On concluding system configuration it is possible to download the entire database of the control panel
(system characteristics, etc.). onto a PC via the programming interface 01998.U. 4.4.1 Creating a new functional group.
As already illustrated in chapter 2 [Basic concepts, page 6], the functional groups (set of functional units that
operate together) are basic elements of the system, so the first operation is to create them.
The procedure to be carried out for each new group is as follows:
1. Select the name of the group;
2. Enter the Configuration menu and configure the desired functional unit;
3. At the end of point 2. exit the Configuration menu of the created group.
4.4.1.1 Creating a new group.
Setup  Configuration  Group Control
• Automated functions: comfort system generic group; this item is selected in almost all cases (lights,
shutters ….)
• Load control: group dedicated to load control
• Climate Control: group dedicated to air-conditioning control
• Burglar alarm: group dedicated to SAI system configuration
Automation 080 New Group
Name the group by selecting one of the names prompted from the preset list of names:
• 1st block of the name (mandatory)
• 2nd block of the name (00-63) (optional)
• 3rd block of the name choosing one of the names on a preset list, then press select to confirm
(optional).
• 4th block of the name: enter the area of application needed to distinguish rooms and functions with
the same name, then press select (optional).
You are then prompted to save the name of the group, confirm with YES.
On selecting the desired group it is possible to see any devices already associated or configure a new
one with “add device”
22
Main configurations
4.4.1.2 Functional unit selection.
Note.
For each device, how to select a functional unit is explained in the special instructions sheets that
accompany the product.
To configure the various functional units, start the procedure on the control panel as described in the
previous paragraph, then set the desired devices and wait for the configuration to be completed before
going on to the next one; to end the procedure, use the control panel:
1. Press the configuration button and, where necessary, the control button of the device to be included
in the group;
2. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when
configuration is complete;
3. The control panel indicates the functional unit that has just been
configured;
4. Repeat the process for other functional units or press Close to exit.
Example 1.
Functional units that can be selected by the control with 2 toggle switches with relay (Eikon 20526, Idea
16966, Plana 14526).
Functional unit selection.
• To select the relay functional unit, press the configuration button (figure A);
• To select the left button functional unit, press the configuration button then the left button (figure B);
• To select the right button functional unit, press the configuration button then the right button (figure C).
A
Configuration
button
B
Configuration
button
Left button
C
Configuration
button
Right button
23
Main configurations
Example 2.
Functional units that can be selected by the control with 3 toggle switches with relay (Eikon 20546, Idea
16986, Plana 14546).
Functional unit selection.
• To select the relay functional unit, press the configuration button (figure A);
• To select the left button functional unit, press the configuration button then the left button (figure B);
• To select the middle button functional unit, press the configuration button then the middle button
(figure C).
• To select the right button functional unit, press the configuration button then the right button (figure D).
A
B
Configuration
button
Configuration
button
Left button
D
C
Configuration
button
Middle button
24
Configuration
button
Right button
Main configurations
4.4.1.3 Rules for creating groups.
1. A Group must be made up only of homogeneous functional units: any one group cannot contain an
actuator for rolling shutters and an actuator to control the lighting of a lamp.
2. When creating the group, first register the actuators and then the control devices (buttons); in this way,
the control unit can recognize the type of group being created and set the correct parameters for the buttons.
4.4.1.4 Note on built-in controls.
• The built-in controls must be installed with the bus
terminal turned upwards (general rule for all recessmounting devices - figure 4.4.1.4.1).
• For the Idea and Plana series the “simple button”
type of controls are distinguished by the grey of the
button contact surface (figure 4.4.1.4.2); “Toggle
switch” type controls are identified by a green
colour (figure 4.4.1.4.3).
4.4.1.4.1
• The buttons for “toggle switch” devices are
identified by symbols or by the plate at the top or
bottom (figure 4.4.1.4.4); except for the neutral
button, the buttons for the simple push-buttons
have symbols or a plate at the bottom only (figure
4.4.1.4.5).
• The buttons for simple push-button controls have
an installation side; when mounting the button,
align the two slots inside the button with the slots
on the lower side of the contact surface of the
control (figure 4.4.1.4.2).
• The built-in control devices must be installed
without buttons (these have to be attached only
when the configuration of the system is complete).
This is necessary in order to allow access to
the configuration button (for the position of the
configuration button, please refer to the instruction
sheet for the device).
• Removing the button: using a small screwdriver,
apply slight pressure and lever up the top part of
the button (this has a small tab) from the body
of the device (figure 4.4.1.4.6), then take out the
button.
4.4.1.4.2
4.4.1.4.3
4.4.1.4.4
4.4.1.4.5
25
Main configurations
• Attaching the button: position the button in the button-holder and apply slight pressure (figure 4.4.1.4.7).
4.4.1.4.6
4.4.1.4.7
IMPORTANT: Obviously, all the considerations made in par. 4.4.1.4 apply to both the appliances with 2 buttons
and to the appliances with 3 buttons.
4.4.2 Add devices to a functional group.
Used to add new devices to an existing functional group.
Setup  Configuration  Group Control  Automation  080 Group  Add Device
Configure the functional units as described in paragraph 4.4.1 [Creating a new functional group, page 22].
N.B.
If a user is to be controlled using infrared remote control 01849, it is necessary to configure the infrared
receiver (Eikon 20516, Idea 16956, Plana 14516) inside the group that contains the relay actuator (or regulator)
connected to the load to be controlled (or regulated).
For example, by creating a group made up of a relay actuator (Eikon 20535, Idea 16795, Plana 14535, for
EN 50022 rail 01850) and infrared receiver (Eikon 20516, Idea 16956, Plana 14516) connected to a lamp, the
lamp can be controlled using infrared remote control 01849.
The procedure for configuring the infrared receiver is described in the instruction sheet that accompanies the
product.
26
Main configurations
4.4.3 Remove a functional unit from a functional group.
Used to remove functional units from a functional group.
Setup  Configuration  Group management  Automation
Enter the Group and select the functional unit to be removed by scrolling through the list of units  Remove
Proceed to remove the device?  Yes (The control unit indicates when removal is complete).
4.4.4 Modifying device parameters.
Device parameters can be modified in order to personalize and adapt the characteristics of the system to
specific requirements.
Setup  Configuration  Group Control  Automation
Enter the Group and select the functional unit for which parameters are to be modified by scrolling through
the list of units  Param
The parameters that can be modified for each functional unit depend on the characteristics of the unit
concerned.
4.4.5 Rename a group.
Used to rename an existing group.
Setup  Configuration  Group Control  Automation  080 Group  Change
Proceed to save the Group Name? YES
It is now possible with the same procedure to rename another group.
4.4.6 Removing a group.
Used to remove an existing functional group.
Setup  Configuration  Group Control  Automation  080 Group  Remove
Delete all information associated with the selected Group? YES
The control panel confirms removal and goes back to displaying the list of groups.
27
Main configurations
4.4.7 Device identification.
It is possible to display information on a device that has already been configured such as its physical address
and the group to which it belongs.
Setup  Configuration  Device Identification
If the configuration button is pressed, the control panel displays the physical address; pressing Info offers all
the single functional units belonging to the device. By going onto each single functional unit with Info Grp we
can identify the groups and in the same way with Info Scn identify the scenarios.
4.4.8 Device reset.
Used to clear the memory of one or more devices.
Setup  Configuration  Reset Control  Device Reset
Press and hold the configuration button of the device to be reset; the red LED is lit (in some cases after a few
seconds).
When the LED goes out, release the device button, then press Back on the control panel. As regards the
thermostats (Eikon 20513-20514, Idea 16953-16954, Plana 14513-14514) the procedure is analogous; the
button to press is the first one on the left (on the device instructions sheet it is called button A) and you need
to wait for the display to stop showing the CNF icon.
N.B.
When resetting control devices with two simple push-buttons and actuator (Eikon 20525, Idea 16965, Plana
14525) and control devices with two toggle switches and actuator (Eikon 20526, Idea 16966, Plana 14526),
the relay actuator in the device is always associated with the left button on the device concerned.
Important:
The reset procedure for the intrusion detection alarm system devices, except for the IR detectors, is as follows:
Press and hold the configuration button of the device to be reset; the red LED is lit (in some cases after a few
seconds).
On the control panel press Back; then press the device's configuration button again and hold it down until the
red LED goes out.
4.4.9 Control panel reset.
Used to restore the control panel to the factory settings. All data stored in the device are lost.
Setup  Configuration  Reset Control  Control Panel Reset
The control panel requests confirmation of the operation, go ahead with YES.
28
Main configurations
4.4.10 Device parameters.
• Functional unit - Left button
Operation: toggle, only ON, only OFF, push-button (it sends ON on pressing the button and OFF on releasing it).
LED control: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED manag. - normal
• Functional unit - Middle button (only for single buttons with 3 modules)
Operation: toggle, only ON, only OFF, push-button (it sends ON on pressing the button and OFF on releasing it).
LED control: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED manag. - normal
• Functional unit - Right button
Operation: toggle, only ON, only OFF, push-button (it sends ON on pressing the button and OFF on releasing it).
LED control: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED manag. - normal
• Functional unit - Left Rocker button
Operation: ON/OFF, dimmer switch, roll-up blind switch
LED control: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - on/off, LED manag. - normal
• Functional unit - Middle Rocker button (only for toggle switches with 3 modules)
Operation: ON/OFF, dimmer switch, roll-up blind switch
LED control: off, normal, reverse, always on, normal central LED, reverse central LED, central LED always on.
Default parameters: Op. - on/off, LED manag. - normal
• Functional unit - Right Rocker button
Operation: ON/OFF, dimmer switch, roll-up blind switch
LED control: off, normal, reverse, always on.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED manag. - normal
• Functional unit - Relay
Operation: one- or two-position stable
ON delay: from 0 to 200 s; then at intervals of one minute from 1 to 50 min.
OFF delay: from 0 to 200 s; then at intervals of one minute from 1 to 50 min.
Default parameters: Op. - two-position stable, ON Delay - 0, OFF Delay - 0.
• Functional unit - dimmer
Speed setting: low, medium, high.
Default parameters: Speed setting - medium
• Command 10 V Speed setting: low, medium, high.
Default parameters: Speed setting - medium
• Contact interface with 2 inputs (20490.1, 19490.1, 16940.1, 14490.1):
Input operation: normal, reversed, toggle (opening or closing).
Default parameters: Normal op.
29
Main configurations
• Interface for conventional commands:
Rocker operation: normal, reverse
Operation for push-buttons: toggle on up, toggle on down
LED control: off, on (it is enough for one of the two inputs to be active for the LED to come on).
Default parameters: Op. - Normal, LED manag. - On
• Roll-up blind actuator:
Off delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
On delay from scenario: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
On delay from switch: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Default parameters: Op. - Toggle, LED manag. - normal
• Actuator for roller shutters and blinds 01852.2.
Operation: set the actuator operating mode, namely 0 –> “Normal” and 1 –> “Blinds”.
- With the 0 (Normal) setting the device controls only the roller shutters and the typical parameter of blinds operation
will not be displayed (Step duration).
- With the 1 (Blinds) setting the device controls not only the roller shutters but also the Venetian blinds and it will be
necessary to set the "Step Duration" parameter that identifies the length of the pulse with which the actuator will
drive the motor to rotate the laths (that is it is used to determine how far you want to turn the blinds around their
axis on briefly pressing the rocker switch).
Step duration: adjustable from 70 ms to 3 s in steps of 10 ms.
The movement of the blinds is affected by briefly pressing or holding down the control button that governs them
according to the following modes:
a. Briefly pressing the control button: the laths move by one click.
b. Pressing and holding down the control button: the laths turn completely and raise or lower, depending on the
button being pressed.
c. Briefly pressing the control button while the laths are moving: the laths stop without completing the closing or
opening movement.
Deactivation delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Scenario activation delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Control activation delay: adjustable from 0 to 250 s.
Default parameters: Operation - 0, Op. - Toggle, LED control - normal.
• Receiver for infrared remote control
Operation for push-button: toggle, push-button (it sends ON on pressing the button and OFF on releasing it).
Rocker operation: on/off, dimmer switch, roll-up blind switch
LED control: off, on in reception, always on
Default parameters: Op. for Push-Button - Toggle, Op. for Push-Button - on/off, LED manag. - normal
• Mini passive infrared detector, with dual technology and surface-mounting
Brightness threshold: settable from 0 to 100 (when the setting is equal to 100, the detector operates in a situation of
total darkness).
Default parameters: Brightness threshold - 100
30
• Control device with three toggle switches and regulator actuator MASTER 20548, 16988, 14548
- The regulators also control inductive response electronic transformers 40-200 VA 230 V~ 50 Hz (200 VA max for 2
transformers); do not connect more than 2 transformers.
- Not suitable for controlling motors (eg. fans, ventilators).
- If installing 2 regulators in a single box, the loads that can be controlled by each regulator must be reduced so that
their total does not exceed the values indicated in the following table:
Loads
that can be controlled
Characteristic
of controllable
transformer
20548
16988
14548
MASTER
–
40 - 300 W
–
40 - 300 VA
L
40 - 200 VA
- The rated power level should never be exceeded.
- Overloading, power surges and short-circuits may permanently damage dimmers. Before installation check the
circuit carefully and eliminate any of the above causes.
- Do not connect several dimmers in series between each other.
- The dimmer does not have a mechanical circuit breaker in the main circuit and so is not galvanically separated.
The circuit load should be considered always under voltage.
4.4.11 Installing and configuring the touch screens
The colour touch screens (Eikon 21511, 20511.1, Plana 14511.1) and the monochrome touch screens (Eikon
20512, Idea 16952, Plana 14512) enable controlling lights, roller shutters, climate control, scenarios, etc., by
touching the icons associated with them.
The touch screen is configured via the EasyTool Professional LT software by connecting the interface 01998.U
to the specific connector on the device; on concluding this operation, it is necessary to configure the touch
screen in the By-me system so that it is recognized by the control panel and can interact with the system.
The operations to carry out differ depending on the type of touch screen and the applications you want to control.
• Colour touch screen (Eikon 21511, 20511.1, Plana 14511.1).
If, via the touch screen, you want to control only the automation system, the device can be connected to
any of the lines of the automation system (take care not to connect it to the line reserved for the intrusion
detection alarm system).
Having done this, the touch screen must be configured in a group of the automation system via the menu:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Control  Automation
If, via the touch screen, you want to control also the intrusion detection alarm system besides the automation
system, the device must be connected to the line reserved for the intrusion detection alarm system (line 00).
Having done this, the touch screen must be configured in a zone of the intrusion detection alarm system
via the menu:
Menu  Control Panel Setup  Configuration  Group Control  Alarm System  Zone
Selection  Add Device
31
Main configurations
To start configuring the touch screen from the main menu, touch these icons in the following order:



WARNING: Once you have downloaded the touch screen shots with EasyTool Professional LT and have
configured it on By-me control unit, you will then need to synchronise the touch screen router by touching
the
then the
.
RESETTING THE TOUCH SCREEN
To reset the touchscreen, carry out the following operations:
• on the By-me control panel, select the Setup -> Configuration -> Reset Control -> Device Reset menu;
• touch and keep the icon pressed until the touchscreen switches off.
The touchscreen is then reset and it is necessary to once more download the screens set with the EasyTool
Professional LT software.
• Monochrome touch screen (Eikon 20512, Idea 16952, Plana 14512).
The monochrome touch screen permits local management of the automation system (it does not control the
intrusion detection alarm system); the device can then be connected to any of the lines of the automation
system (take care not to connect it to the line reserved for the intrusion detection alarm system).
Having done this, the touch screen must be configured in a group of the automation system via the menu:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Control  Automation
To then configure the touch screen, select its icon menu:
Touch the icon
the control panel.
32
that will stay pressed until the configuration process has been concluded by
Main configurations
4.4.12 Installation and configuration of the By-me module 01965.
The By-me module 01965 is a device which must be integrated into the video door entry unit 19558 and
allows managing not only the video door entry system, but also all the functions of the By-me automation
system such as the lights control, roller shutters, HVAC, sound system, scenarios, events, and load control. If
there is also an intrusion detection alarm system, the video door entry unit allows you to control the plant with
similar modes and features to those of a digital keypad.
The configuration of the module 01965 is done with the EasyTool Professional LT software connecting the
interface 01998.U to the special connector on the device.
On concluding this operation, it is necessary to configure the module in the By-me system so that it is recognized by the control unit and can interact with the system.
If, via the module 01965, you want to control only the automation system, the device can be connected
to any of the lines of the automation system (take care not to connect it to the line reserved for the intrusion
detection alarm system).
Having done this, the module must be configured in a group of the automation system via the control panel
menu:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups Select the group scrolling through the
list  Associated devices  Add
If, via the module 01965, you want to control also the intrusion detection alarm system besides the automation system, the device must be connected to the line reserved for the intrusion detection alarm system
(area 00-line 00). Having done this, the module must be configured in a zone of the intrusion detection alarm
system via the control panel menu:
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Intrusion detection alarm system groups
group scrolling through the list  Associated devices  Add
Select
the
33
Main configurations
To configure the module 01965, starting from the main menu, tap the softkeys in sequence corresponding
to the following icons:


.
The display of the video door entry unit will show the following screen:
Tap the softkey corresponding to the icon
at bottom right to start the configuration.
Once the operation has concluded, it is necessary to synchronize the router; using
and tap the softkey corresponding to the icon
.
and
select
Once the operation has concluded, the display will show whether synchronization has taken place correctly.
Synchronization good
34
Error
Main configurations
4.4.13 Router Control
The Router Control menu enables configuring the Line Coupler art.01845, called “Router” in the control panel,
creating a new line, as per bus system architecture.
NOTE: The configured router identifies a new line that will lead to the terminals indicated with BUS 2, while the
backbone will lead to the BUS 1 terminals. The devices connected on the BUS 2 side will be addressed with
the Area and Line number of the Router.
If configuring the SAI system, the By me control panel must be configured on Area 00 and line 00, these
devices must necessarily belong to area 00 line 00 (alias: backbone line) with a maximum number of
60 devices as described in the Intrusion detection alarm system section. If configuring a system that,
at a later time, has to be integrated with the intrusiond detection alarm system, it is necessary for the
control panel to have already been configured in Area 00 and Line 00 together with its power supply
01801 and router 01845 for the automation lines.
• Configuration of the router.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Router Control  Router Control  New Router
Indicate the Area and Line to be assigned to the Router.
Press the configuration button on Line Coupler 01845 until the red Led lights up on the device. Completion
of this operation is confirmed by a message on the control unit and by the red Led going out on the device.
• Router synchronization.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Router Control
 Synchronize Router
Confirm the operation. After configuring the devices, this operation enables the Routers controlled
by the control panel, allowing the group messages to get past the line coupler. In the phase of group
management it is allowed to configure devices belonging to different lines in the same group. At the end,
the synchronization of the Routers prevents filtering the group messages.
NOTE: It is permissible to create actuator control groups on different lines.
• Manual enabling of the messages filtered by the router.
This procedure enables manually passing or blocking the messages from one or more groups in the system
(automation groups, temperature zones) via a Router selected from the ones installed in the system. Menu  Setup  Configuration  Router Control  Router Control
Select the Router on which you want to manually enable/prevent the passage of messages from a group
and confirm with Select; four options are thus highlighted that allow adding/removing a single group in the
By-me system or a single group address for EIB/KNX networks. The groups will then be selected one at
a time with the Select button and, afterwards, confirming the choice made. At the end of the operation,
exit the menus and the new groups selected will be filtered by the Routrer according to the set choices.
35
Main configurations
4.4.14 Communicator interface management.
The Interface Management menus are used to configure the Internal communication interface between the
BUS system and the phone communicators.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Communicator Interface Control  Configuration
Press the configuration button of the internal communications interface between the BUS system and the
telephone communicators. The device's red LED lights up; completion of this operation is confirmed by a
message on the control unit and by the red Led going out on the device. Now switch the communicator off
and back on again.
• Phone Communicator Configuration.
This menu is used to activate the necessary configuration procedure for the intrusion detection alarm
system (it can interact with the phone communicator, for forwarding alarm messages and for remoting
some commands of the intrusion detection alarm system itself. This operation must be performed after
configuring the interface 01848 (if the communicator is the 01941) whereas if the communicator is the
01942 the interface is incorpoprated but it is managed in a similar manner).
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Communicator Interface Control
Authentication of the Interface?  YES
Proceed to the
The communicator is thus automatically configured and the control panel's monitor confirms completion
of the operation.
Important: After configuring the interface 01848 it is possible to configure the phone communicator once
only; to do it again you need the following procedure:
1. Remove the interface 01848 from the control panel:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Communicator Interface Control
Removal
2. Interface configuration:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Communicator Interface Control Configuration
3. Switch the phone communicator off and back on again.
4. Phone Communicator Configuration:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Communicator Interface Control
Interface Authentication
• Add group to interface.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Communicator Interface Control Add Group
Proceed to the Interace Authentication ?  YES
Select the desired group by scrolling through the list of groups. When a group is added, the messages sent
to that group are no longer blocked by the internal communication interface between the bus system and the
phone communicator so as to be able to thus be managed by the communicator.
36
Main configurations
An example is managing the technical alarms of a By-me system with the phone communciator. If, after
a technical alarm has been detected by the control panel, you want the communicator to send an alarm
message (SMS or voice message) it is necessary to add the group for the contact interface generating the
technical alarm to the communicator interface.
• Removing group from interface.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Communicator Interface Control  Remove Group
Select the desired group by scrolling through the list of groups.
• Groups Monitored from a remote location.
Menu  Setup
Add Groups
 Configuration  Communicator Interface Control  Monitor Groups 
Select the groups of interest from the list of groups registered in the system.
This setting enables the selected groups (containing at least one actuator device) for remote management
via the communicator that permits activation, deactivation and status reading.
Up to 8 groups can be selected for monitoring.
Scroll through the list of groups and select the groups concerned using the Select P button.
The selected groups are marked by an .
*
Go on to configure the telephone communicator (01941 or 01942) by following the instructions in the
communicator manual.
• Removing interface.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Communicator Interface Control Removal
Remove the communicator interface ?  YES
The communicator interface will be removed from the system.
The GSM phone communicator is in addition used to carry out remote diagnostics operations; the details
are given in chap.10 “Diagnostics and maintenance” in this manual.
37
Main configurations
4.4.15 Managing BUS interface with EnOcean module
The BUS with EnOcean module radio interface allows using the devices of the radiofrequency system to extend
coverage in places or accesses where it is not possible to add any cables and devices via BUS.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20508 : 2 Eikon modules
14508 : 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Plana
The radio interface is combined with the following radio-frequency devices with the EnOcean module:
20505: control with 2 toggle buttons
01796: relay actuator with relay output
• Operation
The device communicates on the one hand via radio wave signals with the radio-frequency devices with the
EnOcean module and, on the other hand, with the devices in the system communication bus.
The functions involve the automation operations such as controlling lights, roller shade control and scenario
management.
The devices with the EnOcean module are completely integrated with the By-me devices: for example, it is
possible to have a By-me push-button in an Automation group governing an EnOcean actuator or an EnOcean button governing a By-me actuator; the devices with the EnOcean module moreover also have a role in
creating scenarios.
In a system it is possible to add up to 15 BUS interfaces with the EnOcean module and each one of them can
control at most 50 devices with the EnOcean module.
The maximum number of RF devices with the EnOcean module and SAI that can be saved in the database
of the control panel is 350.
Important:
- An interface cannot be added to more than one Automation Group;
- an EnOcean button control device can be added to at most four Automation groups
per interface;
- a relay actuator device with the EnOcean module can be added to at most 30 groups;
- actuators join scenarios when the group to which they belong is associated with a scenario.
The BUS interface with the EnOcean module features two main modes of operation:
- Regular operation: receives information from the radio-frequency devices and sends it through the
communication bus, and vice versa.
- Configuration: in the phase of adding radiofrequency devices it saves the characteristics of the component
that has responded and communicates some information to the control panel.
38
Main configurations
20550+01960
Controls
Controls
PAT.
PEND.
RF BUS interface
20508 - 14508
RF control
20505 + buttons
MADE
IN
ITALY
29 V
bus
M
RF actuator
01796
Actuator
with relay
L
N
Controls
with relay
actuator
RF actuator
01796
Controls
with actuator
for roller shades
Example of connecting devices with EnOcean module integrated in the By-me automation system.
• Interface configuration.
An interface must always be associated with an automation group;
The first operation to be carried out therefore consists in creating the group:
Menu  Setup
Group
 Configuration  Group Management  Automation Groups  New
The new group is saved in the database.
The second operation consists in associating the interface with the group:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Management  Automation Groups 
 Select group  Adding Device
Then press the configuration button in the interface to add it to the created group.
An interface can be added to one group only.
Note: For practical purposes it is not important in which group the interface 20508-14508; is configured; it
is therefore recommended to configure it in one of the first automation groups for faster
access to the menus.
39
Main configurations
• Removing the interface.
This option permits removing functional units from a functional group.
Menu  Setup
group
 Configuration  Group Management  Automation Groups  Select
After entering the group, select the functional unit related to the interface to be removed by scrolling through the list of units and press Remove; the control panel displays:
Proceed to remove the device ?  YES
The control panel indicates when removal is complete; together with the interface, all the devices with the
EnOcean module associated with it are removed from the database, and that is the button controls in the
Automation groups, the button controls associated with the scenarios and the relay actuators.
WARNING: To complete the procedure it is necessary to reset the radio relay actuators associated
with the interface. If any of these actuators have been configured in other interfaces too, the relay
will stop working; it is therefore necessary to remove them and reconfigure them in the relevant
groups.
• Interface diagnostics.
This option permits checking the operation of the interfaces with the EnOcean module and managing their
replacement.
Menu  Setup  Diagnostics  Device diagnostics
Press Select; the control panel initiates a scan procedure to check that all the configured devices are
functioning correctly.
In case of error and subsequent replacement of the interface 20508 - 14508, besides the configuration
information, also the related devices with the EnOcean module previously associated with it are restored.
• Device configuration
This procedure allows associating the interface with the EnOcean module with the radio toggle buttons
(20505 + 20506 or 20505 +14506 and the radio relay actuator 01796.
Select the group where the BUS interface with the EnOcean module has been inserted.
Scroll through the list of devices to the desired interface, select it and enter DeviceParameters; scroll through the list of parameters to RF Devices and select View.
Select the desired group from the existing ones; add the device selecting the desired type of
control choosing between button control and relay control.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Management  Automation Groups 
 Select group  Select RF interface  Param  RF devices: View:
 Add Button/Relay  Select group
The configuration procedure now depends on the type of control selected.
Adding button: On the control unit, access the above-stated configuration menu and press the
desired button (left or right) on the device with the EnOcean module.
Adding Relay: On the control unit, access the above-mentioned configuration menu and press the LRN button
on the relay actuator 01796; lastly press the configuration button on the interface to complete the procedure correctly.
40
Main configurations
The radio interface sends a message to the control panel that shows the information related to the device
code and its description on the display.
Then repeat the operation for each device that you want to add.
Pressing the Close button takes you back to the previous menu that shows all the devices added on the
interface, displaying the code, description and associated automation group.
In addition, it is possible to add the same device with the EnOcean module on more than one interface,
each one in a different group, in order to increase the system's radio coverage; likewise, it is possible to
add a device to a single interface associating it with a number of groups. In both cases the group depth
is equal to 4.
Note: If adding a button on different interfaces in the same group, it must continue to have the same type
in relation to the type of actuator (on/off, dimmer, roller shades).
For further details, please refer to the manual of interface 20508 - 14508.
• Removing Devices
This option allows removing a single device with the EnOcean module from an interface; removal can be
done in two ways:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Management  Automation Groups 
 Select group  Select RF interface  Param  RF devices: View:
Scrolling through the list, select the device you want to remove and press Remove.
Likewise, removal can be performed as follows:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Management  Automation Groups
In the desired Group, select the functional unit to be removed by scrolling through the list; the removal
procedure now depends on the type of device that has to be removed:
- RF button: Press Remove on the control panel menu.
- RF relay: Press the LRN push-button of the radio actuator to be removed and then press
Remove on the control panel menu.
Warning: It is not possible to remove a group containing buttons and actuators with the EnOcean module
without having first removed them from this group.
• Changing interface parameters
The interface with the EnOcean module features some operating parameters that can be set by the user.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Management  Automation Groups  Select
Group  Select RF interface  Param
The available interface parameters are:
• Interface LED blink mode:
- Off = the green LED never lights up;
- Normal = the green LED is off whereas it blinks when it receives an RF message;
- Inverted = the green LED is on whereas it blinks when it receives an RF message;
• RF devices:
- View = access to the menu for displaying all the RF devices associated with the interface and for Add
Device.
41
Main configurations
• Interface number:
- Progressive interface number, from 1 to 15, assigned automatically by the control panel and that cannot
be modified.
• Changing the parameters of the device with the EnOcean module
This option allows changing the parameters related to the radio devices with the EnOcean module.
The device with the EnOcean module is displayed in the menu of the Automations group with which it is
associated.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Management  Automation Groups  Select
Group
The display shows the address, description and number of the functional unit.
Enter the Group and, scrolling through the list of units, select the functional unit whose parameters you want
to change; then press Param.
On the toggle button device with the EnOcean module it is possible to change the type of associated control; the
available types are the following:
- On/Off; - Dimmer control;
- Roller shade control.
Select the desired type of control and press Set; lastly press Save.
The relay actuator with the EnOcean module has no parameters.
As regards the address taken by the devices with the EnOcean module, it will have Area equal to 0, Line
equal to the number of the interface with which it is associated, and device number ranging from 1 to 50.
For example:
- 0x0101 corresponds to device no. 1 of interface no. 1;
- 0x0F32 corresponds to device no. 50 of interface no. 15.
• Scenario management with toggle button control with EnOcean module
In the range of devices with the EnOcean module, the button control (20505 + 20506 or 20505 + 14506)
can be used in scenario management as an external button.
The procedure for associating the button with the desired scenario is as follows:
Scenarios  Setup  Button association  T.Ext  Associate new RF button 
 Select Area and Line
It is now necessary first of all to identify the interface that is located at a suitable distance for receiving the
radio signal; having done this, press its configuration push-button.
On the control panel menu, select the Top or Btm. side of the button on which to activate the control and
then press the EnOcean button to be associated with the chosen side.
If you attempt to configure a device with the EnOcean module already in a group the control panel will
display this message:
Error: device already occupied in a group: it cannot be used to call up a scenario!
42
Main configurations
• Scenario management with relay actuator with EnOcean module
In the range of devices with the EnOcean module, the relay actuator 01796 can be used for scenario management.
The procedure for doing this consists in associating or removing a group in the desired scenario.
Scenarios  Setup  Scenario Management  Select Associated Groups  Select
It is now sufficient to add or remove the group to which the actuator 01796 belongs.
• Device identification and strength of reception
This option allows displaying the information related to a device with the EnOcean module already configured
in the system, namely:
- physical address,
- group or scenario to which it belongs.
- strength of reception of the radio signal (RSSI)
The procedure is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Device Identification
To identify the button control device with the EnOcean module it suffices to press the button.
Pressing Info displays all the functional units, corresponding to the pressed button, that have been configured
in the interfaces with the EnOcean module that have detected the button being pressed.
By pressing Info RF it is possible to display more information such as the type of device, serial code,
interface with which it is associated and the strength of reception of the signal (RSSI) of the button.
For the device to work properly, it is sufficient to have a reception strength greater than 30%.
Note: This procedure has different characteristics to the one performed for the devices on the bus as it is
necessary to manage the radio communications too. For this reason it is recommended to wait approximately
thirty seconds after pressing the Device Identification button before starting to identify the devices with the
EnOcean module.
In addition, pressing the Info button displays a number of messages according to the number of times it is
pressed and the number of interfaces in which the identified device is configured.
Device identification cannot be performed on 01796 actuators.
43
Main configurations
4.4.16 Interface for managing emergency lamps via By-me Bus.
The device, suitably installed in the emergency lighting appliance 02660 and 02660.120, enables controlling the lamp
via the By-me control unit.
Characteristics.
• Rated supply voltage: Bus 29 V.
• Absorption: 10 mA.
• Configuration button for programming the device in all By-me systems with control unit 01960, 01950, 01951,
01952, 01956 and 01958.
• Terminals: TP Bus
• Operation:
- When mains voltage is present, the lamp is switched on/off with one or more push-button commands connected
to the bus;
- creation of scenarios that also involve the emergency lighting system.
CONFIGURATION.
The configuration must be made only when the interface 01846 has been connected both to the By-me system and
to the emergency lighting appliance that you want to control.
• Functional blocks: 1; the block can belong to at most 4 different groups.
• Functional block selection (configuration): during group creation, when the control unit is requesting you to press
the device button:
- Press and release the button; the red LED illuminates.
- With the red LED on, the control panel will configure the functional block; at the end of this operation the red LED
will go out.
• Addition of an emergency lamp to a functional group. It enables adding an interface 01846 (previously connected to an emergency lamp 02660) to a lights group.
Setup configuration group management automation 080 Group Add Device
Press the configuration button of the interface 01846; the lamp then comes on associated with the selected
group.
• Setting the lamp parameters
Setup configuration group management automation
Enter the Group and select the functional block for which parameters are to be modified by scrolling through the
list of blocks Param
The parameters that can be modified for each functional block depend on the characteristics of the
block concerned.
44
Main configurations
Select the Emergency Lamp block and set the following parameters:
• Operation (selecting SA Always On or SE Only Emergency)
• Duration of Emergency (selecting 1 h or 3 h).
Then, for instance, on configuring a key of a button control in the same group as the interface 01846
it will be possible to control the emergency lamp.
The configuration must be made only when the interface 01846 has been connected both to the By-me system and
to the emergency lighting appliance that you want to contro
• Removing a lamp from a functional group.
Used to remove the emergency lamp from a functional group.
Setup configuration group management automation
Enter the Group and, scrolling through the list of blocks, select Emergency Lamp Remove
Proceed to remove the device? YES (The control unit indicates when removal is complete).
Parameters.
• Operation: Only Emergency (non-permanent SE mode) or Always On (permanent SA mode). • Emergency Duration (time for which the lamp stays on following a mains power cut): 1 or 3 hours.
• Default parameters:
- Operation: Only Emergency.
- Emergency Duration 1 hour.
Scenes.
The interface 01846 can belong to up to 4 different scenes and, for each one of them, save the status to
retrieve when activating the scene. For further details see the control unit manual.
4.4.17 USB Interface Management 01847.
The menus illustrated in this paragraph allow configuring the interface for connecting the bus of the By-me
system with the PC on which the program for Microsoft Media Center ® is installed. The interface 01847 is
supplied with art. 01997; see the relevant instructions sheet for the details about configuring the device.
• Configuring the interface 01847.
If the system includes an intrusion detection alarm system, connect the interface to the bus (via the
dedicated RJ11 jack) paying the utmost attention to check that the device is connected to the line reserved
for the intrusion detection alarm system (Area 00, line 00).
45
Main configurations
If, on the contrary, the system has no intrusion detection alarm system it suffices to connect the interface
(again via the dedicated RJ11 jack) to the line of the bus on which the control panel is connected.
- From the menu:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  USB Interface Control  Configuration
Press the configuration button of the USB Interface USB 01847 for approximately two seconds.
The red LED of the control panel will light up and, for approximately two seconds, the monitor will show a
confirmation message for the configuration. At the end of this message the control panel will again display
the USB Interface Management menu.
• Importing the control panel database.
After configuring the interface 01847 in the system according to the procedures described in the above
paragraph, the control panel database is imported by the “EasyTool” software supplied with the respective
interface in art. 01998.U.
For the procedure for importing the database, please refer to the instructions manual of the EasyTool
Professional LTsoftware (chap. 4 “Main folder”).
The database will then be imported into a file (that will therefore contain all the information on the system)
with which it will be possible to create an additional file that will allow managing the system via the program
for Microsoft Media Center ® (for all the details see the installer's manual contained in art. 01997).
• Authentication of interface 01847.
For interface 01847 to allow managing the By-me system with the program for Microsost Media Center ® it
must not only be configured but also authenticated; the procedure is as follows:
- From the menu:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  USB Interface Control  USB Interface Authentication
Confirmation Request  YES
For approximately two seconds, the control panel monitor will show a message confirming that the interface
has been authenticated. At the end of this message the control panel will again display the
USB Interface Management menu.
• Removing interface 01847.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  USB Interface Control  Removal
Proceed to Remove the Interface ?  YES
The USB interface 01847 will be removed from the system.
46
Main configurations
4.5 Settings menu.
Used to adjust the control panel clock, language used, settings for the display and keypad tones, different profiles
for accessing the control panel menus, the favourite applications to display on the start screen and to set the
screensaver.
4.5.1 Clock adjustment.
Used to set the date and time.
Setup  Settings  Clock
Set the date and time using the pq buttons to change the settings and t u to move onto each item.
On completion, confirm with Save. The control panel confirms the operation has been completed.
4.5.2 Language settings.
Used to set the national language in which the menus are displayed. The available languages are Italian,
English, German, Spanish, French and Greek.
Setup  Settings  Language
The language currently active is indicated by the P character; select the required language with the pq
buttons and confirm with Save. The control panel confirms that the operation has successfully been completed.
4.5.3 Display and Tones.
Used to set the display parameters as well as the operating and programming key tones of the control panel.
Setup  Settings  Display and Tones  Contrast and Brightness
It is possible to adjust Contrast, Brightness and Backlighting of the display using the p q buttons to move
onto each item and t u to change the settings.
Confirm with Save; The control panel confirms that the operation has successfully been completed.
Setup  Settings  Display and Tones  Interface Colour
Used to set the background colour of the display; select the desired colour with pq and confirm with Select
P. Lastly go ahead and Save. The control panel confirms the operation has been completed.
To disable the key tones move onto the item:
Setup  Settings  Display and Tones  Keypad tones
To cancel the tones press Del P, to restore them Select P. Go ahead and Save to confirm. The control panel
confirms the operation has been completed.
To return the display settings to the factory settings:
Setup  Settings  Display and Tones  Restore initial tones
The control panel requests confirmation of the operation, go ahead with YES or cancel with NO; A confirmation
message is displayed.
47
Main configurations
4.5.4 User Management.
The control panel can be used to set different menu access profiles and thereby configure user rights (operating
modes depending on the user); a total of up to 20 users can be set (one of which is the administrator).
Setup  Settings  User Control
The users registered in the system are displayed. From here it is possible to add new ones or change the
access parameters of ones already registered.
At the time of first switching on, there are three types of user available on the control panel:
- Administrator, who has the right to perform every kind of operation and must always enter his or her password;
- Guest, who has limited rights that can however be changed at any time (guests do not enter passwords);
- Us. Prog. Events, whose partitions are called up when the intrusion detection alarm system is turned on/off
using an automated program created with the Events menu.
It is therefore possible to customize access to system functions by creating different user profiles.
Note.
If there is also the intrusion detection alarm system and more than one user has been set, each one with
a different partition for turning on the system associated with button B on the control panel, the Guest
management rights over the intrusion detection alarm system must be disabled.
To enter a new user, sect the relevant item with Select. Now by using the User Name menu you can name
the user.
For this purpose use the t u buttons to move onto the displayed characters and confirm with Char P.
It is possible to set the upper or lower case with a..A, delete with Delete.
Lastly confirm with the Name P. button. The control panel confirms the operation and requires a PIN code to
be created for the user that has just been created.
In the Change PIN menu save the password for the profile by using the A,B,C,D buttons and confirm the
operation with Confirm (the operation is then prompted again to confirm the password). The password must
must have at least 5 characters and max 8; by holding down each one of the four buttons A,B,C,D of the
control panel, it is possible to set all the numerical options (for instance, hold down button A and the monitor
will display the numbers 1, 2, 3). The control panel then confirms the operation.
With the Setting Rights menu you assign the access profile to the control panel menus such as scenarios,
thermostats, programming, load control, intrusion detection alarm system, video door entry system.
Select the relevant item and tick it with Del P to remove it or add it with Select P.
In the same way with the Spec button you access special rights assignment for configuring the abovementioned various menu items besides control panel Administration (Settings menu); from here, with the
Norm button, you again access normal rights (scenarios, climate control, etc.).
Confirm at the end of the operation; The control panel confirms the operation has been completed.
To delete the current profile move onto the Remove User item, the control panel will ask for confirmation, go
ahead with YES. The display shows the deletion made.
48
Main configurations
At the end of these operations, save the settings made with the Save button. The control panel confirms the
operation has been completed.
If this is not the case, you are asked whether you want to quit the changes without saving.
By logging out from the main menu you automatically go back in with the default rights set for “Guests”. If you
want to “limit” access to certain menus, it is necessary, with the Administrator login, to change the access
profile for “Guests”.
To entirely inhibit access to a menu item, you first need to remove the rights for configuration and then tick off
the items relating to use as described above.
This is useful to prevent unauthorized access to the control panel menus.
N.B. For the Administrator profile it is possible to go ahead only with Change PIN.
For Guest profile management, access is only permissible to the User Name and Setting Rights menus.
4.5.5 Favourite Application.
Used to set the start-up screen you want to be displayed.
Setup  Settings  Favourite Application
Scroll through the menu items and select your favourite application from the ones displayed with Select P. On
completing this operation, confirm with Save.
The control panel confirms the operation has been completed.
4.5.6 Screen saver.
Used to set the date, time, day and ambient temperature to use as a screensaver.
Setup  Settings  Screensaver
Select the desired item with Select P and save the settings with Save.
The control panel notifies that the operation has successfully been completed.
Pressing the Time button selects the off time at the end of which the control panel activates the screen
saver; press Select P and use the p q keys to make the selection and the Confirm button to confirm the
selection.
If you go onto a time previously set and press the Del P button the time of activation of the screensaver
will go back to its default setting (approximately 1 and a half minutes); then press Confirm to confirm the
selection.
Lastly, press any button to go back to the main menu.
49
Air-conditioning control
5. Air-conditioning control.
The By-me home automation system is used to manage climate control programs (heating and air-conditioning)
using the control panel. The control panel can control up to 40 thermostats in Timer-Thermostat mode (Eikon
20513 - 20514, Idea 16953 -16954, Plana 14513 - 14514) permitting programmed control of up to 40 different
zones.
Note.
• For each operation to be carried out, the control unit asks for the zone to which the operation is applied.
Timer-thermostat functions:
• Automatic operation: 2 separate temperature programs (one for heating and one for air-conditioning) for each of
the 40 controlled zones.
• Manual operation: temperature value adjustable from 5.0 °C to 30.0 °C (heating) and from 10 °C to 35 °C (airconditioning).
• Timed manual operation.
• Reduction: temperature value adjustable from 5.0 °C to 30.0 °C (heating) and from 10 °C to 35 °C (airconditioning).
• Timed reduction.
• Antifreeze (temperature value adjustable from 0°C to 15.0°C).
• Timed Off.
• Off.
• Adjusting the speed of the fan-coils with the thermostats 20513, 16953 and 14513.
5.1 General settings.
This paragraph describes the procedures for setting parameters that are modified only occasionally.
5.1.1 Group association.
Used to define the 40 air-conditioning zones to be controlled, by selecting the related groups.
It is firstly necessary to define the temperature zones to be controlled, by selecting the groups involved.
First of all it is necessary to create a new group:
Setup  Configuration  Group Control  Climate Control
Name the group as described on page 27.
In the group configure just one thermostat device and at least one relay actuator; in addition, it is also possible
to configure one or more control interfaces that, for instance, will detect a window opening (via magnetic
contact) and will switch off the heating/air-conditioning system (see paragraph 5.2.1).
The configuration procedure is identical to the one used in the Automation menu; to configure the thermostat,
press button A on the device (the first one on the left) thus displaying the icon CNF blinking.
N.B. It is recommended to assign short names for the rooms to control.
50
Air-conditioning control
5.1.2 Zone management.
From the main menu move into the Clima menu
Climate  Setup  Climate Zone Control  Select  01 New zone  Select
The control panel displays the climate groups created in the configuration menu as described above. Using the
Select button, set the group for the desired zone. The control panel confirms the operation and returns the screen
to the list of registered zones. To associate other groups repeat the operation on “New zone”.
5.1.2.1 Zone activation.
Afterwards it is necessary to activate control of the zone with the control panel.
Climate  Setup  Climate Zone  select
Select the zone and press Select to confirm.
Control Change  Central  settings
Save the setting with the Save button; the control panel will display the screen for the temperature zone that
has just been set with the relevant operation and temperature.
Repeat this operation for all the required temperature zones.
5.1.2.2 Zone deactivation.
Used to turn off control of the zone selected by the control panel.
Climate  Setup  Climate Zone  select
Select the zone and press Select to confirm.
Control  Change  Local  settings
Save the setting with the Save button; repeat this operation for all the temperature zones to turn off.
5.1.2.3 Zone settings
Used for each single thermostat to set infrequently changed parameters.
Climate  Setup  Zone settings
Select the zone and press Select to confirm; then go ahead and set the parameters
following the instructions given in the following paragraphs (from par. 5.1.2.4 to par. 5.1.2.9)
51
Air-conditioning control
5.1.2.4 Heating or air-conditioning mode.
Used to set the operating mode of the system, making it possible to select the operating mode, for each zone,
for either heating (winter period) or air-conditioning (summer period). Supposing that the temperature zone has
been called “ Thermostat 01”:
Climate  Setup  Zone settings  01 Thermostat  Heat/Climate  Change
Set the desired operating mode using buttons p q and confirm with Set. At the end of the operation press
Save. The control panel confirms the operation performed and goes back to display the registered temperature
zones.
N.B.
When changing from heating to air-conditioning mode and vice versa, the operating mode changes
automatically to OFF.
5.1.2.5 Temperature differential.
Used to set the temperature differential of the system, and personalize it for each zone.
The temperature differential is the difference between the set temperature and the actual temperature of
switching the system on or off. By adjusting the temperature differential, the system can be prevented from
continually switching on or off; systems with high thermal inertia (for example, systems with cast iron radiators)
require a low temperature differential value, and systems with low thermal inertia (for example, systems with
fan coil units) require a high value. Supposing that the temperature zone has been called “ Thermostat 01”:
Climate  Setup  Zone settings  01 Thermostat
 Thermal
Diff.  Change
Select the desired zone.
Set the desired value and confirm with Set. At the end of the operation press Save. The control panel confirms
the operation performed and goes back to display the registered temperature zones.
Example.
If the ambient temperature is set to 20 °C and the temperature differential is set to 0.3 °C, the system will come
on when the ambient temperature falls to 19.7 °C and will go off when it reaches 20.3 °C (in Heating mode).
5.1.2.6 Normal or protected operation.
The thermostats (Eikon 20513 - 20514, Idea 16953 -16954, Plana 14153 -14514) are used for local control
(zone by zone) by the user. If the operating mode is set to “protected”, thermostat control is limited to switching
off the system and setting the set-point within a pre-defined time, in order to prevent any unauthorized
operations. Supposing that the temperature zone has been called “ Thermostat 01”:
Climate  Setup  Zone settings  01 Thermostat  Protection  Change
Select the zone to be protected.
Set the desired operating mode; the control unit displays a message confirming that the operation has been
completed.
52
Air-conditioning control
Afterwards set the protection range (±2 to ±5)
Protection Range  Change
Set the desired value and confirm with Set. At the end of the operation press Save. The control panel confirms
the operation performed and goes back to display the registered temperature zones.
The thermostat display will now show the padlock symbol.
N.B.
• When changing from “Normal” to “Protected” mode and vice versa, the operating mode changes
automatically to OFF.
• The reference set-point must be set with the control panel.
5.1.2.7 Type of system.
The thermostats for controlling the fan coils (Eikon 20513, Idea 16953, Plana 15413) are used to manage the
fan coils via the temperature control system.
These climate control devices need a control system to govern the speed of the fan and the opening of the
valves for hot water (heating) or cold water (air-conditioning) circulation.
With just one type of climate control (heating or air-conditioning), the plumbing system is composed of two
pipes, one for delivery and one for return.
With two types of climate control (heating and air-conditioning), the plumbing system is composed of four
pipes, one for delivery and one for return for each function.
The main circulation pump/valve must be controlled with the actuator 01850.1 and this must be associated
with all the temperature zones (that is it must be configured in all the climate control groups).
On creating the first group the operating mode must be set as circulation pump (it suffices to do this only on
the first climate control group created).
53
Air-conditioning control
SYSTEM WITH 2 PIPES
Return
Delivery 1
Delivery n
FAN COIL
zone 1
FAN COIL
zone n
SYSTEM WITH 4 PIPES
Cold return
Hot return
Delivery 1 hot
FAN COIL
zone 1
Delivery 1 cold
Delivery n hot
FAN COIL
zone n
Delivery n cold
Figure 5.1.2.7.1: operating diagram of a system with 2 and 4 pipes
54
Air-conditioning control
Relay actuator operating mode for a 2-pipe system.
• For each temperature zone, install art. 01851.1 using outputs 1, 2 and 3 to control the fan coil, and output 4 for the valve.
• For the main circulation pump/valve, install art.01850.1 selecting mode “P.Circ. (Hot)”.
Relay actuator operating mode for a 4-pipe system.
• For each temperature zone, install art. 01851.1 using outputs 1, 2 and 3 to control the fan coil, and output 4
for the “hot” valve; then install art. 01850.1 and use its output for the “cold”. valve.
• For the main circulation pump/valve of the “hot” delivery use art.01850.1 selecting mode “P.Circ. (Hot)”.
• For the main circulation pump/valve of the “cold” delivery use art.01850.1 selecting mode “P.Circ. (Cold)”.
If the temperature zone is associated with a thermostat 20513,16953 or 14513, the control panel automatically
suggests the parameter setting that permits selecting the type of system with two or four pipes.
Supposing that the temperature zone has been called “ Thermostat 01”:
Climate  Setup Climate zone settings Thermostat 01 Type of installation  Change
Then set the desired type of system using buttons p q and confirm with Set; at the end
of the operation press the Save button last.
The control panel confirms the operation performed and goes back to display the registered temperature zones.
5.1.2.8 Select temperature zone to be displayed.
Used to set the zone to be displayed on the control panel via the Clima menu.
Climate  Setup  Zone settings  Select
Select the zone to display and press the Monitor button
The control panel will display an icon with the shape of an eye on the chosen zone.
5.1.2.9 Removing a temperature zone.
Climate  Setup  Climate zone  Select
Select the zone to remove and confirm with Select; then press Delete and confirm with YES.
The zone will be deleted and you return to the list of temperature zones.
55
Air-conditioning control
5.2 Operating modes.
This section describes the system operating modes that can be selected: Off, Timed Off, Antifreeze, Reduction,
Timed Reduction, Manual, Timed Manual, Automatic.
Note.
If a Timed mode is selected, the control unit stores the previous mode and returns to this mode after the set time
has elapsed.
From the main screen press p q and move onto the zone where you want to set the desired mode.
By pressing the Operation C button a number of times you pass from one mode to another (the respective icons
will be displayed) and confirm by pressing button I.
With the buttons B and D you set the temperature for each single desired mode via the next screen that appears.
It is possible from here to go back via button C, set the desired temperature with B and D. On completion, confirm
with button A Set.
For the manual, reduction and Off modes, button A takes you to time dependent operation up to a max of 99h.
Increase or decrease the number of hours with the buttons B and D, go back with C or confirm with Set (A).
From Automatic operation, by setting the desired temperature the mode passes automatically to temporary manual
(override).
Select the desired zone, then set the operating mode by selecting from the following:
• Off: used to switch off the system;
• Timed Off: used to switch off the system for the desired period;
• Antifreeze: used to set a minimum temperature level in order to prevent damage to the pipes and so that the
temperature will not go below a safe level;
• Reduction: (night reduction/energy saving), used to set a lower temperature (heating) or higher temperature
(air-conditioning) than the one in the automatic temperature control program, by selecting a value between 5 °C
and 30 °C (heating) and between 10 °C and 35 °C (air-conditioning). The temperature is set according to the set
point for nighttime reduction.
• Timed reduction: used to set the reduced temperature for the desired period;
• Manual: used to set the temperature according to the manually set point;
• Timed manual operation: used to set manual mode for the desired period;
• Automatic: used to set the temperature according to a pre-selected program in memory [see paragraph 5.3
“Programming” – page 69].
Note: It is not possible to pass from one type of operation to the timed equivalent.
56
Air-conditioning control
5.2.1 Setting the speed of the fan coils
The thermostats for controlling the fan coils (Eikon 20513, Idea 16953, Plana 14513) permit adjusting the
speed of the fans via a specific menu that can be shown on the display of the device or on the control panel.
There are two methods of control: manual and automatic.
• on selecting manual mode the user sets the desired speed;
• on selecting automatic mode the speed is adjusted by the thermostat according to the difference between
the ambient temperature and the set point; the greater the difference and the higher the speed.
On the control panel, with the screen for the fan coil thermostat, the fan speed adjustment is set with button A.
The value of the speed is shown in the middle of the screen by the following icons:
• " --> off
• # --> minimum speed
• $ --> medium speed
• % --> maximum speed
• ! --> automatic speed
Pressing button A scrolls cyclically through the associated icons at minimum, medium, maximum and
automatic speed, then leaving the one you want to set displayed.
5.2.2 Forced switch-off.
In certain situations, it may be necessary to force the air-conditioning system to switch off (for example, if the
windows are opened).
To activate this function, a contact interface is required (Eikon 20515, Idea 16955; Plana 14515,) in the same
group as the thermostat and relay. If the system is forced to OFF, the thermostat ignores the temperature
values transmitted by the control unit.
CONTROL
PANEL
setpoint
THERMOSTAT
on/off
CONTACT
INTERFACE
on/off
RELAY
Figure 5.2.1.1: thermostat with attachment interface for forcing the Climate control to OFF
57
Air-conditioning control
5.3 Programming.
This section describes the procedures for setting personalized air-conditioning programs for the 40 zones.
5.3.1 Zone selection.
The By-me system can be used to create personalized programs for automatic heating or air-conditioning
control. Personalizing consists in setting a temperature level - which can be selected from three different
values (T1, T2 and T3) - every 20 minutes; in the heating and air-conditioning programmes the values T1, T2
and T3 can be differentiated.
Select the zone to be programmed.
Climate  Setup  Zone programming
Move onto the desired zone and press the Program button
Select the program to be created.
Heating
Air conditioning
Press Select.
Select the day to be modified then press Select.
Modify the program by selecting the time slot at which to change the temperature level (buttons tO Ou),
set the desired temperature level from the three available (button T1..T3) then confirm with the button T u.
Repeat the procedure for all time slots to be changed, then press Confirm.
Move onto another day of the week and proceed as above, by using the Copy From button, it is possible to
assign the selected day with the program of any other day of the week; using buttons p q select the day to
copy and lastly press Copy. You are asked to confirm the operation, then press YES.
On completion, save the configuration with Save, confirm with YES. The control panel displays the save and
goes back to the registered temperature zone screen.
5.3.2 Temperature level settings.
Clima  Setup  Programming Climate zone  Select
Select the desired zone and press Levels T.
Select:
Heating
Air conditioning
Using the buttons p q move onto the temperature level to change and press Change.
Set the desired value with p qand confirm with Set.
Save the settings with Save. The control panel goes back to the screen with the registered zones.
58
Scenarios
6. Scenarios.
A scenario is made up of a set of events that can be called at any time by means of a single command, for example
to switch on the lights in a living room and lower the shutters at the same time.
6.1 Creating a scenario.
The procedures for creating a scenario are performed using the special menus available on the control unit; they
involve the use of a selected number of functional groups (which must be indicated when creating the scenario)
and their related functional units.
The procedure for creating a new scenario is as follows:
1. Select the functional groups involved (this is done at the control panel);
2. Set the users (i.e. actuators) of the groups concerned in the desired state (load ON, load OFF, load dimmed,
shutter up, shutter down, etc.). This operation must be carried out directly on the actuators and related controls;
3. Store the scenario in memory (this is done at the control panel);
4. Rename the scenario (this is done at the control panel).
Notes.
• The order in which steps 1 and 2 are carried out is not important; simply remember that the scenario will store
the status of all the actuators in the groups involved.
• The control interface does not control and is not controlled by any of the scenarios. Scenarios only control the
actuators in functional groups, and control interfaces are devices with inputs only.
Procedure for creating a scenario.
Open the Scenarios menu
Scenes  Setup  Scene control  01 New scenario  select
Normal scenario  select
Enter the name of the scenario using the buttons t u to select the letters and confirm each letter with Car P. It
is possible to choose an upper or lower case character with A..a. Confirm with Save.
Select the item
Associated groups  select  add group  select
Scroll through the list of groups using the buttons p q and select by pressing Associate. The selected groups
are marked by a P.
It is possible to remove a single group with the item Remove, or add or remove all the groups with Ass.All, Rem.All.
At the end press the Save button, the control panel will ask you to set the actuator status and then press the memor
button; The control panel confirms saving has been completed. Close to go back to the groups screen.
Now press back to go back to view the menu for managing the set scenario.
59
Scenarios
Warning.
• Select Normal when the scenario is composed of functional groups belonging to a single control panel.
• Select Global only when the scenario must be composed of functional groups belonging to a number of lines. In
this case, the “Create Scenario” operation must be performed on all the systems and the same Global scenario
must be selected on each of them.
Using the buttons of the groups involved in the scenario, set the users by placing them in the desired state (ON
or OFF, shutter raised or lowered, thermostat ON, etc.); during this phase, the green Led of the devices belonging
to the functional groups flash so that they can be identified clearly.
Press the Memor button on the control panel to confirm the operation.
• Selecting Global, the procedure is similar:
Example.
We want to create a scenario involving a number of functional groups in two different control panels (example:
system 1 with Area = 1 and Line =1, System 2 with Area = 1 and Line = 2). Follow the procedures described
above to create two separate scenarios for the two systems, taking account of the constraints listed below:
• the scenarios must have the same number/index of scenario;
• the two scenarios must be defined as Global
Important.
When saving scenarios involving roll-up blind switches and/or relay actuators configured as
one-position stable, it is necessary to carry out the following operations:
• Roll-up blind switches: The state of the roller shutters of the saved scenario depends on the last command
received from the roller shutter actuator regardless of the OFF time set in the Parameters menu. For instance,
if the off delay is 5 s and the last command received is “roller shutter up," if the scenario is saved after 5 s the
status of the command to be saved will be "roller shutter up."
• One-position stable relay actuators: The state with which the relay actuator set as one-position stable is
saved in a scenario is tied to the status of the relay and not the last command received. For instance, if the
relay is configured as one-position stable with an off delay of 5 s and if the scenario is saved after the relay has
re-opened the contact, on activating this scenario the relay will remain open. It follows that if it is desired to
save the closure of the relay in the scenario it is necessary to set it beforehand as two-position stable, having it
closed later by a command of its group and then saving the scenario. Lastly the one-position stable operation
must be restored with the Parameters menu of the relay actuator.
6.2 Activating a scenario.
When a scenario is activated, it retrieves the states stored in memory for all the actuators in the functional groups
involved; the operation can be performed at the control unit, or through a control device.
6.2.1 Activating with the control panel.
If the scenario is activated from the control panel, the procedure is as follows:
Scenes  Scenario 1 press the corresponding button (button A)
60
Scenarios
To access more than 4 scenarios, press the Others button, select the scenario to activate with the buttons
p qand lastly to activate press Select.
6.2.1 Activation through a control panel button control.
To associate one of the buttons A,B,C,D of the scenario control menu with a created scenario, access the
menu
Scenes  setup  button association  select
Highlight the relevant scenario with p q then press t.est.
Now, as displayed, press the desired button. The control panel then offers a series of icons to associate with
this scenario. Scroll through the list with p q and press the Save button.
6.2.2 Activation through a button control.
• As well as from the control panel, a scenario can be activated from an appropriately configured control
device, which must never belong to any group and which must never be configured from the control
panel. The control devices that can be used are:
• simple push-button control: can be associated with one scenario only;
• toggle switch control: can be associated with two scenarios, one for the up position and one for the
down position; if it is associated with one scenario only, the unused position can be activated only for
controlling a new scenario, and not for any other functions (for example, on/off).
• infrared remote control 01849: the scenarios that can be associated depend on the number and on
the configuration assigned to the infrared receivers (Eikon 20516, Idea 16956, Plana 14516).
Scenes  setup  button association  select
Highlight the relevant scenario with p q then press t.int.
Associate new button  select
The control panel will then display the area and line where you want to select the button to be associated.
Scroll through the list with p q and press select.
Now press the configuration button and the button to be associated.
If a push-button control is being configured, the control panel confirms the operation; if a toggle switch is
being configured, it is necessary to indicate on which button the scenario must be associated (press lower
or upper..). The control panel confirms the operation. Pressing the close button next displays the configured
button screen.
If you attempt to configure a device already in a group the control panel will display this message:
Error: device already occupied in a group: it cannot be used to call up a scenario!
Note.
It is not possible to associate a scenario activation button with an interface for conventional controls (Eikon
20515, Idea 16955, Plana 14515).
61
Scenarios
6.3 Renaming a scenario.
It is possible to change the name of a scenario, assigning it a new one with a maximum length of 15 characters.
Scenes  setup  scenes control  select  Scene name  select
Change the name of the scenario using the buttons t u to select the letters and confirm each letter with
Car P. It is possible to choose an upper or lower case character with A..a. and if necessary correct the single
characters with Back. Confirm with Save.
6.4 Cancelling a scenario.
To cancel a scenario, follow the procedure below:
Scenes  setup  scenes control  remove
The control panel asks for confirmation of deletion, confirm with YES, exit with NO. Deletion is displayed with a
confirmation message.
6.5 Cancelling a button associated with the scenario
The procedure is as follows:
Scenes  setup  button association  select
First select the desired scenario with p q, then press t.int or t.est to remove the association with a button of the
control panel or of a device in the system.
Select the command to cancel and confirm with Remove.
The control panel asks for confirmation, press YES to proceed or NO to go back.
A confirmation message is displayed. Press close. The control panel will go back to the screen for the commands
associated with the scenario.
6.6 Remote access to scenarios.
The menu can be used to enable remote activation of the desired scenarios through a communications interface
and telephone communicator. To do this, select the desired scenario and then, in the remote access menu, select
YES.
Scenes  setup  scenes control  select  Remote Activation  select
Select YES or NO to enable the desired scenario.
It is then necessary to configure telephone communicator 01941 or 01942 as described in the instructions manual
for this device.
62
Load control
7. Load control.
The By-me home automation system can be used to monitor the amount of mains power being consumed, and
so prevent the miniature circuit breaker from being tripped due to overload, by disconnecting the controlled loads
if necessary.
To monitor the amount of power being consumed, it is necessary to install load control module 01855, which is
managed (like the other system devices) by the control unit.
Load control module 01855 can restore disconnected users automatically, as soon as the total consumption of the
system returns to a level below the setting.
7.1 Functionality.
Load control module 01855 can monitor up to 8 groups, which supply the same number of loads, and can have
4 different settings:
• Auto OFF-ON: automatic load connection or disconnection depending on the amount of power consumed;
• Auto OFF Man ON: automatic load disconnection, followed by manual connection;
• Always ON: load always connected irrespective of the power consumed.
• Always OFF: load always disconnected irrespective of the power consumed;
One of the four settings listed above can be selected for each group, irrespective of the settings of the other groups.
Each group can be associated with a toggle switch, which can be used to force the setting to Always ON (by
pressing ON on the button); the override condition is indicated by the LED on the button, which remains lit
continuously. If the OFF button is pressed, the control returns to the condition set by the control panel.
When in “Auto OFF Man ON” mode, if the load control module has been tripped, the relay can be reactivated as
follows:
• by operating the toggle switch belonging to the group (if present) pressing ON and then OFF;
• from the control unit, by resetting the desired load control option [see paragraph “Load management”, page 65].
7.1.1 Time slots.
The system Load Control function By-me can be used to manage loads during certain times of the day, i.e.
to set the time slots during which one or more of the 8 groups dedicated to load control will be activated or
switched off. To do this it is necessary to create a specific weekly time program indicating at what times of the
various days of the week the loads must be in Always OFF mode and in which the control must be of the type
set in the control panel (example Auto OFF - ON). The weekly time program must have no input group; one or
two groups in the load control must be selected as the program output.
63
Load control
Notes.
• If the Always ON state is set using a push-button, the timetable is disabled until a new state is selected (using
the push-button or by adjusting the device parameters at the control unit).
• The timetable is not disabled if the Always ON state is set at the control unit; in this case, the program must
be disabled through the programming menu if necessary.
7.1.2 Selecting the loads to be controlled.
Warning!
When selecting the loads to be monitored, pay special attention to electrical appliances that have to
be continuously connected to the power supply (refrigerators, freezers, etc.); the power outlets for
these appliances are not monitored.
7.2 Power management.
The Power Management function is used to control the level of power consumption, by setting up to two maximum
consumption thresholds, with a validity period for the second threshold.
For systems with a “conventional” electricity meter, it is enough to set a value for the first threshold and leave the
validity period of the second threshold at zero. For systems with an electronic meter (for example, Enel in Italy), both
thresholds can be set in order to control the loads in the same way as the meter does. In the case of an electronic
meter with an Enel domestic contract, set the parameters (referring to the values stated in the contract) as shown
in the following example:
• nominal contract power: 3 kW; a level of power 10% higher than the nominal contract power can be consumed
for an unlimited period (3.3 kW in this case);
• maximum power usable for a limited period: 4 kW;
• maximum period for which maximum power can be used: 3 hours.
The above information can be used to decide the values to be set in the By-me control panel:
• first threshold: 3.3 kW;
• second threshold at the maximum power value: 4 kW;
• validity period for the second threshold: 1.5 hours (half of the contract value).
N.B.
• The threshold values must differ from each other by at least 20% of Threshold 1.
If the value of Threshold 1 is set first and then the Threshold time, the control panel will automatically set
the minimum permissible value for Threshold 2.
• If the meter is electronic, the thresholds are set at 110% and 130% of the contract value (these values
must always be confirmed with the power provider).
Warning!
If in doubt, check the values by contacting the customer assistance service of the power provider.
64
Load control
7.2.1 Create functional group
Perform the following operations:
Menu  setup  configuration  group control  load control  032 New group  select
Name the group as described on page 27.
Add the devices in the group as described on page 26.
N.B. In the group created it is necessary to configure at least one relay actuator device and the current sensor
01855.
7.2.1 Displaying the level of power consumed.
The control panel can display the amount of power consumed by the system, at any time.
Others  loads
The control panel displays the power input in KW and the state of the controlled loads.
7.2.2 Setting the power consumption control.
To set the thresholds for controlling the power consumed, follow the procedure below:
Others  Loads  setup  power control  select
Move onto the threshold you want to set with p q, press Change and with p q set the desired value; At
the end of this operation, conclude with Set.
The threshold time is also set in a similar way; at the end of the operation, press Save and the control panel
will confirm saving.
7.3 Load management.
Each group can consist of one or more relays that control the power outlets that supply particular electrical
appliances (oven, washing machine, stereo, etc.). Each group can be assigned a priority, which determines the
order in which appliances are disconnected once the power threshold has been exceeded.
Each group can also contain a toggle switch, which can be used to force the group relay(s) to ON, irrespective of
the priority set in the load conditions.
The load control groups must be created as described in the paragraph “Creating a new functional group - page 22”.
Groups must be created by including the desired relays, and load control module 01855, which must be selected for each
group by pressing the configuration button and the toggle switch if necessary.
N.B.
• In the Load Control group, it is essential to configure load control module 01855 in order to allow display on the control panel.
• The load must be connected on terminal C-NO of the relay actuator.
65
Load control
Appliances such as refrigerators or freezers, which need to be powered continuously, must be connected to
uncontrolled power outlets.
For other devices, set a priority value of 1 for the more important loads (these will be disconnected last), and higher
priority number for the loads to be disconnected first.
Press the configuration buttons of the load control module 01855, of the relay actuator governing the oven and if
necessary add a button for forcing.
7.3.1 Priority settings.
To set or modify the priority value of a group, follow the procedure below:
Others  Loads  setup  Priority  select
The control panel displays the registered load control groups.
Scroll through the list of groups (if present) and their priorities using the p q buttons. After identifying the
group concerned, press the Change button.
Set the priority value using the p q buttons, then press Set;
At the end of these operations save the settings with Save, the control panel will confirm the operation has
been performed.
Warning!
The control unit assigns priority 1 to the first group created, 2 the second, and so on. However, these
priority values can still be changed at any time.
If a priority already assigned is assigned to another group, this group is given the desired priority, and
the others are moved to the next higher value.
On moving a group from a high priority to a lower priority (for instance from priority 1 to 4), all the
other groups with priorities between these two values will be increased by one level of importance (for
instance, the group with priority 2 will become priority 1, etc.).
Example of adding a new group and then changing the priority assigned automatically.
• Existing groups:
• Group A: priority 1
• Group B: priority 2
• Group C: priority 3
• New group to insert: Group D (created with priority 4)
• Priority of Group D is changed from 4 to 2
• New order of priority:
• Group A: priority 1
• Group D: priority 2
• Group B: priority 3
• Group C: priority 4
66
Load control
7.3.2 Load management.
The load control mode can be decided for each group by selecting Automatic, Semiautomatic, Force On,
Force Off.
• Automatic: The load is disconnected automatically depending on the priority assigned, and reconnected
automatically when the power consumption falls below the set threshold;
• Semiautomatic: the load is disconnected automatically depending on the assigned priority, and must be
reconnected manually once power consumption has fallen below the set threshold;
• Force OFF: the power outlet is never supplied;
• Force ON: the power outlet is always supplied.
Others  Loads  Operation
Scroll through the list of groups (if present); from here it is possible to read the state, priority and type of
management. With buttons A,B,C,D it is possible to choose the type of management.
Important: If the values of “Threshold 1”, “Threshold 22 and “Threshold Time” have been set, as soon as the input
power exceeds “Threshold 1” (P > Threshold 1) the sensor is able to ensure absorption up to a value of “Threshold
2” for a time equal to the “Threshold Time” and disconnecting any loads (according to the set priorities) to bring the
input power back to a lower value than “Threshold 2” (P < Threshold 2).
After the “Threshold Time” the maximum power that can be drawn is limited to the value of “Threshold 1” for the
set time (P < Threshold 1) disconnecting any loads (according to the priorities); at the end of the “Threshold Time”
the cycle starts over again.
7.3.3 Load status.
To check the status of a load, follow the procedure below:
Others  loads
The starting screen shows the instantaneous power input and a summary window of the Off loads, Forced
On or On. With buttons B and D it is possible to access the disconnected zones (Off) or forced On. With the
Operation menu it is possible to operate on them with button C.
If there are no disconnected loads or forcings, pressing buttons B and D does not lead to any items.
Button A enables accessing the list of events from which it is possible to display details relating to the date,
time, group and type of action (manual switch-on, automatic switch-off….).
The disconnected zones can be reset or forced ON (via the menu called up with button B); the forced ON
zones can be reset with the control panel (via the menu called up with button D) or with a suitably configured
toggle switch.
Others  Loads  Events list
Scroll through the list with p q and press the Details button. To remove the events list, press the Canc
Li. button., the control panel requests confirmation, go ahead with YES. Deleting and saving the action in the
events list with the respective control panel access profile is confirmed.
67
Load control
7.4 Associating an indicator group.
The load control module can be associated with a group that indicates whether one or more loads have been
disconnected. This group can consist of one or more relays configured in two-position stable mode. An ON
message is sent to this group each time the load control module is tripped and disconnects some of the loads, and
an OFF message is sent when when all controlled loads are in the ON state.
Others  Loads  setup  power control
Move onto the indicator item Grp press Change and select the relevant group; lastly, press Set.
The control panel goes back to the previous screen.
Confirm it all with Save; The control panel confirms the operation has been completed.
N.B.: The warning Grp must be created like any other group in the Automation menu.
7.5 LED signals of the module 01855.
The load control module has LEDs to visually signal the load status and phases of device operation.
The eight LEDs signalling the break in the load take on the following meanings:
• LED ON = load OFF
• LED OFF = load ON
The status LED has the following meanings:
• during the configuration phase = red LED ON steady
• during ordinary adjustment (one threshold): - LED OFF = normal operation
- green LED ON = set threshold exceeded
- red LED blinking = alarm
• during multiple adjustment (two thresholds and threshold time): - LED OFF = normal operation
- green LED blinking = exceeded threshold 1 and maximum drawable limit equal to the value of threshold 2
- green LED ON = maximum drawable limit equal to the value of threshold 1
- red LED blinking = alarm.
68
Programming events
8. Programming events
The By-me system enables creating advanced management functions that enable performing operations at certain
times and/or when certain events occur, among which interaction with the intrusion detection alarm system. These
functions can later be modified or even removed.
Up to 16 programs can be set; days of the week can be selected for each program, and the program time and
duration can be set for each day.
Each program must have at least one active input or Timer function and one output. The maximum number of
inputs and outputs that can be associated with a program is equal to 2.
The elements (IN 1 and IN 2, which can be selected during program creation/modification) that can be used to
activate a function are:
• ON message from a group;
• OFF message from a group;
• ON or OFF message from a group;
• scenario activation message;
• INTRUSION DETECTION ALARM SYSTEM alarm message;
• INTRUSION DETECTION ALARM SYSTEM activation message;
• INTRUSION DETECTION ALARM SYSTEM disconnection message;
• timer program.
The output commands that can be sent are:
• ON message to a group;
• OFF message to a group;
• ON message when an event occurs, and OFF message when the event has ended (to the selected group);
• OFF message when an event occurs, and ON message when the event has ended (to the selected group);
• scenario activation message (only option that allows involving a temperature zone);
• message for Always OFF and resetting the condition for a load control group (see par. 7.1.1);
• INTRUSION DETECTION ALARM SYSTEM activation message;
8.1 Programming.
8.1.1 Creating and modifying a program.
Events  setup  01 new program  select
Enter the name of the program using the buttons t u to select the letters and confirm each letter with Car
P. It is possible to choose an upper or lower case character with A..a. Confirm with Save. The control panel
signals saving and displays the settings screen.
69
Programming events
8.1.1.1 Timer.
To enable the timer function scroll through the list with p q move onto Timer and press Change. The
control panel displays the following options:
No timing: disables the time function
Weekly clock: weekly daily programming of events in steps of 10 minutes
Period clock: programming max 2 daily events in the week with the start and end time.
Cyclical clock: switching the programmed events on/off at specified times
Timer: sets the duration of the programmed event
Select the desired option with p q and confirm with select.
• Weekly clock.
It is possible for each day to set ON periods with triggering every 10 minutes.
The program is set by selecting On/Off with the On/Off button; with the tO   Ou buttons you move
along the 24h axis in steps of 10 minutes.
The ON option activates the program for 10 minutes; to extend it as preferred, press the Copy u
button.
The OFF option turns off the program.
After setting the program, confirm by pressing Save.
The control panel will go back to the starting screen. It is now possible to set the program for a new
day using the buttons p q; the Copy from button enables copying the program of one day already
set to another one still to be set. Then, after selecting the day to copy, press Copy and the control
panel will confirm the programming.
On completing this operation, confirm the settings made with Save.
• Period Clock
For each day of the week it is possible to have the program turn on and off twice by setting the timer
in steps of one minute. With the p q buttons you set the time and with the Set/Back button you
move onto the single hours/minutes items.
Pressing Reset deletes the programming that has just been done.
The Copy From button enables copying the program of one day already set to another one still
to be set. Then, after selecting the day to copy, press Copy and the control panel will confirm the
programming.
On completing this operation, confirm the settings made with Save.
• Cyclical Clock
Cyclically repeats an event (On-Off) according to the set duration and in an independent way to the
day, date and time. With the p q buttons you set the “on-off” interval and with the Set/Back button
you move onto the single hours/minutes items.
At the end, press Save to confirm the configuration.
70
Programming events
• Timer.
Used to set the duration of the program in hours and minutes. This function must always be linked to
1 or 2 inputs and 1 or 2 output groups through an On-Off or Off-On type message. The control panel
sends the first command when the event occurs and the second when the set time has elapsed. With
the p q buttons you set the time and with the Set/Back button you move onto the single hours/
minutes items.
At the end, press Save to confirm the configuration
• Program.
Program 
Change
Previous Copy
• Change.
Used to set the activation periods during the day, with possible activation every 20 minutes. The
program for the selected day is shown; the button functions change according to the current
stage of the program.
The program is set by selecting the ON or OFF command; the t u buttons (A and B) are
used to move along the 24-hour axis representing the day. Confirm the command by pressing
the Set button. At program position 23:40 – 24:00, confirm by pressing the ok button. Save
the new program by pressing Yes; the operation is completed and a confirmation message
displayed.
• Copy Previous
Used to copy the program of the previous day to the selected day; the operation is completed
and confirmed.
• Deactivate.
Off 
Timer
Off
Used to deactivate the timer function for the selected day. The timer function can also be deactivated
for a weekly period.
Menu  Program  Program: 1
Select the number of the desired program (example: 1)
 Change  Timer  On
Off  Timer
Off
71
Programming events
8.1.1.2 Inputs.
• Used to program the inputs.
In 1  change  In 1
Mode
• Change – Groups
Scenarios
SAI mechanisms
None
Select the input type to be used with the buttons p q and pressing Select.
• Group: select the group by pressing Set, then go onto Mode and press Change, choosing
from Group On, Group Off, Group On-Off, Group Off-On, Group Toggle. Confirm with Set.
In addition, it is possible to activate a different group address by pressing the Others button in
the list of groups; this permits “communicating” with the groups of another EIB/KNX system.
• Scenario: choose the desired scenario from the ones registered by using the Set button; the
scenario command will also be used as a program input.
• SAI mechanisms: It is possible to choose the SAI alarm message, SAI on, SAI off, or to use
the condition of system on or off.
• Deactivate input.
Used to deactivate the input.
Lastly, confirm the assigned settings by pressing Back.
Input
Group
Command
Operation
Group ON ( )
Input valid if an ON message arrives from the group
Group OFF ( )
Input valid if an OFF message arrives from the group
Group ON-OFF ( ) The input stays valid as long as the group is ON
Group OFF-ON ( ) The input stays valid as long as the group is OFF
Group Toggle ( ) Input valid if an ON or OFF message arrives from the group (each message
makes the input valid).
Scenario
Intrusion Detection
System Alarm
Burglar alarm system
Deactivated
72
-
Input valid on activating the scenario.
SAI alarm
Input valid when an alarm is received from the intrusion detection
alarm system
SAI on
Input valid if the Intrusion Detection Alarm System is on (stays valid until
turned off).
SAI off
Input valid if the Intrusion Detection Alarm System is off (stays valid until
turned on).
Turning on SAI
Input valid if an ON message arrives from SAI
Turning off SAI
Input valid if an OFF message arrives from SAI
None
The “Not defined” message will be displayed
Programming events
• Logic.
Logic  change
If there are 2 inputs, this is used to determine whether the signal is valid when both are true
(AND) or when at least one of the inputs is true (OR). The selected condition is indicated by P.
With the p q buttons you select the required item, confirm with Set.
If only one input has been set, the set logic can be any.
The inputs can be routed to a timer and it is also possible to set one of the Clock options as a
program input condition.
8.1.1.3 Outputs.
• Used to program the outputs.
Out 1  change  Out 1
Mode
Change  Groups
Scenarios
SAI mechanisms
None
Select the output type to be used with the buttons p q and pressing Select.
• Group: select the group with Set, then go onto Mode and press Change, choosing from
Group On, Group Off, Group On-Off, Group Off-On.
• Scenarios: choose the desired scenario from the ones registered by using the Set button.
• SAI mechanisms: It is possible to choose the SAI ON message.
• Deactivate output: The associations are disabled.
Output
Group
Command
Operation
Group ON ( )
ON message to group if inputs and timer functions are valid.
Group OFF ( )
OFF message to group if inputs and timer functions are valid.
ON message to group if inputs and timer functions are valid, OFF message
when they are not valid.
OFF message to group if inputs and timer functions are valid, ON message
Group OFF-ON ( )
when they are not valid.
Group ON-OFF ( )
Scenario
Burglar alarm system
Deactivated
-
Scenario activation with valid program.
Connect Intrusion Detection Alarm System (zones associated with the
Turning on SAI control panel) with valid program.
None
The “Not defined” message will be displayed
Lastly, confirm the assigned settings by pressing Back.
73
Programming events
8.2 Example applications.
8.2.1 Switch on outside lights in the evening.
• Desired program:
• Switch on outside lights in the evening;
• Switch on the lights depending on light conditions, and in any case not before 18:00;
• Switch off at 24:00.
• Weekly clock timing: use a program with operations starting at 18:00 and ending at 24:00, which is the
same for every day of the week (cyclical clock).
• Inputs: dusk/dawn sensor input through a contact interface (Eikon 20515, Idea 16955; Plana 14515).
Create a group that contains the attachment interface to be used as input 1 of the lighting program. The
contact interface will send an ON message if light intensity is low or an ON message if the light intensity is
high.
• Outputs: relay actuator (Eikon 20535, Idea 16975, Plana 14535, 01850) that must belong to the output
group of the lighting program.
Set the relay in two-position stable mode. Select “Group ON-OFF” as output message.
Note.
A contact interface is used as an input because an external dusk/dawn sensor is used, which is not available
in the Vimar catalogue.
Warning!
The dusk/dawn sensor must be placed in an area where it is not directly exposed to other light sources
(for example car headlights), so that the outside lights are not switched off each time another light
source is detected.
PROGRAMMING
18:00 - 24:00
bus
INPUT 1
MADE
IN
ITALY
PAT.
PEND.
bus
OUTPUT 1:
ON-OFF
Contact interface
POWER SUPPLY
12-24 V
74
Actuator
LIGHT
SENSOR
FOR OUTDOOR
USE
Perimeter lights
circuit
Control panel
L
N
Programming events
8.2.2 Daily watering.
• Desired program:
• water the garden in the evening;
• start the program at 20:00 hours, but only if the moisture level in the soil requires it;
• water two different areas of the garden at different times, for a period of 15 minutes in each area.
• Weekly clock timing: a timer program is used for the required days.
The timer program is then set with operations starting at 20:00 and ending at 20:40. The “start watering”
command will be sent to the relay for area 1, and the “stop watering” command will be sent automatically
after 15 minutes.
The “start watering” command will be sent to the relay for area 2 after the first 15 minutes of watering, and
the “stop watering” command will be sent automatically after 15 minutes.
• Inputs:
• input from moisture sensor through a contact interface (Eikon 20515, Idea 16955; Plana 14515).
Create a group that includes the attachment interface to be used for input 1 to the watering program.
The contact interface will send an ON message if watering is required or an OFF message if the level of
moisture in the soil means that watering is not required.
Set the interface to “normal” or “inverted” operation, depending on the specifications of the moisture
sensor (NO or NC).
• on/off override input from a push-button (for example Eikon 20521, Idea 16961; Plana 14521).
This device must be used only if watering is to be forced on or off manually; override is possible only if
the timer program is valid.
Register the device in a group and associate it with input 2 of the watering program; configure the
operating mode as for an ON/OFF toggle switch.
Set the “Logic” for inputs 1 and 2, selecting AND so that watering starts only if both inputs are ON (i.e.
both the moisture sensor and the button); or select OR if watering is to start if at least one or both of
the inputs are at ON (i.e. either the moisture sensor or the button is On). The watering function can thus
be disabled if the AND condition is set; conversely, if the OR condition is set, the watering function can
be forced On using the button.
• Outputs:
• Create two output groups; in the first group, configure the relay as one-positin stable that deactivates
after a 15 minute delay; in the second group, configure the relay as a one-position stable that activates
after a 15 minute delay and deactivates after a 15 minute delay. Set “ON only” as the output message.
75
Programming events
Note.
For the required functionality, the moisture sensor must be placed in an area not affected by the watering, so
that the water itself does not cause the sensor to react.
Warning!
When first installed, the attachment interface must be made to react at least once, in order to indicate
the status to the control panel. This operation can be carried out on the moisture sensor itself, or by
closing and then re-opening the contacts on the interface using a jumper.
PROGRAMMING
20:00 - 20:40
bus
OUTPUT 1:
ON ONLY
bus
INPUT 1
20:00 - 20:15
MADE
IN
ITALY
PAT.
PEND.
Contact interface
bus
OUTPUT 2:
ON ONLY
Enabling
watering
Actuator
OFF delay 15 min
POWER SUPPLY
12-24 V
MOISTURE
SENSOR
bus
INPUT 2
Control panel
20:15 - 20:30
Enabling
watering
Toggle switches
76
Actuator
ON delay 15 min
OFF delay 15 min
Programming events
8.2.3 Shutter automation.
• Desired program: lower all the shutters after 21.00, or when it becomes windy.
Create a scenario that closes all the shutters; this scenario must be called if one of the two conditions is
present.
Create two programs; the first will be a timer program that calls the scenario that closes the shutters at the
desired time. The second will be a program that calls a scenario when there is activation of a contact interface
connected to a wind sensor and that is configured in an automation group that will be an input for the program
8.2.4 Load management by time slots.
• Desired program: from 8:00 hours to 12:00 hours and from 13:00 hours to 18:00 hours, two load control
groups are to be disabled by load control module 01855 [see paragraph 7.1 “Functionality”, page 63].
• Timer program: a timer program is used to enable the groups in time slots: 00:00-8:00, 12:00-13:00 e 18:0024:00 (select the “Weekly clock” timing).
• Inputs: none
• Outputs: select the two groups of the load control system that are to be controlled, then select “ON-OFF”
as the output message.
8.2.5 Activation of the intrusion detection alarm system without using the transponder keys
and switching off all the lights (typical application used in offices).
• Desired program: activation of the intrusion detection alarm system, switching off lights and lowering
shutters by pressing two buttons at the same time.
Create a scenario that switches off all the lights and lowers the shutters (Scenario “Off”).
• Inputs: creation of two groups, each one with a simple push-button. Modify the parameters of the push-buttons
and set the “push-button” operation.
• Outputs:
SAI activation message.
scenario message “Off”.
• Condition: AND.
77
Intrusion Detection Alarm System Integration
9. Integration of the passive infrared motion detector.
As already mentioned in the previous chapters, if the By-me system incorporates the intrusion detection alarm
system (or future incorporation is planned), the control panel must be configured in Area 00 and Line 00 together
with the intrusion detection alarm devices.
The passive infrared detector (Eikon 20485 and 20486, Idea 16935 and Plana 14485 or for surface mounting
01828) can be used in three different ways:
1. installed in the Intrusion Detection Alarm System, configured from the control panel and not visible to the other
systems;
2. installed in the lighting control system, configured from the control panel and not visible to the other systems;
3. installed in the Intrusion Detection Alarm System, configured from the control panel and visible also from the
lighting control system.
Methods 1. and 2. are the normal configurations of the device for the two above systems; with method 3. the
sensor is used as follows:
• the IR detector is installed in the Intrusion Detection Alarm System and configured from the control panel;
• the IR detector is afterwards configured by the control panel as belonging to a group of the automation system.
• it is lastly necessary to “open” the group on the router manually or select Sync Router.
When the intrusion detection alarm system is not connected, the infrared detector sends an ON message to the
selected group (if the IR sensor detects a presence and the dusk/dawn sensor has detected the appropriate light
conditions); The sensor parameters are managed by the control panel. The IR detector can belong to the intrusion
detection alarm system and to at most 8 other groups in the lights control system (automation).
Summing up, then, after configuring the infrared detector as an intrusion detection alarm system, insert it in an
“automation” group. To include the IR detector in a group by the control panel, see paragraph 4.4.1 “Creating a
new functional group”, page 22.
The presence detectors have the Brightness threshold parameter that by default is set to 100 (maximum value);
the value will be lowered depending on the brightness of the environment in which the detector is installed (for very
bright environments the brightness threshold will be set to 0).
Duration of actuation (default value 30 s): used, with the system OFF, to repeat the command message for the associated actuator. In practice, after commanding the actuator, the detector checks whether there are any additional
movements for a period of time equal to the duration of actuation and, if this has occurred, at the end of this time
a new message will be sent to the actuator irrespective of the brightness setting.
When the sensors detect a presence and the brightness is suitable, or when the contacts of the contact interfaces
are opened, the parameters of these devices are managed by the control unit in the intrusion detection alarm system group (zone) in which they are configured.
Note.
For all the information on the intrusion detection alarm system, see the Intrusion Detection Alarm System section in
this manual.
78
Diagnostics and maintenance
10. Diagnostics and maintenance.
10.1 Diagnostics and replacement of devices.
This sections describes the procedures for checking the device functions and how to replace them if necessary.
Setup  diagnostics  device diagnostics
Press Select; the control panel initiates a scan procedure to check that all the configured devices are functioning
correctly; if all devices are functioning correctly, the message No faulty devices is displayed.
If a faulty device is found, the control panel asks you to replace or remove the device. When the faulty device is
displayed, press Replace to replace or Remove for cancelling.
The control panel requests confirmation of the operation, press YES.
When making a replacement, if not using a new device, so with no configuration, the control panel displays an
error message.
In this case, proceed as explained in Configuration - Reset Management - Device Reset.
Press the device configuration push-button, the control panel confirms the replacement.
IMPORTANT
Follow the control panel instructions for replacing the faulty part. At the end of the operation, the control panel
indicates the outcome:
• Device replaced: the device has been replaced correctly, press ok to finish;
• Invalid device: Replacement was not completed correctly due to problems with the device, or you are trying to
configure a different device.
Note.
When a device is replaced, all the parameters of the replaced device are restored to the new device, as these
parameters are also stored on the control unit. The only exception to this is the values stored in the actuators, and
the data related to scenarios.
To recreate the scenario as it was before replacement of the device, proceed as follows:
• call the scenario, so that all actuators involved go into the statuses stored in the scenario;
• place the device in the position desired for the scenario;
• save the scenario in the control panel again, as described in paragraph 6.1 “Creating a scenario”, page 59], checking
that the actuators are in the desired position.
N.B.
• It is not possible to replace the infrared receiver (Eikon 20516, Idea 16956; Plana 14516) via the diagnostics
menus; after identifying the faulty device it is then necessary to remove it and reconfigure the replacement receiver
as if it were a new device and lastly re-associating the remote control buttons.
• If replacing an actuator with relay output (Eikon 20535, Idea 16975; Plana 14535) associated with the Load
Control function, it is necessary from the control panel to force the new actuator ON and then bring it back to the
desired operating condition (see par. 7.1 on page 63).
• If replacing a thermostat (Eikon 20513-20514, Idea 16953-16954; Plana 14513-14514) via the Diagnostics
menu, the control panel resets it in Local mode and in the Off status.
79
Diagnostics and maintenance
10.2 Remote communications management.
10.2.1 Remote control.
To enable or disable remote control through the TP interface/telephone communicator 01848, follow the
procedure below:
Setup  Diagnostics  select  Remote Diagnostics  select
Enabled
Disabled
Select the desired item using the push-buttons p q; confirm with Select and press Save.
To manage the communications, refer to the instruction sheet for the TP interface/telephone communicator
01848 or the instructions manual of the communicator 01942.
It is then possible to run system diagnostics with the GSM communicator that will inform the user about the
number and type of faulty devices with the respective physical address. The remote diagnostics can be run
for a maximum number of 8 control panels provided that the 8 systems belonging to them (one for each
control panel) are connected to a BUS via the appropriate Routers and in at least one of these there is a GSM
communicator. To perform this operation, keep meticulously to the procedures described in the instructions
manual of the GSM communicators 01941, 01942 and interface 01848 (that must be combined with 01941).
10.3 Control panel software release.
Run the following procedure:
Setup  Information  select
The control unit displays:
• HW version
• SW release
• Video: HW version
• Area
• Line
• Max group address
80
Remote control
11. Remote control.
The system can be connected to remote control devices through a “TP interface/telephone communicator 01848".
In the case of a number of systems connected to each other through “line coupler 01845 interfaces”, it is sufficient
to use a single “TP interface/telephone communicator 01848”, which can be installed in any of the systems.
If the Burglar Alarm System via Vimar Bus is installed, the interface can be installed as a component of the burglar
alarm system, as it is also supplied in the event of a power failure (by the back-up battery).
11.1 Turningon SAI by SMS via GSM Communicator 01941 with interface 01848, or via GSM
Communicator 01942.
With the menu SAI->Setup->SAI Key Management->Zone->Interfaces, it is possible to define a GSM/User
interface association; this procedure allows the control panel to interpret remote activation via SMS as an activation
operation performed directly in the control panel by the selected user.
Afterwards, from the SAI->Setup->SAI Key Management->Zone->Central unit, it is possible to define a User/
Zone association; this procedure defines which zones of the system are for the user associated with the GSM
interface and which are the zones that can be turned on and off remotely with the communicator (see chap. 7.1
“Association of partitions with SAI control panel” on page 168).
N.B.
• By default, after learning and authenticating the GSM interface, the user associated with activation of the
intrusion detection alarm system via SMS is the Administrator, that (again by default) is enabled to turn on all the
SAI zones.
• The “On/Off zone” button of the main menu of the SAI takes priority over everything; it is therefore able to disable
any zone no matter what user is associated with remote activation via SMS.
81
Connection to the interface 01998.U
12. Fitting for connection to interface 01998.U
The interface 01998.U permits connecting the control panel 20550 + 01960 to the PC (on which the EasyTool
Professional LTsoftware is installed) via the connector on the front of the device.
After hooking the module 01960 on the back of the monitor 20550, it is necessary to carry out the following operations:
• connect the marked end with the red connector of the lead (supplied with the module 01960) in the specific
compartment in the support of the monitor 20550;
• connect the other end of the lead to the 8-pin PIN-STRIP connector on the back of the module 01960 (see fig.
3.3.1 page 17). The control panel 20550 + 01960 is then ready to be connected to the interface 01998.U (see figures 12.1 and 12.2).
12.1
12.2
82
System integration
13.Integration of the By-me system with the Soundsystem, Digibus and Elvox
Two Wire video door entry systems and with the CCTV system.
The monitor 20550 is fitted for being integrated with the control panel module 01960 and the Soundsystem 01961,
Digibus 01962 and Two Wire 01963 video door entry modules or the CCTV module 01964.
If both modules 01960 and 01961 (or 01960 and 01962 or 01960 and 01963) are present on the monitor, the
appliance will work in home automation mode and will switch onto video door entry mode every time there is an
external call or when the user activates it via the navigation menus on the home automation side (selecting Video
Door Entry).
If a call arrives, the control panel will switch over from home automation mode to video door entry mode; after a
time-out (that can be set on the video door entry system), the control panel will switch back onto home automation
mode. If you want to switch from video door entry mode to home automation mode before this time-out has
elapsed you need to press button L or button G on the monitor.
If both modules 01960 and 01964 are present on the monitor, the appliance will be in home automation mode
and will switch onto CCTV mode when the user activates it via the navigation menus on the home automation side
(selecting CCTV); in this case, thanks to the module 01960, it will be possible to set the following parameters of
the CCTV system:
• Setting time for self-shutdown of the CCTV monitor
the system enables setting the time for self-shutdown in the time interval ranging from a minimum of 1 min. to a
maximum of 4 h (in steps of 1 min.)
Main menu  Others  CCTV  Setup  Auto switch-off  Auto switch-off 001m
Set the desired time value, then confirm with Save.
• Setting the cyclical switching time of the audio/video channels
the system enables setting the cyclical switching time in a time interval ranging from a minimum of 1 s to a
maximum of 4 min. (in steps of 1 s).
Main menu  Others  CCTV Setup Video Camera Cycle Video Camera Cycle 001s
Set the desired time value, then confirm with Save.
Similarly for the control panel module, the video door entry module 01961 or 01962 or 01963 or the CCTV module
01964 must be inserted in the compartment at the top on the back of monitor 20550 in correspondence with the
connector bearing the words “VIDEO DOOR ENTRY/CCTV MODULE”.
For all the details relating to the installation and management of the video door entry systems and the CCTV
system, see the instructions manuals and diagrams supplied with the 01961, 01962, 01963 and 01964 modules.
83
System integration
14.Association between the functions of the By-me system and the
commands of the Two Wire video door entry system.
This chapter illustrates the functions of the By-me control panel concerning integration between the home
automation and video door entry systems. These functions enable carrying out specific actions in the video door
entry system (for example, unlocking, switching on video cameras, etc.) starting with the commands sent by the
automation system (for example, from the By-Me control equipment, from Media Center, etc.).
These functions are accessible from the Video door entry unit menu via the “External Commands Management”
and “Permission Management” options.
In the case of Due Fili video door entry systems where there are monitors 21550/20550/14550 combined
with the module 01963 and with the presence of By-me home automation modules 01960 (or control
panels with video door entry unit 01956), the following applies:
- The maximum number of indoor stations per pillar or after separator 692S, made with art.
21550/20550/14550 + 01960 + 01963, is 4 (that is a maximum of 4 independent home automation
subsystems connected to the pillar of the Due Fili system).
- It is possible to connect other Due Fili devices (art. 21553, 21554, 01955, 20557, 20577,
21550/20550/14550/+01963, etc.) up to a maximum of 32 total devices per pillar or after separator 692S.
In all the above cases, if you need to exceed the maximum number of devices, it is necessary to expand
the system by using separators 692S and their power supply units creating separate galvanic isolations.
14.1 External Commands Management
Main menu  Others  Video entry syst Setup Manage external commands
This menu permits creating up to 8 external commands, where external command means the association between
an input home automation system group and an output video door entry command with possibly an index
parameter or destination ID (depending on the command).
The groups that can be used as inputs are only the automation groups (lights) and they must be specially created
to then be used directly via the push-button associated with the group (in this case it suffices to create a group of
solely commands with no actuators) or on the Media Center (in which case an empty group is sufficient).
For each of the commands it is possible to specify the following fields:
Input = group that is used as the command input
Command = type of video door entry command you want to make; the available commands are the following:
- Lock
- Function F
- Function F1
- Function F2
- Aux. Function
- Communication termination
- Self-start
- Selective Start
Index = parameter that has different meanings depending on the type of command selected (see the following
paragraph e “Description of commands”).
84
System integration
14.1.1 Description of Commands
Lock:
This command enables actuating unlocking via By-Me control equipment or the Media Center program.
Settings to be made on the control panel:
- Input: Input group
- Command: Lock
- Index: ID of the panel or device (call button) on which to run the command
With Media Center it is possible to specify the panel; in this case the set “Index” parameter is ignored.
Function F:
This command enables actuating the Fn function:
Settings to be made on the control panel:
- Input: Input group
- Command: Function F
- Index: not significant
This command can only be used by Media Center specifying F1 or F2 and the destination panel.
Function F1:
This command enables actuating the F1 function via By-Me control equipment or the Media Center program.
Settings to be made on the control panel:
- Input: Input group
- Command: Function F1
- Index: ID of the panel on which to run the command
With Media Center it is possible to specify the panel; in this case the set “Index” parameter is ignored.
Function F2:
This command enables actuating the F2 function via By-Me control equipment or the Media Center program.
Settings to be made on the control panel:
- Input: Input group
- Command: Function F2
- Index: ID of the panel on which to run the command
With Media Center it is possible to specify the panel; in this case the set “Index” parameter is ignored.
Aux. Function:
This command enables actuating the Aux n function via By-Me control equipment or the Media Center program.
Settings to be made on the control panel:
- Input: Input group
- Command: AUX Function
- Index: index of AUX function (settable values ranging from 1 to 16)
With Media Center it is possible to specify n; in this case the set “Index” parameter is ignored.
Communication termination:
This command enables terminating the communication in progress (audio and/or video) via By-Me control
equipment or the Media Center program.
Settings to be made on the control panel:
- Input: Input group
- Command: Comm. termination
- Index/ID: not significant
85
System integration
Self-start:
This command permits activating self-start on an entrance panel.
The only point of using this command if it is done with the MediaCenter program since it does not switch the
control panel monitor from home automation onto video door entry, but only activates self-start for an entrance
panel to display the images on the video terminal connected to the Media Center pc.
Settings to be made on the control panel:
- Input: Input group
- Command: Self-start
- Index/ID: Panel ID
With MediaCenter it is possible to specify the ID of the panel; in this case the set “Index” parameter is ignored.
Repeatedly sending the message runs the self-start sequence programmed on the panel for the relevant
apartment (applies both for the Master panel and for the audio/video interfaces 69AM).
WARNING: The command is actuated only if the relevant permissions are active (see paragraph 14.2 “Permission
Management”).
Selective Start:
This command permits selectively activating a video camera connected to an audio/video interface 69AM.
The only point of using this command if it is done with the MediaCenter program since it does not switch the
control panel monitor from home automation onto video door entry, but only activates self-start for a video camera
to display the images on the video terminal connected to the Media Center pc.
Settings on the control panel:
- Input: Input group
- Command: Selective Start
- Index/ID: Panel ID
Using MediaCenter it is possible to specify the video camera you want to switch on (if the indicated panel is the
interface for video cameras 69AM) and possibly also indicate the panel to switch on; in this case the set “Index”
parameter is ignored.
WARNING: The command is actuated only if the relevant permissions are active (see paragraph 14.2 “Permission
Management”).
For further details see the MediaCenter program manual.
14.2 Permission Management
By using the commands described above, in a condominium video door entry system it is possible to enable some
users to view the images transmitted by video cameras that could be reserved for other users, thereby creating
obvious problems relating to their privacy.
In terms of the video door entry system, it is only possible to run self-start from any indoor station, but the sequence
of video cameras that can be viewed is set by the installer for each of these indoor stations, basically assigning the
viewing rights of each user.
The By-Me control panel offers the possibility of selectively viewing any video camera in the system; in the light of
this, a function has been added that enables managing the permission for activating the panels and video cameras
installed in the system in order to delegate the installer to assign user viewing permission for any video camera.
86
Installation regulations - Standard compliance
Main menu  Others  Video entry syst
 Setup  Manage Permission
With the above menu it is possible to set up to 16 permissions for switching on a video camera on an entrance
panel (the panel can be irrespectively an ordinary Two Wire video door entry panel or the audio/video interface
69AM).
With the permission list it is possible to select one to create it (New Permission) or edit it. By selecting a panel (from
1 to 15, where 1= master panel) and a video camera (from 0 to 16, where 0 = any video camera) it is possible to
enable viewing the video camera(s) selected with the By - Me control panel.
WARNING: The menu that allows permission management can be displayed only via the Administrator password.
15. Installation regulations.
Installation should be carried out observing current installation regulations for electrical systems in the country
where the products are installed.
16. Standard compliance.
• Control panel module 01960
• EMC directive
• 50130-4, EN 50090-2-2 Standards
Note: Compliance with regulations refers to module 01960 when it is inserted in monitor 20550.
• Other system devices: see the related instructions sheet.
87
88
Section
Burglar alarm
89
Index
1. General characteristics of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2. Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3. System components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Passive infrared motion detector with dual technology and recess-mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Digital keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Back-up unit for recess-mounting and EN 50022 rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Siren for outdoor use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Siren for indoor use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Siren for indoor use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 Power supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 Contact interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 Relay actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11 Mini infrared detector for surface-mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12 Dual technology detector for surface-mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13 Transponder reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14 Smart card reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15 Radio interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
102
104
110
113
115
124
129
129
132
134
144
148
151
153
156
158
4. Powering up the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5. Group/zone definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6. Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
7. S.A.I. Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 SAI Key management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Message Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4Antitamper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Walk test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Events List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 List of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
168
170
172
174
175
175
176
8. Setting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Back-up unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Siren for outdoor use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 IR presence detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 Contact interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 Dual technology surface-mounting detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7 Radio interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8 Smart card reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.9 Transponder reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.10 Relay actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.11 Back-up unit for EN 50022 rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.12 Indoor siren. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.13 Dual technology recess-mounting detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.14 Mini infrared detector for surface-mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.15 Digital keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
177
177
177
177
177
178
178
178
178
178
179
179
179
179
179
9.
181
181
181
181
182
182
90
Using
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporary partitioning from control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Partitioning via connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delayed detectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index
10. Summary of indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
11.
Other
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activation of a bell with the passive IR detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activation of a bell with the contact interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activation of an electric lock with the connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signalling alarm with no audible warning (anti-robbery). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing the gas flow solenoid valve in the event of leakage (technical alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activation of audible alarm warnings (panic button). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
185
186
188
189
190
192
192
12.Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
91
General characteristics of the system
1. General characteristics of the system
The intrusion detection alarm system is used, in residential and commercial sectors, to make intrusion detection
alarm systems with up to 30 zones and, via a contact interface and/or radio interface, to manage technical alarms.
The modular appliances are made with the support hooking system and colours of the Eikon, Idea and Plana
series.
The system features:
• wiring on two wires. Fast and simplified installation, also in the case of restructuring, using a single pair of wires
for connections, which distributes both the extra low supply voltage (29 V d.c.) and the monitoring and control
signals for the devices.
The sheathed and twisted pair is used (Vimar 01840: 2x0.50 mm2, nominal working voltage 300/500 V)
•polarized shunted connection for all devices, without any particular order, respecting the polarities marked on the
terminals.
•detectors with 17 beams on 4 planes. Vimar patent offering a better angle of detection than the conventional
types with 14 beams on 3 planes.
•dual technology detectors. Available in both recess- and surface-mounting versions, they offer extremely high
performance both in detecting intruders and in preventing false alarms.
•digital keypads. Utmost simplicity and extraordinary flexibility in managing activation/deactivation (total or partial)
of the system via differentiated numerical codes (up to at most 32).
•transponder keys. Absolute safety and reliability when switching the system on and off. They also permit
switching on the system partially according to the configuration of the connectors. They offer billions of encrypted
combinations from which the system auto-assigns the one that will then be acknowledged. They work without a
battery, so they have unlimited, maintenance-free operation.
•remote control. Can switch the system on and off, using the RF interface as connector.
•back-up unit. Houses the batteries (not supplied) that in the event of a power failure supply the system for the
time prescribed by the standards. Available in the recess-mounting version or for installation in a consumer unit.
•contact interfaces. Available in three different types (with 1 or 2 inputs or with 12 V d.c. output), they are used
to connect detectors to the bus system such as: magnetic contacts for doors and windows, rope contacts for
protecting roller shutters, impact contacts for protecting doors and windows, infrared barriers. In addition, they
can be used to generate technical alarms.
•simplified configuration. By pressing the front push-button of the devices connected to the BUS, the components
dialogue with each other and self-learn the configuration parameters.
When configuration is complete it is always possible to identify any device by pressing the push-button on the
control panel.
•partitioning. Up to 30 distinct zones; each zone can be freely partitioned. Each user can be assigned a partition
and it is also possible to actuate partial activation/deactivation. •RF interface. Allows using the sensors and remote controls of the Radio Frequency system to extend coverage in
places where it is not possible to add any cables. It works as a connector so it is possible to switch the system
on totally or partially by means of the remote controls. In addition, they can be used to generate technical alarms.
92
General characteristics of the system
•optical antitamper. All the devices are protected against attempted tampering, including disconnection and shortcircuiting of the connection line; the associated messages are controlled via BUS. The Eikon, Idea and Plana
modular appliances are equipped with an infrared optical antitamper device: each appliance protects itself by
emitting an infrared ray at the back that alerts the system to the slightest attempt at tampering. This solution,
patented by Vimar, requires no additional mechanical devices, it eliminates the risk of false alarms and simplifies
and reduces the work of installation.
•system customization. The innovative software permits customized setting from the control panel, according to
the characteristics of the rooms and the methods of using the system, the parameters of the various devices
(e.g., trigger time of the detectors and perimeter sensors, detection threshold, sensitivity of the antitamper).
Connection diagram for the intrusion detection alarm system incorporated in the automation system
230 V ~
01801
Power supply
L N
492.18012 0B 0409 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
01801 Alimentatore/Power supply
BUS
29 V
I BUS
AUX
29 V
I AUX
I > Imax
OV
> 800 mA
I BUS + I AUX -
-5 ˚C - +45 ˚C
ON
492.18010 0A 0404 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
29 V
AUX
BUS
492.18011 0B 0409 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
01806
Siren for outdoor use
20483
Digital keypad
20485
IR detector
01829.1
Dual tech. detector
Automation devices
20487
Dual tech. detector
Automation devices
BUS 2
01803.01
Auxiliary back-up unit
01804.01
Back-up unit
01845
ACCOPPIATORE DI LINEA
01845
Line Coupler
492.1845 0A 0404 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
BUS 2
BUS
BUS 1
+
-
BUS 1
AAA NiMH 1,2 V
AAA NiMH 1,2 V
492.1942A0 0A
ON
01942 COMUNICATORE GSM-BUS
GSM
BUS
492.1942A0 0A
PROG
29 V d.c.
230 V ~
20550 + 01960
Monitor + Control panel module
L N
20490
Contact
interface
20493
01820-01821
Interface
01822-01823 for radio-frequency
01825-01826
remote control
Contacts
8
BUS
+ -
12-30 V
12-24492.1942A0
V
0A
01942
GSM phone
communicator
492.18012 0B 0409 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
01801 Alimentatore/Power supply
-5 ˚C - +45 ˚C
BUS
29 V
I BUS
AUX
29 V
I AUX
I > Imax
OV
> 800 mA
I BUS + I AUX -
ON
492.18010 0A 0404 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
29 V
AUX
BUS
492.18011 0B 0409 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
01801
Power supply
01738
Magnetic
contact
01744
Water
detector
In the above diagram the control panel 20550 + 01960 is configured in Area 00 and Line 00; the line coupler
01845 (Router) is used for integration with the line on which the automation system devices are configured (see
par. 4.4.12 on page 32).
N.B.: The intrusion detection alarm system is powered by the back-up unit 01804; the output “AUX 29 V d.c.”
of the power supply 01801 (intrusion detection alarm system line) is connected with the 29 V input of the backup unit that powers the BUS via the “BUS” terminal and the control panel 01960 via the terminal “CENTR + -”.
93
General characteristics of the system
Connectable devices
The total number of connected devices, in any case, must always be less than or equal to 60 (the transponder
keys must not be included in the count). The table gives the minimum and maximum number of “addressable”
devices for each system.
As regards the number of effectively “connectable” devices, refer to the system card
that determines the number according to the required operating time.
Connectable devices
Product
minimum nr.
maximum nr.
Control panel
1
1
Connector 0
Digital keypad
0
Back-up unit 01804 or 01807 1
2
Auxiliary battery holder unit 01803
0
2
Siren for outdoor and indoor use
0
4
Relay actuator
0
Contact interfaces
0
I.R. detectors for recess and surface mounting
0
Power supply
1
3
Transponder key
0
28
Dual technology surface and recess mounting detectors
0
Transponder reader
0
Smart card reader
0
Radio interface
0
8
Remote control
0
40
)
*
**
*
*
*
*
*
**
**
The maximum number of relay actuators, contact interfaces, I.R. detectors, dual technology detectors and
digital keypads is determined by the number and type of devices in the system.
) The total number of connectors, transponder readers, smart card readers and radio interfaces must always
be less than or equal to 16
**
N.B. The total number of connected devices, in any case, must always be less than or equal to 60 (the
transponder keys, control panel, power supplies and remote controls must not be included in the count)
94
General characteristics of the system
Project criteria
Making a burglar alarm system involves the following phases:
• determining the rooms to protect;
• identifying the number of zones in which you want to split up the system;
• determining the number of detectors and their location;
• choosing the location of the control panel, connectors, any relay actuators, contact interfaces, any radio interfaces
with the RF sensors to be associated
After setting the system project you move on to sizing it.
Sizing the system
The two main rules to observe for sizing the system correctly are the following:
• observe the maximum length of the connection cables between the devices (see following paragraph);
• correctly size the power supplies according to the dimensions of the system you are going to make; it is
fundamental to permit adequate operating time (24 h) in case of a 230 V~ mains power failure.
• if the input of the devices connected on the bus (except for the control panel and the back-up unit) is greater than
320 mA, it is necessary to add a second back-up unit connected to a second power supply 01801.
Maximum length of connections
The following rules must be observed:
• maximum length of the connections between the back-up units and the most distant device: 180 metres;
• maximum distance between a device and the most distant device: 360 metres;
• if using two back-up units you need to connect them at a greater distance apart than 40 m.
• maximum distance between back-up unit and its power supply 01801: 1 m.
• maximum distance between back-up unit and auxiliary battery holder unit 01803: 1 m.
Note. Obviously, the rules are the same for both types of backup unit (recess-mounting and DIN rail).
95
General characteristics of the system
A: 180 m max
AUX + Alimentatore 01801
BUS + -
CENTR + PAT.
PEND.
MADE
IN
ITALY
B: 180 m max
AUX + Alimentatore 01801
Maximum length per section
BUS + -
CENTR + -
C > 40 m
A: 180 m max
PAT.
PEND.
MADE
IN
ITALY
B: 180 m max
A = max distance between back-up unit and the most distant device
B = max distance between back-up unit and the most distant device
C = distance between two back-up units
Maximum length of the line
96
General characteristics of the system
Checking power input
To be able to size the system correctly, therefore checking the necessary number of back-up units, there is a system
card to fill in at the time of preparing and sizing.
This card, summarising the system configuration and programming, is particularly helpful when expanding the
system and/or for subsequent maintenance.
The card must be completed carefully following the instructions it gives and taking account of the following:
normally is required, for burglar alarm systems, requires a minimum operating time of 24 h in case of a mains
failure.
In these conditions the back-up unit 01804… can deliver a current of 60 mA for a time of 24 h.
If the total system consumption is less than or equal to 60 mA it is therefore possible to use just one back-up unit.
For consumption above this limit you need to determine the back-up units and auxiliary back-up units 01803... to
use by filling in the system card. The auxiliary back-up units 01803... supply another 60 mA for 24 h.
To ensure an operating time of 24 h, the system power input must not however exceed 240 mA (2 back-up units
01804... and 2 auxiliary back-up units 01803...).
Note
If there is no mains voltage, the control panel gives a battery supply message and disables the display backlighting
in order to reduce consumption (passing to an input of 30 mA); also the outdoor siren no longer draws any current
from the bus and, in this way, the buffer battery of the back-up unit lasts longer.
If the voltage powering the siren for outdoor use has a very low value it means that the battery is running down;
this causes a short alarm cycle, only if enabled.
Example
Suppose you need to install the system in a dwelling such as the one shown in the figure:
Ground floor
Basement level
Legend
Wire magnetic
contact
Detector
Bedroom
Bedroom
Box room
Games room
Control panel
Back-up unit
Outdoor siren
Cables from upper floor
Washroom
Cables to lower floor
Bathroom
Lounge
Kitchen
Garage
Cellar
Main entrance
Main connector
(associated with
all the zones)
Partialized
connector
Contact interface
Entrance
ZONE 1: night zone
ZONE 2: day zone
ZONE 3: basement
ZONE 4: perimeter
97
General characteristics of the system
Zone identification
• ZONE 1: bedroom and landing detectors (3 detectors);
• ZONE 2: kitchen and lounge detectors (2 detectors);
• ZONE 3: basement detectors (garage, store and games room - 3 detectors);
• ZONE 4: perimeter (7 magnetic contacts);
Control points
• General connectors: internal, at the garage entrance, where it is possible to turn on the entire system (one
connector associated with all the partitions); via the control panel the user can turn on the entire system or part
of it before leaving the main entrance of the dwelling.
• Partitioning connectors: one connector in the games room where it is possible to turn on the entire system
except for partition 3, associated with zones 1, 2, 4; one connector in the bedroom where it is possible to turn
on only partition 4 (perimeter zone), and partition 3 (basement);
Audible warnings
• Siren for indoor use, in the back-up unit: located in the corridor of the dwelling;
• Siren for outdoor use: facing the street under the eaves;
98
Installation
2. Installation
Installation of the back-up unit 01804 and 01807.
Make the connections to the line, but leave the battery's quick couplers disconnected.
IMPORTANT!
When connecting two or more back-up units it is mandatory to observe the polarity of the BUS and power supply
line.
The colours of the two line wires help observe the polarities.
Polarity reversal trips the 500 mA delayed fuse in the back-up unit.
Installation of the siren for outdoor use (01806)
• For the cable passage use the hole PC;
• Secure the siren, make the connections as shown in the figure and connect the battery observing the polarities;
polarity reversal will cause the protection fuse to blow;
• After making the connections, leave the enclosure open to be able, afterwards, using the push-button, to
configure the siren in the configuration procedure for the entire system;
99
Installation
Horn
Flash lamp bulb
Battery
F1, F2 F3, F4: holes for fastening siren
Connection terminal
of the battery
PC
(cable passage hole)
Connection terminal
to bus
Configuration
button
Flash
100
Installation
Installing modular flush-mounting appliances (control panel, digital keypads, connectors, IR
detectors, contact interfaces, relay actuators, RF interface).
Hook the appliances to the supports in the desired positions taking care that the optical tamper is positioned at
the bottom (see figure below).
The only connections to make are the ones to the bus.
It is necessary to observe the set polarity (each component has its terminals marked with + and -).
IMPORTANT!!
The detectors must be fitted taking care that the lens is always facing downwards (also the configuration button
and the LED must always be facing downwards).
The antitamper protection on all the flush-mounting components is optical (Vimar patent):
-an infrared LED on the back of the appliance emits a beam of IR rays, with variable power, onto the bottom of
the flush-mounting box;
-a receiver detects and checks the reflected ray;
If there is a fault, such as a decrease in reflection (an attempt at extracting the device from the box) and/or break
in the beam (attempted break-in), the system will generate an alarm.
Note
The antitamper system is based on the reflection of the infrared rays from the bottom of the flush-mounting box;
it must therefore be sound and not be black (black does not reflect IR rays).
101
System components
3. System components.
3.1 Control panel (Monitor + Control panel module 01960)
3.2. Passive infrared detectors with dual technology
3.3 Connector and transponder key
3.4 Digital keypads
3.5. Back-up unit for recess-mounting and DIN rail
3.6 Siren for outdoor use
3.7 Siren for indoor use
3.8. Power supplies
3.9 Contact interfaces
3.10 Relay actuator
3.11 Mini infrared detector for surface-mounting
3.12 Dual technology surface-mounting detector
3.13 Transponder reader
3.14 Smart card reader
3.15 Radio interface + remote control
3.1 Control panel.
The control panel governs the operation of the entire system. It displays all the control information and is used for
preliminary programming, configuration and, more generally, manage the system in its various states of operation.
The control panel saves up to 80 events that can be shown on the monitor.
The control panel permits splitting up the system into 30 separate zones (zone 31 is reserved for configuring the
back-up units, the sirens and for a radio interface or contact interface to implement the Panic function).
Control panel main screen.
The control panel's main screen displays the icons relating to the options most frequently used by the user:
• Alarm Stop: deactivates signalling the current alarm;
• List of alarms: displays a chronological list of the detected alarms;
• System On: activates the system in the set mode (when the system is active the displayed icon is System Off
that, if selected, deactivates the intrusion detection alarm system);
• Zones On/Off: used to obtain a quick partitioning that will involve all the connectors (done by any user or
connector).
Then with the option Connect zones it is possible to select the zones to activate.
Note.
On a line on which there is a control panel (20550 + 01960), a second control panel cannot be configured
(either 20550 + 01960 or the 2-module automation and/or intrusion detection alarm system control panels).
102
System components
Front view.
L
F
E
G
MADE
IN
ITALY
PAT.
PEND.
H
I
M
A
B
C
N
D
Push-buttons A, B, C, D: Intrusion detection alarm system menu for daily system management by the user.
Push-buttons E, F, L, G, H, I: intrusion detection alarm system menu in the phase of configuration, scrolling
through lists, etc..
M: Indicator LED.
N: Connector for connecting with the interface 01998.U
The main options are selected by using buttons A,B,C and D of the monitor (button A -> Alarm Stop, button B
-> system ON, etc.).
103
System components
3.2 Passive infrared motion detector with dual technology
3.2.1 Passive infrared sensor
The passive infrared presence detector is able to generate an alarm message when it detects motion of heatemitting bodies in its area of coverage. If it is configured in a By-me system where there is both the automation
and the intrusion detection alamr system, it is able to control a relay, with the intrusion detection alarm system
off, that can be used to switch on a light, activate a bell, etc. (see chap. 9 in the Automation section).
It is supplied in the following versions:
20485: 2 Eikon modules
16935: 2 Idea modules
14485: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-32 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (inside)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical antitamper device built in
- Consumption: 8 mA
- Possibility of programming the sensor activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the sensor and of the antitamper system
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control panel
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED.
- Two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
Indicators
• detects the motion of warm bodies in its area of coverage by means of the Fresnel lens;
• red LED:
- on steady during the configuration phase;
- blinking due to detecting intrusion or attempted break-in of the device;
The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore
it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm. This characteristic is useful to highlight the path
followed by any intruder.
• green LED blinking:
- detected the presence of a warm body with the system turned off;
- detected the presence of a warm body with the device not configured;
- detected the presence of a warm body in the WalkTest phase;
The area of detection, of the volumetric type, is obtained by using a Fresnel lens divided into 17 beams on 4
planes (Vimar patent).
104
System components
Installation
For the infrared presence detector to work properly you need to follow these installation rules:
- no not place any objects in front of the infrared sensor (plants, curtains, furniture, etc.);
- do not expose it to direct light from lamps or sunlight;
- do not subject it to the direct action of sources of heat;
- do not place it in the direction of sources of heat;
NO
NO
NO
NO
During the WalkTest phase the infrared detect detects a presence, signals the event to the control panel and
shows it to the user via a blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay so that the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system immediately triggering an alarm.
The most common application of this function is to turn on the system from inside the house and, afterwards, leave
by passing in front of one or more sensors without the system generating any alarm.
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Activation delay (default 0): the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = instantaneous);
2) Zone: the assignment zone (between 1 and 30) is set from the control panel by selecting the number to the
SAI keyof the chosen zone in the specific menu;
3) PIR pulse threshold (default 3): when the detector detects a warm body in its area of coverage it generates a
sequence of pulses.
They are considered good only if they have a longer duration than the threshold set by the user (see point 4).
For the detector to generate an alarm the number of pulses set by the user (threshold setting) must be
exceeded; the greater the setting the greater the tolerance with which the device will signal an alarm
condition. The setting range is between 1 and 10.
4) PIR time threshold (default 0.4): permits selecting the minimum duration of the pulse beyond which an alarm
message is generated in line with the number of pulses selected in point 3.
The setting range is between 0.1 and 8 in steps of 0.1 s.
105
5) Brightness threshold (default value 100%): the degree of brightness is read by a photoresistor and expressed
with values ranging from 0% (light) to 100% (dark) in steps of 1%.
This parameter is optional and can be used in case of advanced functions (e.g. in an automation group).
At bottom left there is a rear view of the infrared detector.
6) Duration of actuation (default value 30 s): used, with the system OFF, to repeat the command message for the
associated actuator. In practice, after commanding the actuator, the detector checks whether there are any
additional movements for a period of time equal to the duration of actuation and, if this has occurred, at the
end of this time a new message will be sent to the actuator irrespective of the brightness setting.
Area of coverage of the infrared detector lens
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
A
1,2
B
C
D
0
m 0
1,5
8
A = 3 beams +6
B = 3 beams +0
C = 3 beams -20
D = 3 beams -30
RIVE
LATO
RE P
IR
BUS
A
C
B
C
B
10
Rated capacity
A
C
B
C
B
A
B
C
B
Volumetric cover
8m
D
1,5 m
D
D
112
• Explored solid angle:
- 112 horizontal
- 36 vertical
- 17 sectors on 4 planes
• Capacity: 10 m max (8 m typical)
3.2.2 Adjustable passive infrared motion detector.
This device, available for the Eikon series, is able to generate an alarm message when it detects motion of heatemitting bodies in its area of coverage. If it is configured in a By-me system where there is both the automation
and the intrusion detection alamr system, it is able to control a relay, with the intrusion detection alarm system off,
that can be used to switch on a light, activate a bell, etc. (see chap. 9 in the Automation section). The detector is
equipped with an articulated lens for installation at the top of a room and with lids for adjusting the cover.
The technical specifications are similar to the infrared detector 20485.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20486: 2 Eikon modules
Eikon
Horizontal axis adjustment: 40°
Vertical axis adjustment: 22°
106
3.2.3 Dual technology presence detector.
The dual technology sensor incorporates a microwave sensor and an infrared sensor and is able to signal people
or animals passing through its area of coverage. Dual technology enables making the
sensor sensitive to the most common causes of false alarms.
The sensor works in “AND” mode; this means that, when either sensor detects motion in the area of coverage it
remains on pre-alarm awaiting confirmation from the other sensor as well. Once this condition occurs the device
sends the signal to the control panel.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20487: 2 Eikon modules
16937: 2 Idea modules
14487: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-32 V d.c.
- Operating temperature: -5 -- +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: recess or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with antitamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA
- Distance: 8 m
- Infrared and microwave sensor
- Operating: in “AND” mode with system on and only infrared with system off
- Possibility of programming the sensor activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the sensor
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control panel
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED.
- It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
Indicators
• Detecting the motion of warm bodies in the area of coverage by means of an infrared sensor.
When the system is on, the device detects moving bodies with a microwave sensor too; if the microwave and
infrared sensors detect movement at the same time there is an alarm signal (AND function).
• red LED:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to intrusion alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device; The LED keeps on blinking until the
alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is
turned on again. Therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm.
- blinking when the device is powered.
107
System components
• green LED blinking:
- detected the presence of a warm body with the intrusion detection system turned off;
- detected the presence of a warm body with the device not configured;
- detected the presence of a warm body in the WalkTest phase.
The detection zone, of the volumetric type, is obtained by using a Fresnel lens divided into 17 beams on 4 planes
(Vimar patent) and by a microwave detector with an area of coverage of 80° on the horizontal plane and 30° on the vertical plane.
Side view
Front view
80° microwaves
30° microwaves
1,2 m
12
A = 11 rays
B = 9 rays
C = 3 rays
C
2
B
4
6
10
A
8
8
10 m
6
4
2
m
105° infrared
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Activation delay (default 0): the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s
(0 s = instantaneous);
2) Zone: the assignment zone (between 1 and 30) is set from the control panel by selecting the number of the
chosen zone in the specific menu;
3) PIR pulse threshold (default 3): when the detector detects a warm body in its area of coverage it generates a
sequence of pulses.
They are considered good only if they have a longer duration than the threshold set by the user (see point 4).
For the detector to generate an alarm the number of pulses set by the user (threshold setting) must be
exceeded; the greater the setting the greater the tolerance with which the device will signal an alarm condition.
The setting range is between 1 and 10.
4) PIR time threshold (default 0.4): permits selecting the minimum duration of the pulse beyond which an alarm
message is generated in line with the number of pulses selected in point 3.
The setting range is between 0.1 and 8 in steps of 0.1 s.
5) Sensitivity of the antitamper device (default 0 that is disabled): the degree of sensitivity of the antitamper device
can be set between 0 (off) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting the greater the degree of sensitivity
obtained).
6) Brightness threshold (default 100%): the degree of brightness is read by a photoresistor and expressed as a
percentage with values ranging from 0% (light) to 100% (dark) in steps of 1%.
This parameter is optional and can be used in case of advanced functions (e.g. in an automation group); a
typical application is to use the detector to control a relay that switches on a light; in this case, to have the
control in a bright room too, it is necessary to set a low threshold value.
7) Duration of actuation (default 30): if within the set time, in the range between 10 and 250 s, the device
detects a greater number of pulses than the threshold set in point 3, with the system off, a message is sent to
the actuator.
108
System components
Note: The device can be configured in an SAI application or in an Automation application.
If the detector is used both in an Automation application and in an SAI application, the device must always be
configured first in the intrusion detection alarm system and then in the automation system; having done this the
Automations group must be added to the Router via the specific menu Router
Management.
Installation
For the dual technology presence detector to work properly you need to follow these
installation rules:
- no not place any objects in front of the infrared sensor (plants, curtains, furniture, etc.);
- do not expose it to direct light from lamps or sunlight;
- do not subject it to the direct action of sources of heat;
- do not place it in the direction of sources of heat;
- do not put any metal items nearby;
- do not put two or more detectors in overlapping areas of coverage.
NO
NO
NO
NO
During the WalkTest phase the infrared detect detects a presence, signals the event to the control panel and
shows it to the user via a blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay so that the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system signalling an alarm.
The most common application of this function is to turn on the system from inside the house and, afterwards,
leave by passing in front of one or more sensors without the system generating an alarm.
Example: Delay set to 30 s.
On activating the system there is a time of 30 s to get out and 30 s to get back in (for a total of 60 s); if you go
back in after 60 s have passed and therefore with the system on, you have 30 s to turn off the system before it
signals an alarm.
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select “Device Reset” and press the button on the device; the red LED
illuminates.
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
109
System components
3.3 Connector
The connector is the device that turns the system on and off (completely or the associated partitioned zones) after
recognising the code emitted by the transponder keys.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20482: 2 Eikon modules
16932: 2 Idea modules
14482: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS (20-32 V d.c.)
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (inside)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with active infrared sensor built in
- Consumption: 10 mA
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- Two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the antitamper system.
- Programming the relevant zone via the control panel.
The connector is governed, for turning the system on and off, by a transponder key with over 1000 billion possible
combinations.
Note: Do not put two connectors next to each other on the same box.
Operation
It reads the code of the transponder key to make the first acquisition (add keys) and in normal operation it turns
the system on and off sending the code to the control panel.
Indicators
• red LED:
- on steady during the configuration phase;
- blinking due to system in alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device. The LED keeps on blinking until
the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off the
system to cut off the alarm.
The LED blinks even when the key code has not been acknowledged.
• green LED blinking:
- the key code has been acknowledged;
- the system is turned on in partitioned mode;
110
System components
• green LED on steady:
- the system is turned on totally;
• red/green two-colour LED blinking:
- indicates that an alarm condition has occurred that is no longer in progress (alarm memory);
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Zone: the assignment zone from 1 to 30, set from the control panel by selecting the number of the chosen
zone in the specific menu;
2) Sensitivity of the antitamper device: (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the antitamper device
can be set between 0 (off) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of sensitivity
obtained).
3) Open if ON: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the transponder must activate an actuator
located in the same zone as the connector when the key is brought near and the system is on.
4) Open if on standby: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the transponder must activate an
actuator located in the same zone as the connector when the key is brought near and the system is off.
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
INSE
RITO
RE
BUS
111
System components
• Transponder key
The transponder keys (01815), which need neither maintenance nor batteries,
are special devices, of the size of a key ring, whose function is similar to that of
conventional remote controls.
Each key is equipped with a unique code that is different for each one (1000
billion possible combinations) and, depending on the configuration assigned to
the connectors, it is possible to turn the alarm system on and/or off or partition it.
The transponder keys are closely correlated to the connectors that, in the phase
of configuration, store the codes they contain and send them to the control panel
for recognition.
Operation
The inductive coupling between the connector, which contains the primary winding of a transformer, and the
transponder key, which contains the secondary winding (coil in a small capsule), generates energy that activates
the secondary winding, which responds by modulating and transmitting the code.
The code is transmitted by setting the transponder key into contact (as shown by the position of the arrow) with
the connector, which is recognised and signalled to the system.
The keys can be called SAI and SPECIAL SAI.
• SAI: allows turning the system on/off through any one of the connectors in the system; turns on the partitions
and therefore the zones coupled with the connector.
Each connector can be coupled with up to 24 SAI keys, whose code can be recognised by all the connectors
• SPECIAL SAI: allows turning the system on/off only via the connector through which it was configured and it
activates only the zones associated with it.
Each connector can be coupled with up to 4 SPECIAL SAI keys.
The SPECIAL SAI key can be associated, on the same connector, with different partitions to the SAI key.
112
System components
3.4 Digital keypad
By means of a code typed on the keypad, this device allows the system to be activated or deactivated
according to the association of the partitions into which the system is subdivided.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20483: 2 Eikon modules
16933: 2 Idea modules
14483: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-32 V d.c.
- Protection class: P30
- Operating temperature: -5 -- +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical antitamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control panel
- Configuration button (button C)
- Warning buzzer: 85 db(A) at 10cm
- Warning LED for pressing the button each time; the OK button has a two-colour red/green LED
- It stores up to 30 different 5-digit codes (100,000 combinations)
Operation
The device is used for total or partial activation and deactivation of the burglar alarm system.
Using the 12-key pad it is possible to type in a 5-digit PIN (access code) which then allows the user to select
the partitions to be switched on or off; a partition is a set of zones that are switched on or off at the same time.
Each PIN must be associated on the control panel with one or more partitions; this PIN allows activating or
deactivating only the partitions with which it has been associated.
Up to 9 different partitions can be created on the control panel.
Start-up procedure
1- reset the keypad (see Reset procedure of the device on page 166)
2- configure the keypad (see Add bus devices procedure on page 165)
3- enter a 5-digit PIN to be used as an access code on the control panel (see SAI key management – Registering
new key and new PIN digital keypad page 171)
4- enter at least one partition (Partition – Partition management page 170)
5- associate the PIN with the partition(s) created (Partition – association of partitions keypad codes page 170).
113
System components
Procedure for turning the system on/off
Key in the 5-digit PIN (access code) on the keypad and then press OK:
- if the PIN is not recognized as valid, the OK button blinks red for 5 seconds;
- if the code is recognized as valid, the button backlighting switches on for the currently active partition (on) in the
system and the OK button blinks green.
Each numerical button has the meaning of signalling and controlling the corresponding partition; button 1 controls
partition 1, button 2 controls partition 2 and so on.
The back-lighting of the individual keys provides a visual check of the on or off status of the individual partitions
in the system; if a partition is active, the corresponding key is backlit. For example, if partition 2 is active, button
2 will be backlit.
Button 0 has the meaning of a special command; via button 0 all the partitions associated with a certain PIN are
switched on or off.
On pressing button 0, if there are any partitions associated with the PIN that are active, they will be switched off
(button 0 LED off)
On pressing button 0, if the system is completely deactivated, all the partitions associated with the PIN will be
switched on (button 0 LED backlit if the system is completely active).
For instance, if a PIN is associated with partitions 2, 4 and 6, on pressing button 0 they will be switched on or off
together (that is it is not necessary to key in buttons 2, 4 and 6 individally).
If for a PIN the item “All partitions” has been selected on the control panel (see point 4 of the start procedure),
button 0 will activate and deactivate the system COMPLETELY and the backlighting of button 0 will indicate the
system status (completely on/off).
The backlighting of all the buttons is timed.
Summing up, then, if the PIN has been acknowledged as valid (green LED OK blinking), it is possible to switch on
and off each single partition that, in the start-up phase, was previously associated with the PIN itself. Pressing a
backlit button switches off the corresponding partition (the button goes out); vice versa, pressing a button that is
not backlit switches on the corresponding partition (the button lights up).
After selecting the desired partitions, press the OK button so that the control panel recognizes the change; the
latter, following the request from the keypad, switches on or off the partitions associated with the entered PIN and
sends the same enabling message to all the keypads in the system. At this stage, the keypad being used (that is
the one where the code has been entered), and this one only, will with the backlighting of the buttons show the
new situation of the activation/deactivation of the various partitions. This display will remain for approximately 5
seconds after which the buttons will switch off.
The keypad emits an audible warning that allows the user, in combination with the backlighting of the buttons, to
identify the current status of the system; more specifically:
- 1 beep if the system has been activated
- 2 beeps if the system has been deactivated
- 3 beeps if the system has been partially activated
Button C is used as the delete key.
Pressing button C while entering the PIN or during the partition on/off selection phase causes all the operations
performed to be cancelled.
Button C is the same button also used during the configuration procedure.
114
System components
A PIN code added to a keypad is also recognized by all the other keypads in the system; (up to a maximum of 30).
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Zone: the assignment zone from 1 to 30, set from the control panel by selecting the number of the chosen
zone in the specific menu;
2) Sensitivity of the antitamper device: (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the antitamper device
can be set between 0 (off) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of sensitivity
obtained).
3) Open if ON: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the keypad must activate an actuator located
in its same zone when the system is on.
4) Open if on standby: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the keypad must activate an actuator
located in its same zone when the system is off.
5) Activation sound: (default ON). Possibility of turning the system on/off indicator on/off.
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select “Device Reset” and press button C on the device; the red
LED illuminates.
Hold down the device's button C until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
When the LED stops blinking red/green and is off, the reset phase has concluded.
115
System components
3.5 Back-up unit for recess-mounting and EN 50022 rail
3.5.1 Back-up unit for recess-mounting
The back-up unit houses 2 lead batteries (not supplied) connected in series and kept charged by the power
supply; they permit powering the system in the event of a power failure.
It can be powered by the power supply 01800 or by using the AUX output of the power supply 01801.
It is equipped with an audible warning with the function of a siren for indoor use.
It is supplied in the following versions:
01804.04: white Idea, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.B boxes
01804.14: grey Idea, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894 boxes
01804.01: white Plana, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.01 boxes
01804.N: next Eikon, for dedicated recess-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.N boxes
01804.SL: silver Plana, for dedicated recess-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.SL boxes
01804.…
Note: For the Eikon series use art. 01804.14.
Technical characteristics
- Input on the power supply in case of flat batteries: 150 mA
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): 29 ±1 V d.c.
- Output voltage: BUS 29 ±1 V d.c.
- Max. output current: BUS 320 mA
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: –5 - +45 °C (inside)
- Level of sound starting at 3 m (service audible warning): 80 dB (A)
- Batteries that can be housed: 2x12 V - 2 Ah (see page 120)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting
- Type of protection: against opening the cover with microswitch
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
The back-up unit has 2 input terminals to be connected to the power supply 01801 at 29 V d.c. (AUX output + -)
It comprises:
- a decoupling coil between power supply and bus;
- an audible warning with the function of a siren for indoor use;
- the compartment for housing the batteries.
116
System components
The back-up unit has 6 output terminals:
• BUS + - : bus power supply;
• CENTR + - : power supply of the control panel module 01960;
• BATT_EXT + - : connection with the auxiliary battery holder unit 01803;
• A: connection with the auxiliary battery holder unit for protection against wire cutting.
By powering the back-up unit via the AUX output of the power supply 01801 it is possible to supply not only the
BUS, but also the control panel of the By-me intrusion detection alarm system video door entry and an auxiliary
back-up unit
- Max supply current for By-me control panel: 150 mA d.c.
- Rated supply voltage of control panel of By-me intrusion detection alarm system video door entry (Vn): 29 V
±1 V d.c.
- Rated output voltage for auxiliary back-up (Vn): 27 V ±1 V d.c.
- Rated supply current for auxiliary back-up (In): 150 mA d.c.
Characteristics
• Built-in audible warning;
• Sound emission modulated in frequency and possibility of choosing different sounds to associate with the
types of alarm;
• Possibility of selecting an audible warning to signal the operations of turning the system on/off (beep);
• Self-protection against wire cutting;
• Programming the maximum duration of the audible alarm warnings;
• Checking the status of the batteries and its communication to the control panel;
• Housing for 2 batteries of 12 V and 2 Ah with the function of back-up (buffer) in the event of a mains failure;
• Equipped with battery-charging circuit (buffer-battery)
• Input at 29 V d.c. (power supply voltage from power supply) and output at 29 V d.c. (voltage of the bus);
During the programming phase it is possible to associate a different sound for each type of alarm so as to
obtain a sound differentiation; this allows understanding immediately the type of alarm in progress.
The alarm signals have decreasing priority according to the following table:
Priority
Attempt at opening the cover
Alarmed system
The siren no longer communicates with
the rest of the system (the wires have
been cut)
3 (max)
2
1 min.
The duration of each type of sound can be selected in a time interval ranging from 5 s to 5 min.
117
System components
1) Type of sound
The system offers the possibility of selecting 4 different types of sound to combine them with the various types
of alarm:
- opening the cover (attempt at tampering with the device)
- alarmed system (detected intrusion or attempted tampering)
- attempt at tampering
- watchdog or wire cutting
To activate this option:
•From the menu Man. devices select Parameters;
- using q and p, select Back-up;
- select Ok;
- using q and p select Parameters;
- select Sound type: the display will show 4 digits, each one of which is associated with a particular type of
alarm (from left to right):
- 1st digit - 2nd digit
- 3rd digit
- 4th digit system tamper alarm
tampering on the cover
intrusion alarm
Watchdog
-Select Mod and using q and p it is possible to assign a value between 0 and 4; 0 corresponds to sound
not enabled.
The available sounds and respective characteristics are given in the following table:
Type of
sound
Characteristics
0
Inactive
1
Modulation up and down at high frequency
2
Modulation only up at high frequency
3
Multi-tone at high frequency
4
Two-tone at high frequency
Example
Setting the sequence (starting from the left) 0 1 2 4, produces:
- in the event of a tamper alarm in the system the back-up unit will not generate any sound signal;
- in the event of a device tamper alarm the back-up unit will generate the high frequency sound with modulation
up and down;
- in the event of an intrusion alarm the back-up unit will generate the high frequency sound with modulation up
only;
- in the event of a Watchdog alarm, the back-up unit will generate the two-tone low frequency sound.
118
System components
2) Zone
The back-up unit is systematically assigned zone 31 (fixed parameter) at the time of configuration, after pressing
the button.
3) Duration of the sound
The alarm signal can be set between 5 s and 5 min in steps of 5 s (default 40 s).
4) On/off audible warning (beep)
This function is set from the control panel (default OFF).
5) Tamper alarm activation
This function is set from the control panel and allows turning the protection on/off against opening the cover of
the back-up unit (default NO).
119
System components
0,5
Back-up unit battery
The system is powered, in the event of the 230 V~ electric mains failing, by two lead batteries of 12 V 2 Ah (not
supplied) that are housed in the device. The two batteries are connected in series to supply the line with the rated
voltage of 24 V.
60
Technical characteristics
Rated voltage: 12 V
Capacity: 2 Ah
Maximum dimensions of the battery: see figure
178 0,5
0,5
35
Connection terminals
from power supply
Connection
terminals to bus
Connection
terminals for
monitor 20550
Connection
terminals to
the auxiliary
back-up unit
01803…
Antitamper
Configuration
push-button
Configuration
LED
120
Jumper to
enable antitamper
on auxiliary back-up unit
(remove to enable)
System components
3.5.2 Auxiliary battery holder unit
The auxiliary battery holder unit contains 2 lead batteries (not supplied) connected in series and kept charged by
the main back-up power supply 01804; they can extend the duration of the power supply to the system in the
event of a power failure.
It is supplied in the following versions:
01803.04: white Idea, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.B boxes
01803.14: grey Idea, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894 boxes
01803.01: white Plana, for dedicated flush-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.01 boxes
01803.N: next Eikon, for dedicated recess-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.N boxes
01803.SL: silver Plana, for dedicated recess-mounting 16895 or surface-mounting 16894.SL boxes
01803.…
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): 27 ±1 V d.c.
- Rated supply current (In): 150 mA d.c.
- Max. output current: BUS 320 mA
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: –5 - +45 °C (inside)
- Batteries that can be housed: 2x12 V - 2 Ah (see page 120)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting
- Type of protection: against opening the cover with microswitch.
The auxiliary back-up unit has 3 input terminals to be connected to the back-up unit 01804.
Two terminals are used for hooking up the batteries and the third terminal is used for self-protection against wire
cutting.
IMPORTANT: The auxiliary battery holder unit 01803 must be connected as near as possible to the back-up unit
01804; in any case, their distance must never be any greater than 1 m.
121
System components
3.5.3 Back-up unit 01807
Back-up unit with decoupling coil, output 800 mA, power supply 29 Vd.c., installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35),
it occupies 6 modules size 17.5 mm
The back-up unit 01807 can be used as an alternative to the recess-mounting back-up unit 01804; it takes up 6
modules and, when used with lead batteries 12 V 2.2 Ah, it can be installed in a consumer unit coupled with the
battery holder bracket 01809.
It has 2 dedicated inputs for a total of 4 batteries of 12 V (not supplied) and terminals for connecting an external
tamper.The back-up unit 01807 must be powered by using the AUX output of the power supply 01801.
01808 UNITÀ DI BACK-UP
Grado: 1
Classe: II
BAT1
+ -
BAT2
+ -
TAMPER
A C
492.18081 0A 0808 Vimar - Marostica - Italy
29 V
+ -
BUS OUT
+ - V+ V-
492.1808 0A 0808 Vimar
Front view and connections:
Supply voltage
LED for signalling alarms and change in physical address
Configuration button
Battery 1 input (24 V dc)
Auxiliary battery 2 input (24 V dc)
External tamper input
29 V input from AUX output 01801
Terminals for connection to the BUS
Terminals for connection to the module 01960 or surface-mounted control panels
LED indicators:
- green LED at top right: power supply voltage on
- two-colour LED at bottom right:
- red LED on steady: configuration and reset
- red LED blinking: tamper alarm or when the device is powered
- red/green LED blinking: automatic address change
Terminals:
The backup unit 01807 has 12 terminals:
BAT1 + - : battery 1 input (12+12 V)
BAT2 + - : auxiliary battery 2 input (12+12 V) (to be connected if battery 1 is not sufficient)
A C TAMPER: external tamper input
+29 V + - : power supply input from power supply unit 01801 (AUX output).
BUS + -: bus output
OUT V+ V-: power supply output for the central control module 01960 or surface-mounting control panels
122
System components
Note on the AC TAMPER terminal: If you want to protect the device against tampering, it is possible to connect
these terminals to a switch connected to the system for opening the consumer unit housing the device.
If the control panel tamper is enabled, an alarm will be signalled if the A-C contact is opened.
If not used, the two terminals can be left disconnected, disabling tamper control from the control panel.
NOTE: For the battery installation details, see the instructions sheet provided with the battery holder bracket 01809.
Technical characteristics
- Max. absorption on the power supply in the event of flat batteries: approximately 200 mA (with 4 12 V batteries
or with 2 24 V batteries)
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): 29 ±1 V d.c.
- Input consumption 29 V: 800 mA
- Output voltage: BUS 29 ±1 V d.c.
- Consumption: BUS output:
Total current
800 mA
-
Battery current
100 mA (BAT1) + 100 mA (BAT2 if used)
-
Output current OUT (if used)
150 mA
=
Current on the bus
output OUT: 150 mA (terminals for connection to the module 01960 or surface-mounted control panels).
battery 1 output: 27V DC (max 100 mA batteries completely flat) - for back-up unit battery
battery 2 output: 27V DC (max 100 mA batteries completely flat) - for an auxiliary battery on stand-by: 30 mA.
- Control panel rated supply voltage (Vn): 29 V ±1 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: –5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Checking the status of the battery and its communication to the control panel:
- Battery-charging circuit (buffer-battery)
- Type of PS: A
- Low battery voltage: 20 V
- Type of SD: 5.6 Ah at 36 h (80%)
- Relative humidity: 30-75%
- Weight: 215 g
- Dimensions: 105.5x90x61 mm
Deliverable current according to the number of back-up units and the number and type of 12 V batteries.
1 back-up unit 01807
2 back-up units 01807
Battery type
2 batteries
4 batteries
6 batteries
8 batteries
Duration
2,2 Ah
120 mA
240 mA
360 mA
480 mA
12 h
2,2 Ah
60 mA
120 mA
180 mA
240 mA
24 h
7 Ah
400 mA
600 mA
1000 mA
1200 mA
12 h
7 Ah
200 mA
400 mA
600 mA
800 mA
24 h
123
System components
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Zone
The back-up unit is systematically assigned zone 31 (fixed parameter) at the time of configuration, after pressing
the button.
2) Tamper
Used to activate or deactivate tamper input control (antitamper).
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select “Device Reset” and press the button on the device; the red
LED will light up.
Hold down the device’s button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
Important: The maximum distance between the back-up unit and the batteries is equal to 1 m.
3.6 Siren for outdoor use
Equipped with polycarbonate enclosure resistant to the harshest atmospheric conditions, the siren for outdoor use
enables audible (can be heard far away) and visual warning of all alarm conditions. The siren is self-powered, it is
controlled by a microprocessor and is equipped with an indicator lamp (blinking flash) built in.
WARNING: "Zone 31” is reserved to the sirens, the back-up units and possibly the contact interfaces or RF
interfaces that are used for advanced applications (see chap.11 of this manual). If one or more contact or RF
interfaces are configured in zone 31 it is possible to activate a sound signal of the siren for outdoor use, even with
the system switched off or with any partitioning of the system.
This function only applies to burglar alarm devices such as contact interfaces 20490-16940-14490, 12 V contact
interfaces 20491-16941-14491 and radio interfaces 20493-16943-14493.
In short, therefore, if one or more of these devices are configured in zone 31 and detect an alarm, the siren
generates the sound signal whatever the system status.
This device is supplied in a single version:
01806: for surface mounting.
Audible
warning
Visual indicator
124
System components
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 27-32 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP34
- Operating temperature: -25 - +55 °C (for outdoor use)
- Sound pressure level at 3 m: 103 dB (A)
- Fundamental frequency: 1475 Hz
- Maximum battery that can be housed: 12 V - 2 Ah
- Type of installation: surface mounting
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
The siren for outdoor use has 2 terminals for connection to the bus.
Characteristics
• Additional protection with tropicalized steel cover;
• Frequency modulated sound emission, with the possibility of associating different sounds according to the
type of alarm;
• Moving coil exponential horn with high acoustic efficiency;
• Protection against:
- wire cutting;
- breakage of the lamp filament;
- tampering;
• Anti-sabotage device against oxygen lance (anti-flame device);
• Programming the maximum duration of the alarm warning;
• Battery test circuit with flat battery signal on the control panel and turning off the blinker when this condition
occurs;
• Housing for lead battery of 12 V and 2 Ah (not supplied);
• Input while charging battery: 60 mA.
The siren is able to:
- detect, via microswitch, opening of the polycarbonate outer cover or ripping off the wall;
- detect cutting of the BUS cable;
- detect, via magnetic contact, opening of the metal safety cover;
- detect breakage or removal of the blinker;
- perform self-protection against the oxygen lance (oxyhydrogen flame) so that, if the temperature of the cover
rises above 100 °C, an alarm is generated;
- check for the presence of a moving coil horn;
All these types of protection can be turned on or off from the control panel at the time of programming.
125
System components
There may be the following cases:
- the battery is flat, the system assigns priority to the sound of the horn over the signal supplied by the blinker;
- the voltage on the bus is low when, due to a lack of mains voltage, the operation of the entire system is ensured
by the batteries of the back-up unit. In this case, to save energy, the siren battery-charging circuit is disabled.
The alarm signals have decreasing priority according to the following table:
1) Siren cycles
An alarm condition from the various sensors generates a single sound cycle lasting at most 5 minutes, with an
Priority
Attempt at pulling off the wall or opening the
cover
5 (max)
Attempt at sabotage with oxygen lance
4
Alarmed system
3
The siren no longer communicates with the
rest of the system (the wires have been cut)
2
interval equal to 6 minutes between one alarm and the next. Each device can produce at most 2 alarms, up to
a total of 5 alarms. The following alarms are not signalled, but they are saved in an events list and shown on the
control panel display.
2) Type of sound
The system offers the possibility of selecting 6 different types of sound to combine them with the various types
of alarm:
- opening the cover (attempt at tampering with the device);
- against oxygen lance (anti-flame device);
- alarmed system (detected intrusion or attempted tampering);
- Watchdog or wire cutting.
To activate this option, use q and p to select the siren from the list of configured devices in zone 31:
- press Param;
- using q and p select Sound Type.
Having done this, the display will show 4 rows each of which is associated with a digit that corresponds
to a certain type of sound:
126
System components
- system tamper sound
- siren tamper sound
- intrusion alarm sound
- watchdog alarm sound
- Select Mod and using q and p it is possible to assign a value between 0 and 6; 0 corresponds to sound
not enabled.
The available sounds and respective characteristics are given in the following table:
Example
Setting the sequence (starting from the left) 2 6 3 0, produces:
Type of
sound
Characteristics
0
Inactive
1
Modulation up and down at high frequency
2
Modulation only up at high frequency
3
Multi-tone at high frequency
4
Two-tone at high frequency
5
Modulation up and down at low frequency
6
Modulation only up at low frequency
- in the event of a system tamper alarm the siren will generate the high frequency sound with modulation up;
- in the event of a device tamper alarm or attempted break-in with an oxygen lance, the siren will generate the low
frequency sound with modulation up only;
- in the event of an intrusion alarm, the siren will generate the multi-tone high-frequency sound;
- in the event of a Watchdog alarm, the siren will not generate any sound signal;
3) Zone
The outdoor siren is systematically assigned zone 31 (fixed parameter) at the time of configuration, after pressing
the button.
4) Duration of the sound
The alarm signal can be set between 5 s and 5 min in steps of 5 s (default 30).
127
System components
5) Tamper alarm activation
Via the control panel it is possible to turn on/off the various available tamper alarms listed on the control panel:
- audible warning if the voltage on the bus is too low (Low voltage sound);
- checking there is the horn (“Horn check);
- checking the filament of the indicator lamp (Filam. broken);
- anti-foam tamper on/off status (Anti-foam)
- on/off status of the tamper against oxygen lance (Oxygen lance)
- on/off status of the tamper against opening the siren covers (Microswitch)
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select “Device Reset” and press the button on the device; the red LED
illuminates.
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
Outdoor siren battery
Powers the siren in case of tampering the connection line with the rest of the system.
It must always be present since, in the event of an alarm, it supplies the energy necessary to develop the required
sound power and to supply the blinker, even when there is the connection to the bus and the mains voltage. It is
kept charged via the connection line to the bus.
60
0,5
Technical characteristics:
Rated voltage: 12 V
Capacity: 2 Ah
Maximum dimensions of the battery: see figure
178 0,5
128
0,5
35
System components
3.7 Siren for indoor use
The siren for indoor use provides audible warnings (that can be heard far away) of all alarm conditions.
The device is self-powered and uses 3 rechargeable AAA NiMh batteries.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20495: 3 Eikon modules
16945: 3 Idea modules
14495: 3 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-32 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 -- +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: recess or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975..)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical antitamper device built in
- Consumption: 10mA on stand-by
20mA max with batteries discharged
- Level of sound starting at 3 m (service audible warning): > 80 dB (A)
- Possibility of configuring four different types of sound to be combined with the different alarm signals
- System activation, deactivation and partitioning sound signal
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
Indicators
• red LED:
- on steady during the configuration phase;
- blinking when powered or in case of tampering with the device.
Settings
1) Type of sound
The system offers the possibility of selecting 4 different types of sound and the audible warning for activation/
deactivation of the alarm system. Sound type 4 has been set by default for all alarms.
The following alarms can be signalled:
- system tamper alarm (tampering);
- optical antitamper alarm of the siren;
- intrusion alarm;
- alarm for watchdog or cutting wires.
129
System components
To activate this option, use q and p to select the siren for indoor use from the list of configured devices
in zone 31:
- press Param;
- using q and p select the Type of sound to assign to each type of alarm
- press Ok;
To activate this option, use q and p to select the siren from the list of configured devices in zone 31:
- press Param;
- using q and p select Sound Type.
Having done this, the display will show 4 rows each of which is associated with a digit that corresponds to a
certain type of sound:
- system tamper sound
- siren tamper sound
- intrusion alarm sound
- al. sound Watchdog
- select Select and using buttons q and p it is possible to assign a value between 0 and 4 to each row; 0
corresponds to sound not enabled.
The available sounds and their characteristics are given in the following table: Type of
sound
Characteristics
0
Inactive
1
Modulation up and down at high frequency
2
Modulation only up at high frequency
3
Multi-tone at high frequency
4
Two-tone at high frequency
The sound cycles of the siren for indoor use are the same as those already specified for the siren for outdoor use.
With the control panel it is moreover possible to turn the audible warning that identifies changes in the system
status on / off, namely:
•complete system activation: 1 beep
•complete system deactivation: 2 beeps
•partial system activation: 3 beeps
2) Duration of sound: The alarm signal can be set between 5 s and 5 min in steps of 5 s (default 30 s).
3) Sensitivity of the antitamper device: (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the antitamper device
can be set between 0 (off) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree of sensitivity
obtained).
4) Activation sound: Used to set the system activation / deactivation beeps
5) Zone: The siren for indoor use is systematically assigned zone 31 (fixed parameter) at the time of configuration,
after pressing the button
130
System components
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select “Device Reset” and press the button on the device; the red LED
illuminates.
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
Changing batteries
nr. 3
AAA HR03 NiMH 1.2 V
IMPORTANT: Use solely rechargeable AAA NiMH 1.2 V batteries.
Never use non-rechargeable batteries for any reason whatsoever; this is to avoid the risk of them exploding.
131
System components
3.8 Power supplies
3.8.1 Power supply 120-230 V ~
The power supply 01801 has a decoupling coil.
On each line, at most 2 power supplies can be installed with the associated back-up unit.
Front view and connections.
230 V~
L N
492.18012 0B 0409 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
01801 Alimentatore/Power supply
BUS
AUX
-5 ˚C - +45 ˚C
Overload
I > Imax
29 V
I BUS
Output overvoltage
OV
29 V
I AUX
> 800 mA
I BUS + I AUX -
Mains voltage
ON
492.18010 0A 0404 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
29 V
AUX
BUS
492.18011 0B 0409 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
29 V
AUX
29 V
BUS
Technical characteristics
• Power supply: 120-230 V~, 50-60 Hz
• Consumption:
- 120 V: 440 mA max
- 230 V: 290 mA max
• BUS output voltage: 29 V with decoupling coil
• AUX output voltage: 29 V d.c.
• Total max output current: 800 mA
• Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (inside)
• 9 modules of 17.5 mm
Output connections
• AUX + - : if there is an intrusion detection alarm system, the output powers the back-up unit 01804 while if there
is only the automation system the output powers the V+ and V terminals- of the control panel module 01960.
• BUS + - : if there is an intrusion detection alarm system, the output remains unused, while if there is only the
automation system the output powers the BUS terminals + - of the control panel module 01960.
132
System components
3.8.2 12 V power supply
The power supply 01830 is used in all systems containing devices (sensors, infrared barriers, etc.) that need to
be powered at 12 V with a buffer battery.
Front view and connections
L N
120 - 230 V
492.1830A1 0A 0803 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
01830
Alimentatore/Power supply
120-230 V
350-260 mA
OUT
12 V
1A
50-60 Hz
Grado : 1
Classe: II
ON
492.1830A0 0A 0803 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
12 V
492.1830A2 0A 0803 VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
BATT
Low
Voltage
Technical characteristics
- Power supply: 120-230 V~ 50-60 Hz
- Consumption: max 350 mA
- Current for recharging battery: max 220 mA
- Output voltage: 12 V d.c. (± 15%)
- Max output load: 1 A
- Output contact: NC, 28 V dc 100 mA max
• Voltage for opening contact N/C (“low battery” indicator): 11.5 V (± 5%)
• Battery charging time: max 72 h
• Batteries to use:
- with load of 1 A, lead battery of 14 Ah 12 V
- with load of 0.5 A, lead battery of 7.2 Ah 12 V
• Operating temperature: -5 °C - +45 °C (inside)
• Installation: on EN 50022 rail (4 modules of 17.5 mm). Terminals
L N: power supply terminals 120 - 230 V~
12 V: output terminals to power devices at 12 V
BATT + -: input terminals for battery connection
“Low Voltage”: terminals for signalling “low battery” (via NC contact)
Notes: In the phase of installation, have a disconnection above the power supply.
If the LEDs do not light up, disconnect the power supply from the mains, check the output current on the
load and wait for 5 minutes before powering up the device again.
For further details, see the instructions sheet provided with the power supply 01830.
133
System components
3.9 Contact interfaces
3.9.1 Contact interface
The contact interface is the device used to connect the burglar alarm system with the normally closed magnetic
alarm contacts, electro-mechanical rope contacts to protect blinds and roller shutters and anti-impact seismic
sensors to protect windows. In addition, if a generic detector (gas detector, etc.) is connected to one of its inputs,
it can be used to generate a technical alarm.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20488: 2 Eikon modules
16938: 2 Idea modules
14488: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-32 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 -- +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical antitamper device built in
- Consumption: 5 mA
- Possibility of programming the interface activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the interface for blinds and of the antitamper system
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control panel
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
The contact interface has:
- 2 terminals for connection to the bus (+ and -)
- a common output terminal (C)
- 4 input terminals for NC contacts: the tamper continuity wire (A), electromechanical rope contacts (S), magnetic
contacts (M), technical alarms (T).
Characteristics:
• It detects opening NC magnetic contacts, cutting the line of the magnetic contacts and of the antitamper
continuity wire, the movement of blinds or opening other NC contacts (technical alarm). To detect short circuiting
on the contacts line it is necessary to first connect a resistance of 15 kO in series with the line (see fig. page 136).
• It is used to activate the panic alarm warning that can be audible (see par. 11.6) or silent (see par. 11.2).
134
System components
Indicators:
• red LED for signals in the phase of configuration and alarm:
- on steady during the configuration/reset phase;
- blinking due to detecting contact opening or attempted break-in of the device;
The red LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again;
therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm.
• blinking green LED for signalling:
- alarm detected with system turned off;
- alarm detected with device not configured;
- alarm detected in the WalkTest phase;
During the WalkTest phase the device detects whether any contacts are open, signalling it to the control panel
and highlighting it with the blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay so that the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system immediately triggering an alarm.
The most common application of this function is to turn on the system from inside the house and, afterwards,
leave by opening the magnetic contact on the entrance door without the system generating any alarm.
If when turning the system on there is a magnetic contact accidentally left open (a window, for instance) in a zone
not excluded from the activation, the intrusion detection alarm system will not be turned on; the contact interface
LED will blink red and the control panel will show the zone to which this contact belongs. To be able to turn the
system on, you will need to close the contact or exclude the zone to which it belongs from activation (see par. 9.2).
If there is an open contact and the system is switched on with an activation delay set on the contacts interface
(for instance to allow the user to get out of the house), at the end of the set time the system will activate and
signal an alarm immediately.
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) On delay: (default 0) the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = instantaneous).
2) Zone: the assignment zone (between 1 and 30) is set from the control panel by selecting the number of the
chosen zone in the corresponding menu. The contacts interface can be configured in zone 31 if there is a need
to enable the panic alarm function.
3) roller shutters threshold: (default 31) the degree of sensitivity of the check on blinds, dedicated solely for the
electromechanical rope contact, can be adjusted by setting a value between 0 and 31 with or without checking
the attempted short circuiting of the wire (sc).
The usefulness of this parameter consists in preventing the activation of false alarms.
The alarm signal is generated only if the number of pulses generated by the contact exceeds the set
threshold.
By setting the value to 0, the alarm signal is instantaneous.
4) Contact threshold: (default 3) this value permits selecting the speed of action in the case of opening the
magnetic contact. By setting the value to 0 or 1 (at 1 it is not as fast), the device checks the resistance of the
line of magnetic contacts and of that of the antitamper continuity wire. In this case it is necessary to use a
twisted pair for each line. If you do not have a cable with twisted pairs or are not interested in checking the line
resistance, the threshold must be set to 2 or 3, depending on the required speed of action (at 3 it is not as fast).
135
System components
Rear view of the contact interface module:
T
M
S
INTE
RFA
CON CCIA
TATT
I
A
C
B
+ US
-
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
C:Common output
A:Input of the continuity wire of the
magnetic contact
S:Input for roller shutters
M:Magnetic contact input
T: Technical alarm input
R1
R2
R3
Dotted resistances: R = 15 kΩ
R2:mandatory resistance if the roller shutter threshold
parameter is between 0 (sc) and 31 (sc)
R1 and R3: mandatory resistances if the value of the
contact threshold parameter is 0 or 1
IMPORTANT!
When making the connection it is necessary to short-circuit the terminal C with the inputs A and M if they are
not used.
Warning: When connecting magnetic contacts, roller shutter contacts and detectors for technical alarms, the
maximum length of the cable must not exceed 10 m and it is not possible to connect more than 2 contacts per
roller shutter on the same interface. If using terminals M or S leave terminal T disconnected.
5) Access signalling: (default NO) used for advanced functions (see par. 11.2).
6) Technical alarm signalling: (default NO) used for advanced functions (see par. 11.2).
7) Sensitivity of the antitamper device: (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the antitamper device
can be set with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the degree
of sensitivity obtained). If using terminal S leave terminal T disconnected and jumper M - A - C.
3.9.2 2-input contact interface
The device is used to connect the burglar alarm system with the normally closed magnetic alarm contacts,
electro-mechanical rope contacts to protect blinds and roller shutters and anti-impact seismic sensors to protect
windows. In addition, if a generic detector (gas detector, etc.) is connected to one of its inputs, it can be used
to generate a technical alarm. The 2-input interface enables independent connection of two contacts or a series
of contacts.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20490.1: 2 Eikon modules
19490.1: 2 Eikon modules
16940.1: 2 Idea modules
14490.1: 2 Plana modules
136
System components
Each input represents a functional unit.
The 2 functional units are configurable on 2 separate groups in both SAI and automation, so it is possible to
differentiate turning on the two contacts by using the partitions appropriately and they can moreover also be
delayed differently.
The 2 functional units can control 2 separate relays configured on the groups associated with the interface.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-32 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 -- +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical antitamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA
- nr. inputs: 2
- Possibility of programming the interface activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the interface for blinds and of the antitamper system
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control panel
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
Legend:
Rear view of the contact
interface module:
IN2
A2
INTE
RFA
CON CCIA
TATT
I
IN1
A1
C
BU
+ S
-
+, - : Connection to BUS
C = common output
A1 = input of the continuity wire
IN1 = input configurable as:
- input for contacts for roller shutters
- input for magnetic contacts
- input for technical alarm
A2 = input of the continuity wire
IN2 = input configurable as:
- input for contacts for roller shutters
- input for magnetic contacts
- input for technical alarm
R: Optional resistor to control the short circuit on the wire
Figure 1: Only input 2 has been connected.
137
System components
Note: The maximum length of the cables for connecting the contacts to the interface must not exceed 30 m.
The contact interface has:
- 2 terminals for connection to the bus.(+ and -)
- a common output terminal (C)
- 2 configurable input terminals for electromechanical rope contacts (S), magnetic contacts (M), technical alarms (T).
- 2 terminals for the tamper continuity wire (A),
Characteristics:
• Detects opening NC magnetic contacts, cutting the line of the magnetic contacts and of the antitamper
continuity wire, the movement of blinds or opening other NC contacts (technical alarm). To detect short circuiting
on the contacts line it is necessary to first connect a resistance of 15 kO in series with the line (see figure on
page 137).
• It is used to activate the panic alarm warning that can be audible (see par. 11.6) or silent (see par. 11.2).
Indicators:
• red LED for signals in the phase of configuration and alarm:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to detecting contact opening or attempted break-in of the device; The red LED keeps on blinking
until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off
the system to cut off the alarm.
- blinking when the device is powered.
• green LED blinking for signalling:
- alarm detected with system turned off;
- alarm detected with device not configured;
- alarm detected in the WalkTest phase;
Both inputs are configured in the following way:
- press the configuration button and the orange LED will blink;
- let 3 s elapse, configuration will commence on input 1 and the red LED will light up;
- whereas if you press the configuration button before 3 s have elapsed, the LED will blink faster and configuration
of input 2 will commence.
During the WalkTest phase the device detects whether any contacts are open, signalling it to the control panel
and highlighting it with the blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay; in this way, the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system immediately triggering an alarm. The most common application of this function is to turn on the system
from inside the house and, afterwards, leave by opening the magnetic contact on the entrance door without the
system generating any alarm.
Example: Delay set to 30 s.
On activating the system there is a time of 30 s to get out and 30 s to get back in (for a total of 60 s); if you go
back in after 60 s have passed and therefore with the system on, you have 30 s to turn off the system before it
signals an alarm.
If when turning the system on there is a magnetic contact accidentally left open (a window, for instance) in a
zone not excluded from the activation, the intrusion detection alarm system will not be turned on; the contact
interface LED will blink red and the control panel will show the zone to which this contact belongs. To be able
to turn the system on, you will need to close the contact or exclude the zone to which it belongs from activation
(see par. 9.2).
If there is an open contact and the system is switched on with an activation delay set on the contacts interface
(for instance to allow the user to get out of the house), at the end of the set time the system will activate and
signal an alarm immediately.
138
System components
Operation of messages to actuators
If the “magnetic contacts” function is enabled on the control panel, when the contact opens the interface will send
an ON message to an actuator, if any, present in the same zone and make it switch over.
If the “technical alarm” function is enabled on the control panel, when the contact associated with the technical
alarm opens the interface will send an ON message to an actuator, if any, present in the same zone and make it
switch over. When the contact is closed again, the OFF message is sent.
The actuation messages are only sent if the Open if ON or Open if on standby settings are active.
IMPORTANT: If the settings of inputs 1 and 2 are different, the actuation messages will be sent only from the
input configured as a technical input. If an input is deselected as a Roller Shutter input it is not possible to send
actuation messages.
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) On delay: (default 0) the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = immediate).
2) Zone: the assignment zone (between 1 and 30) is set from the control panel by selecting the number of the
chosen zone in the corresponding menu. The contacts interface can be configured in zone 31 if there is a need
to enable the panic alarm function.
3) Roller shutters threshold: (default 31) the degree of sensitivity of the check on blinds, dedicated solely for the
electromechanical rope contact, can be adjusted by setting a value between 0 and 31 with or without checking
the attempted short circuiting of the wire (sc).
The usefulness of this parameter consists in preventing the activation of false alarms.
The alarm signal is generated only if the number of pulses generated by the contact exceeds the set threshold.
By setting the value to 0, the alarm signal is instantaneous.
4) Contact threshold: (default 3) this value permits selecting the speed of action in the case of opening the
magnetic contact. By setting the value to 0 or 1 (at 1 it is not as fast), the device checks the resistance of the line
of magnetic contacts and of that of the antitamper continuity wire. In this case it is necessary to use a twisted pair
for each line. If you do not have a cable with twisted pairs or are not interested in checking the line resistance, the
threshold must be set to 2 or 3, depending on the required speed of action (at 3 it is not as fast).
5) Input 1 setting: The input can be configured for electromechanical rope contacts (S) or for magnetic contacts
(M) or for technical alarms (T) or turned off. The default selection is: for magnetic contacts (M).
6) Input 2 setting: The input can be configured for electromechanical rope contacts (S) or magnetic contacts (M)
or technical alarms (T) or turned off. The default selection is: for magnetic contacts (M).
7) Open if ON: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the device must activate an actuator located in
the same zone as the device when an input sees an open contact and the system is on.
8) Open if on standby: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the device must activate an actuator
located in the same zone as the device when an input sees an open contact and the system is off.
Setting the types of contact to assign to the inputs (programmable on the control panel only for the automation
program)
1) Type of contact for the input 1:
When the actuator activation message (ON or OFF) is sent, it is possible to select:
•
normal output
(on contact open off contact closed)
•
reversed output (off contact open on contact closed)
•
toggle on up
(on /off alternately each time the contact is closed)
•
toggle on down (on /off alternately each time the contact is opened)
139
System components
2) Type of contact for the input 2
When the actuator activation message (ON or OFF) is sent, it is possible to select:
•
normal output
(on contact open off contact closed)
•
reversed output
(off contact open on contact closed)
•
toggle on up
(on /off alternately each time the contact is closed)
•
toggle on down
(on /off alternately each time the contact is opened)
Note. The 2-input contact interface can be configured either in a SAI program (intrusion detection alarm system)
or in an Automation program.
If the device must be used in both programs (SAI and Automation) it is necessary for the interface to be configured
first in SAI and then in Automation; the automation group must then be added to the router via the Router
Management menu.
It must be underlined that if an input is selected in SAI as a roller shutter input, it is not possible to send ON or
OFF messages to an actuator that may be in the Automation program.
Interface 20490, 16940, 14490 and interface 20488, 16938, 14488.
The device can completely substitute the contact interfaces 20488 - 16938 - 14488.
If the interface 20490, 16940, 14490 is not recognized by the control panel because this is not contemplated (for
instance, control panels with firmware releases not updated, etc) the control panel will recognize the device as
an interface 20488, 16938, 14488.
Automatically, during the phase of programming, the device will change the configuration of the inputs
“transforming” the 2-input interface 20490,16940, 14490 into an interface 20488, 16938, 14488; also the name
(and therefore the use) of each one of the seven terminals of the 2-input interface will be likewise “transformed”
into those of the conventional contact interface as illustrated in the figure below.
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
C:Common output
A:Input of the continuity wire of the
magnetic contact
I: Input configurable as:
- S: Input for roller shutters
- M: Magnetic contact input
- T: Technical alarm input
R1
R2
R3
R4
R: optional resistors to control the short circuit on
the wire.
Dotted resistances: R = 15 kΩ
R2: mandatory resistance if the roller shutter threshold parameter is
between 0 (sc) and 31 (sc)
R1 and R3: mandatory resistances if the value of the contact
threshold parameter is 0 or 1
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select “Device Reset” and press the button on the device; the red
LED illuminates.
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
140
System components
3.9.3 12 V contact interface
The contact interface is the device used to connect the burglar alarm system with the normally closed magnetic
alarm contacts, electro-mechanical rope contacts to protect blinds and roller shutters and anti-impact seismic
sensors to protect windows. In addition, if a generic detector (gas detector, etc.) is connected to one of its inputs,
it can be used to generate a technical alarm. The 12 V interface allows direct connection with all those types of
sensors that need to be powered.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20491: 2 Eikon modules
16941: 2 Idea modules
14491: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-32 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 -- +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical antitamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA + input of the 12V output if connected
- Output: 12 V dc - 10% (protection against short circuiting) 10 mA.
- Possibility of programming the interface activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the interface for blinds and of the antitamper system
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control panel
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
Rear view of the contact interface module:
IN
A
C
INTE
R
CON FACCIA
TATT
12V- I 12V
O -- UT B
U
+
+ S
-
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
+ -: 12V power supply output
C:Common output
A:Input of the continuity wire of the
magnetic contact
IN: Input configurable as:
- S: Input for roller shutters
- M: Magnetic contact input
- T: Technical alarm input
141
System components
Note: The maximum length of the cables for connecting the contacts to the interface must not exceed 30 m.
The contact interface has:
- 2 terminals for connection to the bus.(+ and -)
- a common output terminal (C)
- 1 configurable input terminal for electromechanical rope contacts (S), magnetic contacts (M), technical alarms (T).
- 1 terminal for the tamper continuity wire (A),
- 2 terminals for the 12 V output for connecting the sensors
Characteristics:
• Detects opening NC magnetic contacts, cutting the line of the magnetic contacts and of the antitamper
continuity wire, the movement of blinds or opening other NC contacts (technical alarm). To detect short circuiting
on the contacts line it is necessary to first connect a resistance of 15 kO in series with the line (see figure above).
• It is used to activate the panic alarm warning that can be audible (see par. 11.6) or silent (see par. 11.2).
Indicators:
• red LED for signals in the phase of configuration and alarm:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to detecting contact opening or attempted break-in of the device; The red LED keeps on blinking
until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off
the system to cut off the alarm.
• green LED blinking for signalling:
- alarm detected with system turned off;
- alarm detected with device not configured;
- alarm detected in the WalkTest phase;
During the WalkTest phase the device detects whether any contacts are open, signalling it to the control panel
and highlighting it with the blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay; in this way, the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system immediately triggering an alarm. The most common application of this function is to turn on the system
from inside the house and, afterwards, leave by opening the magnetic contact on the entrance door without the
system generating any alarm.
142
System components
Example: Delay set to 30 s.
On activating the system there is a time of 30 s to get out and 30 s to get back in (for a total of 60 s); if you go
back in after 60 s have passed and therefore with the system on, you have 30 s to turn off the system before it
signals an alarm.
If when turning the system on there is a magnetic contact accidentally left open (a window, for instance) in a
zone not excluded from the activation, the intrusion detection alarm system will not be turned on; the contact
interface LED will blink red and the control panel will show the zone to which this contact belongs. To be able
to turn the system on, you will need to close the contact or exclude the zone to which it belongs from activation
(see par. 9.2).
If there is an open contact and the system is switched on with an activation delay set on the contacts interface
(for instance to allow the user to get out of the house), at the end of the set time the system will activate and
signal an alarm immediately.
Operation of messages to actuators
If the “magnetic contacts” function is enabled on the control panel, when the contact opens the interface will send
an ON message to an actuator, if any, present in the same zone and make it switch over.
If the “technical alarm” function is enabled on the control panel, when the contact associated with the technical
alarm opens the interface will send an ON message to an actuator, if any, present in the same zone and make it
switch over. When the contact is closed again, the OFF message is sent.
The actuation messages are only sent if the Open if ON or Open if on standby settings are active too.
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) On delay: (default 0) the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s = immediate).
2) Zone: the assignment zone (between 1 and 30) is set from the control panel by selecting the number of the
chosen zone in the corresponding menu. The contacts interface can be configured in zone 31 if there is a need
to enable the panic alarm function.
3) Roller shutters threshold: (default 31) the degree of sensitivity of the check on blinds, dedicated solely for the
electromechanical rope contact, can be adjusted by setting a value between 0 and 31 with or without checking
the attempted short circuiting of the wire (sc).
The usefulness of this parameter consists in preventing the activation of false alarms.
The alarm signal is generated only if the number of pulses generated by the contact exceeds the set threshold.
By setting the value to 0, the alarm signal is instantaneous.
4) Contact threshold: (default 3) this value permits selecting the speed of action in the case of opening the
magnetic contact. By setting the value to 0 or 1 (at 1 it is not as fast), the device checks the resistance of the line
of magnetic contacts and of that of the antitamper continuity wire. In this case it is necessary to use a twisted pair
for each line. If you do not have a cable with twisted pairs or are not interested in checking the line resistance, the
threshold must be set to 2 or 3, depending on the required speed of action (at 3 it is not as fast).
5) Input setting: The input can be configured for electromechanical rope contacts (S) or for magnetic contacts
(M) or for technical alarms (T) or turned off. The default selection is: for magnetic contacts (M).
6) Open if ON: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the device must activate an actuator located in
the same zone as the device when an input sees an open contact and the system is on.
7) Open if on standby: (default OFF). This value permits deciding whether the device must activate an actuator
located in the same zone as the device when an input sees an open contact and the system is off.
143
System components
Setting the types of contact to assign to the input (programmable on the control panel only for the automation
program)
Type of contact for the input:
When the actuator activation message (ON or OFF) is sent, it is possible to select:
•
normal output
(on contact open off contact closed)
•
reversed output
(off contact open on contact closed)
•
toggle on up
(on /off alternately each time the contact is closed)
•
toggle on down
(on /off alternately each time the contact is opened)
Note. The 12 V contact interface can be configured either in a SAI program (intrusion detection alarm system) or
in an Automation program.
If the device must be used in both programs (SAI and Automation) it is necessary for the interface to be configured
first in SAI and then in Automation. The automation group must then be added to the router via the Router
Management menu.
It must be underlined that if an input is selected in SAI, for instance as a roller shutter input, it is not possible to
send ON or OFF messages to an actuator that may be in the Automation program.
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select “Device Reset” and press the button on the device; the red
LED illuminates.
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
3.10 Relay actuator
The actuator is a device that, thanks to the clean contacts of its relay, is able to repeat the signal of various types
of alarm according to the configuration that has been assigned to it. It can be used to activate a telephone dialler,
the repetition of the system status (on, off, alarm, etc.), the control of visual and/or audible signals (in advanced
applications), etc.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20489: 2 Eikon modules
16939: 2 Idea modules
14489: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
144
Idea
Plana
System components
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-32 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: –5 - +45 °C (inside)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with active infrared sensor built in
- Rated relay data: 1 A 30 V d.c./120 Va.c.
- Consumption: 5 mA
- Programming the time interval in which the actuator output stays ON
- Programming the delay time for activating the relay, after the command from the control panel
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the antitamper device
- Programming the relevant zone via the control panel
- Connecting a normally closed external contact (antitamper continuity wire)
- Selecting the relay operating mode (monostable or bistable)
- Can be controlled directly by a presence sensor to control lights
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
The actuator has:
- 2 terminals for the BUS connection
- 2 terminals for an antitamper continuity wire (A and C)
- 3 terminals of the relay: common (0), normally open (1) and normally closed (2)
Indicators
• Switches over the output according to the command received;
• red LED:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to attempted tampering with the device or opening the continuity wire (external tamper).
The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again;
therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm.
• green LED:
- on steady it indicates that the relay contact is in position ON and therefore the contact is closed NO.
Note: It is possible to use the actuator for functions of access control, for example controlling electric locks,
assigning this actuator the same zone in the device from which it must be controlled (in this case the
connector). For greater detail, please see the section on advanced functions (par. 11.3).
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Zone: the assignment zone (between 1 and 30) is set from the control panel by selecting the number of the
chosen zone in the specific menu.
2) Sensitivity of the antitamper device: (default 0 that is disabled) the degree of sensitivity of the antitamper device
can be set with a value between 0 (disabled) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting, the greater the
degree of sensitivity obtained).
145
System components
3) Activation of the tamper (external anti-tamper): (default OFF) it is possible to turn on and off the control on the
external contact (antitamper) directly from the control panel (External tamper ON/OFF).
4) On delay: (default 0) it is possible to select the lag time between receiving the ON command and actual relay
activation. On the control panel you select a time from 0 s to 250 s in steps of 1 s.
5) Off delay: (default 10) it is possible to select the lag time with which the relay is deactivated from the time of
receiving the related ON command (in case of one-position stable operation). On the control panel you select
a time from 0 s to 250 s in steps of 1 s. The set OFF delay must be greater than the activation time.
6) Operation of the relay: it is possible to select the behaviour of the actuator relay by setting it as one-position
stable or two-position stable; the default operation is one-position stable.
In an alarm condition, to activate a phone dialler, this parameter must be in the condition of “one-position stable”.
It is necessary to configure the relay as two-position stable if you want to connect it to the system status
message selected on the control panel in the message management menu.
If a one-position stable actuator is configured in the same zone as a radio frequency device for sending technical
alarms, when there is an alarm signal the relay swill switch over for a time equal to the time set in the actuator
parameters.
Rear view of the relay actuator:
Legend:
+, - : Connection to BUS
1A
1
30 V ATTU
AT
0
ORE
2
A
C
BU
+ S
-
C:Output for normally closed external contact
(for antitamper line)
A:Input for normally closed external contact
(for antitamper line)
0:Common
PHONE DIALLER
Antitamper
Input
NC
1:Contact normally open
2:Contact normally closed
To enable operation of the phone dialler it is necessary to select the type of message to send, following the
instructions on page 172 (Message Management).
N.B.
Connect the normally closed contact of the actuator (terminal 2) with the NC input of the phone dialler so that it
activates in the event of an alarm.
146
System components
Example of technical alarm (gas detector) with connection of the relay actuator to the phone communicator:
BUS FOR TECHNICAL ALARMS
GAS STOP
METANO
VIMAR BURGLAR
ALARM SYSTEM BUS
(e.g. IR detectors)
CONVENTIONAL
SAFETY
SYSTEMS
(e.g. gas detectors)
CONTROL
PANEL
CONTACT
INTERFACE
ACTUATOR
SIREN
ON
CFG
C
L
S SYS
GSM
1
CI
2
6
4
3
PROG
3
7
4
8
5
9
RS232
2
CFG
GSM/CI
1
01941 COMUNICATORE GSM
GSM PHONE DIALLER
147
System components
3.11 Mini detector for surface-mounting
The passive infrared presence detector is able to generate an alarm message when it detects motion of heatemitting bodies in its area of coverage. If it is configured in a By-me system where there is both the automation
and the intrusion detection alarm system, it is able to control a relay, with the intrusion detection alarm system off,
that can be used to switch on a light, activate a bell, etc. (see chap. 9 in the Automation section).
It is supplied in the following version:
01828: with installation on a wall and on corner walls.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-32 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (inside)
- Installation: surface mounting
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with optical antitamper device built in
- Consumption: 15 mA
- Possibility of programming the sensor activation delay
- Possibility of programming the sensitivity of the sensor
- Possibility of programming the relevant zone via the control panel
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- Two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
- Possibility of programming the duration of actuation
Indicators
• detects the motion of warm bodies in its area of coverage by means of the Fresnel lens;
• red LED:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to detecting intrusion or attempted break-in of the device;
The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore
it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm. This characteristic is useful to highlight the path
followed by any intruder.
• green LED blinking:
- detected the presence of a warm body with the system turned off;
- detected the presence of a warm body with the device not configured;
- detected the presence of a warm body in the WalkTest phase;
The area of detection, of the volumetric type, is obtained by using a Fresnel lens divided into 17 beams on 4
planes (Vimar patent).
148
System components
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Activation delay (default 0): the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s (0 s =
instantaneous);
2) Zone: the assignment zone (between 1 and 30) is set from the control panel by selecting the number of the
chosen zone in the specific menu;
3) PIR pulse threshold (default 3): when the detector detects a warm body in its area of coverage it generates a
sequence of pulses.
They are considered good only if they have a longer duration than the threshold set by the user (see point 4).
For the detector to generate an alarm the number of pulses set by the user (threshold setting) must be
exceeded; the greater the setting the greater the tolerance with which the device will signal an alarm condition.
The setting range is between 1 and 10.
4) PIR time threshold (default 0.4): permits selecting the minimum duration of the pulse beyond which an alarm
message is generated in line with the number of pulses selected in point 3.
The setting range is between 0,1 s and 8 s in steps of 0.1 s.
5) Brightness threshold (default 100%): the degree of brightness is read by a photoresistor and expressed as a
percentage with values ranging from 1 (light) to 0 (dark) in steps of 100%.
This parameter is optional and can be used in case of advanced functions (e.g. in an automation group).
6) Duration of actuation (default value 30 s): used, with the system OFF, to repeat the command message for the
associated actuator. In practice, after commanding the actuator, the detector checks whether there are any
additional movements for a period of time equal to the duration of actuation and, if this has occurred, at the end
of this time a new message will be sent to the actuator irrespective of the brightness setting.
Area of coverage of the infrared detector lens
A
1,2
B
C
D
0
m 0
1,5
8
A = 3 beams +6
B = 3 beams +0
C = 3 beams -20
D = 3 beams -30
A
C
B
C
10
Rated capacity
B
A
C
B
C
B
A
B
C
B
Volumetric cover
8m
D
1,5 m
D
D
112
• Explored solid angle:
- 112 horizontal
- 36 vertical
- 17 sectors on 4 planes
• Capacity: 10 m max (8 m typical)
149
System components
Note: The device can be configured in an SAI application or in an Automation application.
If the detector is used both in an Automation application and in an SAI application, the device must always be
configured first in the intrusion detection alarm system and then in the automation system; having done this the
Automations group must be added to the Router via the Router Management menu.
Installation
For the dual technology presence detector to work properly you need to follow these installation rules:
- no not place any objects in front of the infrared sensor (plants, curtains, furniture, etc.);
- do not expose it to direct light from lamps or sunlight;
- do not subject it to the direct action of sources of heat;
- do not place it in the direction of sources of heat.
NO
NO
NO
NO
Note: For the installation details, see the instructions sheet provided with the detector 01828.
During the WalkTest phase the infrared detect detects a presence, signals the event to the control panel and
shows it to the user via a blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay so that the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system signalling an alarm.
The most common application of this function is to turn on the system from inside the house and, afterwards,
leave by passing in front of one or more sensors without the system generating an alarm.
Example: Delay set to 30 s.
On activating the system there is a time of 30 s to get out and 30 s to get back in (for a total of 60 s); if you go
back in after 60 s have passed and therefore with the system on, you have 30 s to turn off the system before it
signals an alarm.
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select “Device Reset” and press the button on the device; the red LED
illuminates.
Hold down the device's button until the LED goes out (approximately 8 sec.); this operation:
- deletes the groups;
- sets the default parameters;
- changes the physical address of the device (in this phase the LED blinks green/red).
150
System components
3.12 Dual technology surface-mounting detector
The dual technology sensor integrates a microwave sensor and an infrared sensor. It is able to signal people or
animals passing through its area of coverage. The dual technology enables making the sensor insensitive to the
most common causes of false alarms.
The sensor functions in "AND" mode; that is, when either sensor detects motion in the area of coverage it remains
on pre-alarm for 15 seconds awaiting confirmation from the other sensor. Once this condition occurs the device
sends the signal to the control panel.
It is supplied in the following version:
01829.1: with surface mounting
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-30 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP40
- Operating temperature: +5 - +40 °C
- Installation: surface (with adjustable support supplied)
- Type of protection: against opening with mechanical switch
- Operating: in “AND” mode
- Capacity: 10 m (adjustable for both sensors from 3 to 10 m with trimmer)
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
Indicators
• Detecting the motion of warm bodies in the area of coverage by means of an infrared sensor.
When the system is on, the device detects moving bodies with a microwave sensor too; if the microwave and
infrared sensors detect movement at the same time there is an alarm signal (AND function).
151
System components
• red LED:
- on steady during the phase of configuration and reset;
- blinking due to intrusion alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device; The LED keeps on blinking until the
alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is
turned on again. Therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm.
- blinking when the device is powered.
• green LED blinking:
- detected the presence of a warm body with the intrusion detection system turned off;
- detected the presence of a warm body with the device not configured;
- detected the presence of a warm body in the WalkTest phase.
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Activation delay (default 0): the delay time can be set between 0 s and 62 s in steps of 1 s
(0 s = instantaneous);
2) Zone: the assignment zone (between 1 and 30) is set from the control panel by selecting the number of the
chosen zone in the specific menu;
3) PIR pulse threshold (default 3): when the detector detects a warm body in its area of coverage it generates a
sequence of pulses.
They are considered good only if they have a longer duration than the threshold set by the user (see point 4).
For the detector to generate an alarm the number of pulses set by the user (threshold setting) must be
exceeded; the greater the setting the greater the tolerance with which the device will signal an alarm condition.
The setting range is between 1 and 10.
4) PIR time threshold (default 0.4): permits selecting the minimum duration of the pulse beyond which an alarm
message is generated in line with the number of pulses selected in point 3.
The setting range is between 0.1 and 8 in steps of 0.1 s.
5) Sensitivity of the antitamper device (default 0 that is disabled): the degree of sensitivity of the antitamper device
can be set between 0 (off) and 15 (from 1 to 15, the greater the setting the greater the degree of sensitivity
obtained).
6) Brightness threshold (default 100%): the degree of brightness is read by a photoresistor and expressed as a
percentage with values ranging from 0% (light) to 100% (dark) in steps of 1%.
This parameter is optional and can be used in case of advanced functions (e.g. in an automation group); a
typical application is to use the detector to control a relay that switches on a light; in this case, to have the
control in a bright room too, it is necessary to set a low threshold value.
7) Duration of actuation (default 30): if within the set time, in the range between 10 and 250 s, the device
detects a greater number of pulses than the threshold set in point 3, with the system off, a message is sent to
the actuator.
Note: The device can be configured in an SAI application or in an Automation application.
If the detector is used both in an Automation application and in an SAI application, the device must always be
configured first in the intrusion detection alarm system and then in the automation system; having done this the
Automations group must be added to the Router via the specific menu Router Management.
During the WalkTest phase the infrared detect detects a presence, signals the event to the control panel and
shows it to the user via a blinking green LED.
The device permits selecting the activation delay so that the user can enter and/or leave a room without the
system signalling an alarm.
152
System components
3.13 Transponder reader
The transponder reader is the device that turns the system on and off (completely or partially) after recognising
the code emitted by the transponder keys.
Operation is identical to that of the connector with the additional characteristic, after recognising the key, of
signalling system on and off not only visually but also with a buzzer inside the device. Two different sounds signal
turning the system on and off respectively. It can also be integrated with the access control system.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20470: 2 Eikon modules
16470: 2 Idea modules
14470: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS (20-32V d.c.)
Protection class: IP30
Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (inside)
Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
Type of protection: against opening and removal with passive infrared sensor built in
Consumption: 20 mA
Configuration button
Indicator LED
It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –).
The reader is governed, for turning the system on and off, by a transponder key with over 1000 billion possible
combinations
Maximum number of keys that can be managed for the function of burglar alarm system: 24 SAI + 4 SPECIAL
SAI.
153
System components
Operation
• The device reads the code of the transponder key to make the first acquisition (add keys) and in normal
operation it turns the system on and off sending the code to the control panel.
• In the configuration phase it sends the code read to the control panel if the control panel has the “Register new
key” option active and if this code is already in the device
NOTE: The configuration phase is divided into two parts:
• in the first part the device is configured irrespective of its positioning (Configuration CA); to do this, keep to the
instructions given in the Access Control system manual.
• in the second part (Configuration SAI) the device is configured in the burglar alarm system and its operating
mode is decided (ref. Add keys - “Access Contr. Key” and “Special Access Contr. Key).
Important:
The “access control” and “Special access control” keys can be added to the intrusion detection alarm system
only if the keys that are associated with the transponder reader were previously configured in it according to the
procedures stated in the Access Control system manual.
Note: The MASTER key used to unlock the reader (see the manual of the Access Control system) does not work
in the intrusion detection alarm system; this must be kept for adding any more keys to the reader.
Indicators:
• red LED on steady:
- during Configuration SAI;
• red LED blinking:
- due to system in alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device. The LED keeps on blinking until the
alarm that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off the
system to cut off the alarm.
- when the key code has not been acknowledged. The blinking ends after a few seconds.
• green LED blinking:
- the key code has been acknowledged;
- the system is turned on in partitioned mode;
• green LED on steady:
- the system is turned on totally;
• red/green two-colour LED blinking:
- indicates that an alarm condition has occurred that is no longer in progress (alarm memory);
For a description of the behaviour of the LEDs during the phase of Configuration CA, refer to the Access
Control System manual.
154
System components
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Zone: the assignment zone from 1 to 30, set from the control panel by selecting the number of the chosen
zone in the specific menu;
2) Sensitivity of the antitamper device: (default 0 that is disabled). Value that adjusts the sensitivity of the optical
antitamper in the transponder reader. Adjustment range from 0 (disabled) to 15 (maximum sensitivity);
3) Buzzer (default ON). Value that permits setting an audible warning when, after the reader has recognised the
code of a key that has been brought near, the system is turned on or off.
4) Open if On (default OFF). Value that permits activating an actuator located in the zone of the transponder reader
when the key is brought near to the transponder reader and the system is off.
5) Open if on standby (default OFF). Value that permits activating an actuator located in the zone of the
transponder reader when the key is brought near to the transponder reader and the system is off.
IMPORTANT:
• When using the “Special Key” for switching on the intrusion detection alarm system, it is first of all necessary
to press the reader configuration button and then pass the key over it.
• Whereas, to switch off the system it is sufficient to pass the key over the reader.
• If using a “SAI Key” or an “Access Control Key CA”, for both switching on and switching off the system it is not
necessary to press the reader configuration button, but only pass the key over it.
• Any “SAI Keys” already configured with a connector (Eikon 20482, Idea 16932 and Plana 14482) will
automatically be associated with all the transponder readers that may have been added to the system at a later
time (it will therefore not be necessary to have to follow the “Register Acces Control Key CA” procedure).
155
System components
3.14 Smart card reader
The smart card reader is the device that turns the system on and off (completely or partially) after recognising the
code on a smart-card. Operation is identical to that of the connector with the additional possibility of interacting
with the access control system.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20471: 3 Eikon modules
16471: 3 Idea modules
14471: 3 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS (20-32V d.c.)
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: –5 - +45 °C (inside)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with passive infrared sensor built in
- Consumption: 20 mA
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –)
- The reader is governed, for turning the system on and off, by a smart card with over 4 billion possible
combinations
- No limit on the number of stored cards
156
System components
Operation
• The device reads the code of the smart card inserted to make the first acquisition (add keys) and in normal
operation it turns the system on and off sending the code to the control panel.
• In the configuration phase it sends the code read to the control panel if the control panel has the “Register New
Key/Key... CA” option active and if this code is already in the device
NOTE that the configuration phase is divided into two parts
• in the first part the device is configured irrespective of its positioning (Configuration CA)
• in the second part (Configuration SAI) the device is configured in the burglar alarm system and its operating
mode is decided (ref. Add keys - “Access Contr. Keys” and “Special Access Contr. Keys”).
Warning: The MASTER card, which must be used according to the directions of the instructions manual of the
Access Control system, does not work in the intrusion detection alarm system; it must be kept for any
future additions of SLAVE cards to the reader.
Indicators:
• red LED on steady:
- during SAI configuration and reset;
• red LED blinking:
-system in alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device. The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that
generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to
cut off the alarm.
-when the smart-card code has not been acknowledged. The blinking ends after a few seconds.
• green LED blinking:
- the smart-card code has been acknowledged;
- the system is turned on in partitioned mode;
• green LED on steady:
- the system is turned on totally;
• red/green two-colour LED blinking:
- indicates that an alarm condition has occurred that is no longer in progress (alarm memory);
For a description of the behaviour of the LEDs during the phase of Configuration CA, refer to the Access
Control System manual.
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Zone: the assignment zone from 1 to 30, set from the control panel by selecting the number of the chosen
zone in the specific menu;
2) Sensitivity of the antitamper device: (default 0 that is disabled). Value that adjusts the sensitivity of the optical
antitamper in the transponder smart card reader. Adjustment range from 0 (disabled) to 15 (maximum
sensitivity);
3) Open if On (default OFF). Value that permits activating an actuator located in the zone of the smart card reader
when the smart card is inserted in the smart card reader and the system is on;
4) Open if on standby (default OFF). Value that permits activating an actuator located in the zone of the smart card
reader when the smart card is inserted in the smart card reader and the system is off.
157
System components
3.15 Radio interface
The radio interface allows using the radio frequency devices to extend coverage in places or accesses where it is
not possible to add any cables and devices via BUS.
In addition it permits using one or more radio controls as a key to switch the system on/off.
The device turns the system on and off (completely or the associated partitioned zones) after receiving the code
emitted by the remote controls.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20493: 2 Eikon modules
16943: 2 Idea modules
14493: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
-Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-30 V d.c.
-Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
-Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
-Type of protection: against opening and removal with passive infrared sensor built in
-Consumption: 20 mA
- Frequency of reception and transmission: dual at 433 MHz and 868 MHz
-Configuration button
-Indicator LED
- It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and -).
-The receiver is governed, for turning the system on and off and partitioning it, by one or more remote controls
with over 65,000 possible combinations.
-Maximum number of radiofrequency devices that can be stored: 40 for each radio interface
-Maximum number of radio interface that can be installed in a system: 4.
158
System components
List of Radio frequency devices that can be used
VIMAR code
DESCRIPTION / COMPOSITION
01819
Two-way remote control
01737
Passive infrared intrusion detector, battery power supply (supplied).
01738
Magnetic contact for doors and windows, battery power supply (supplied).
01744
Water detector for protection against flooding, battery power supply (supplied).
01747
Siren for outdoor use, battery power supply (supplied)
00912
9 V 12 Ah alkaline battery for siren for outdoor use
N.B.: The detectors 01737 and 01738 are equipped with an input terminal on which an NC or a roller-shutter
contact can be connected; to enable it, use the dip switches on the device card (see the manual for the radio
interface 20493-16943-14493).
Operation
The device receives the transmissions of the radio wave signals emitted by the radiofrequency devices and by
the remote control.
• Regular operation: it receives the information from the radiofrequency devices (tamper alarm, burglar alarm,
technical alarm, low battery). It receives the codes from the remote controls and sends them to the control
panel; in addition it receives information from the control panel on the system status and sends it to the siren
and remote controls.
• Configuration: in the phase of adding radio frequency devices it saves the characteristics of the component
that has responded and communicates some information to the control panel. This procedure is described on
page 164.
• Supervision: this function checks the configured Radio Frequency devices work properly; If a device does not
signal its presence for a time of 4 h, the interface sends a “no device” message to the control panel. To obtain
this function the “Supervision” parameter must be active.
Note: If the intrusion detection alarm system is turned on and a contact has accidentally been left open (a window
for instance), the system will not turn on and the control panel will display the alarm message and the zone to
which the contact left open belongs. If you repeat the process for turning it on, the system will activate itself
as normal even with the contact open.
159
System components
Indicators:
• red LED on steady:
- during configuration and reset;
• red LED blinking:
- due to system in alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device. The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm
that generated it is deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off the system
to cut off the alarm.
• green LED blinking:
- the system is turned on in partitioned mode;
• green LED on steady:
- the system is turned on not partitioned;
• red/green two-colour LED blinking:
- it blinks for a few seconds after the phase of resetting the device.
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Zone: the assignment zone from 1 to 30, set from the control panel by selecting the number of the chosen
zone in the specific menu; the interface can be configured in zone 31 when you need the “PANIC” button of
the remote control 01819 to activate the panic alarm.
2) Sensitivity of the antitamper device: (default 0 that is disabled). Value that adjusts the sensitivity of the optical
antitamper in the radio interface. Adjustment range from 0 (disabled) to 15 (maximum sensitivity);
3) Supervised (default OFF). Supervision of the Radio Frequency detectors on (ON) or off (OFF);
4) zone activation delay from 1 to 10: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s;
5) zone activation delay from 10 to 20: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s;
6) zone activation delay from 20 to 30: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
Note : If a radio frequency detector for alarms of a technical type (water detector) is configured in the same zone
as a relay actuator (one-position stable), this will switch over when the detector signals the alarm.
160
System components
• Remote control (art. 01819)
The remote control has 4 keys to transmit 4 different commands to the radio interface; The latter sends these
commands to the control panel. Command transmission is indicated by the orange LED of the remote control
lighting up.
Control transmission and confirmation LED
OFF button
PANIC button
ON 1 button
ON 2 button
Operation
Pressing the 4 keys on the remote control provides 4 different functions
• OFF button 1: Turning the system off (according to the partitions associated with the remote control code - see
the "Partitions/Associate Part." menu. - RF remote controls”).
• ON 1 button 2: Turning the system on (according to the partitions associated with the remote control code - see
the "Partitions/Associate Part." menu. - RF remote controls”).
• PANIC button 3: used to manage the panic signal.
• ON 2 button 4: Switches the system on (according to the partitions associated with one of the users in the
control panel - see the "Partitions/Associate Part." menu. - RF remote controls/Users”).
• Control transmission and confirmation LED: signals transmission of the code and displays system on/off for
approximately one second after sending the code.
LED indicators:
• blinking orange: code transmission
• green: system off or interface in off zone
• red: system on or interface in active zone
The remote control has the function of a connector; in addition, for button 3 it is possible to select:
PANIC BUTTON function with audible warning: the radio interface must be configured in zone 31. In this way, on
pressing the PANIC button the siren is activated.
PANIC BUTTON function without audible warning but with message: the radio interface and an actuator must be
configured in the same zone from 1 to 30. The actuator must be connected to a channel of the dialler. In this way,
on pressing the PANIC button the message is sent.
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: the radio interface and an actuator must be configured in the same zone from 1 to
30. In this way, on pressing the PANIC button the state of the actuator is switched over (one-position stable actuator).
To silence the sirens turn the system on and off with the remote control by pressing the ON (1 and 2) and OFF
buttons in sequence, or on the control panel with “Alarm Reset”
The various functions are mutually exclusive.
161
Powering up the system
4. Powering up the system
• Connect the power supply to the 230 V~ mains and check that the bus cables have the following connections
with Vimar cable 01840 (2x0.50 mm2, rated working voltage 300/500 V) or certified KNX:
- red cable (+)
- black cable (–)
N.B. The bus is polarized so it is recommended to check its polarization before connecting all the devices.
• Power up the system by connecting the electric mains;
• Connect the batteries of the sirens paying attention to the polarities;
Under these conditions the system is idle:
- there is no communication on the bus;
- the control panel is on stand-by.
• Check that on the connecting terminals of all the devices connected to the system there is the supply voltage
(min. 27 V d.c. - max 30 V).
N.B.: If there is no mains voltage, on the connecting terminals of all the devices connected to the system there
must be a voltage of 24 V d.c. (for at least 24 h), supplied by the buffer batteries.
Note:
• The maximum distance for connections between the power supply 01801 and the back-up unit 01804 or 01807
is equal to 1 m.
• The maximum distance for connections between the back-up unit 01804 or 01807 and the auxiliary battery holder
unit 01803 is equal to 1 m.
162
Group/zone definition
5. Group/zone definition
To configure the system it is firstly necessary to create the groups/zones dedicated to the intrusion detection alarm
system; the procedure to follow is similar to the one for creating groups for home automation (Automation, Load
control, Climate control, etc.).
See also the Automation section on page 22.
n Intrusion detection alarm system group/zone definition.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Control  alarm system  New Group
Enter the zone name according to the 4 suggested fields and the preset names.
You are then prompted to save the name of the group, confirm with YES.
n Remove group/zone.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group control  alarm system  Remove.
Delete all information associated with the selected Group?  YES
The control panel confirms removal and goes back to displaying the list of groups.
n Change group/zone name.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group control  alarm system  Change
Proceed to save the Group Name?  YES
It is now possible with the same procedure to rename another group.
n Add SAI device to group/zone.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group control  alarm system  Select group  Add device
Select the desired group by scrolling through the list of groups and select “Add device”.
Press the configuration button of the SAI Bus device to be inserted in the selected group for approximately 1
s; the device's red LED lights up. Completion of this operation is confirmed by a message on the control unit
and by the red Led going out on the device.
If the control panel signals that there is already a device with the same address, this device must be reset and
reconfigured (so that it changes address).
NOTE. In the phase of configuration, it is recommended to proceed by configuring first always the siren 01806
since it is the only device in the system whose address cannot be changed.
n Add RF device to group/zone.
Menu  Setup
Select Group
Select group/zone where the RF SAI interface has been inserted.
Scroll through the list of devices to the RF SAI interface, select it and enter device parameters.
Scroll through the list of parameters to RF Devices (at most 40 for each interface) and select View.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group control  alarm system
Interface  Parameters  View RF Devices  Add device
Scroll through the list of groups/zones and select the desired group.
 Configuration  Group Management  Intrusion detection alarm system 
 Select group  Select RF
163
Group/zone definition
6. Configuration
The menu permits configuring the system, setting its management and performing the fault-diagnosis operations.
NOTE. To configure a system, it is possible to create up to 30 separate zones and associate a number of devices
in each one of them. “Zone 31” is reserved to the sirens, the back-up units and possibly the contact interfaces
or RF interfaces that are used for advanced applications (see chap.11 of this manual).
In a room, for instance, to manage the partitions in the best way, the perimeter detectors can be configured in one
zone and the infrared detectors in another.
n Add Group/Zone
The groups/zones to which the SAI devices must be associated are created with the Control Panel Setup
menu.
These zones can then be activated simultaneously or partially and will be managed from the Setup SAI menu
of the control panel.
Main menu  Setup Control Panel
alarm system  New Group
Select the name of the zone.
There are 30 groups/zones available plus zone 31 reserved solely for the Backup unit, the siren for outdoor
use and the devices that can be configured for the panic alarm.
n Rename Group/Zone
The menu enables renaming the groups/zones of the system.
Main menu  Setup Control Panel  Configuration
alarm system  Select group/zone  Rename
n Remove group/zone
The menu enables removing the groups/zones of the system.
Main menu  Setup Control Panel  Configuration
alarm system  Select group/zone  Change
164
 Configuration  Group Management  Intrusion detection
 Group Management  Intrusion detection
 Group Management  Intrusion detection
Configuration
n Add bus devices.
Main menu  Setup Control Panel  Configuration
alarm system  Select group/zone  Add Device
Select the group/zone where the device is to be inserted according to the installation topology to be made.
Scroll through the list of created groups/zones and select the desired group.
Add the device to this group by pressing the configuration button for 1 s when the control panel asks you to.
SAI radio interfaces can be inserted in any group/zone; The device is acknowledged and integrated in the
group/zone.
By scrolling through the list of devices it is then possible to change the parameters; the SAI control panel
manages up to 60 bus devices, among which 4 RF radio interfaces (Eikon 20493, Idea 16943, Plana 14493).
 Group Management  Intrusion detection
n Add RF devices.
Main menu  Control Panel Setup  Configuration  Group Management  Intrusion detection
alarm system  Select group/zone  Select SAI Radio Interface  Parameters  Display RF devices
Select the group/zone containing the SAI radio interface device. Select parameters and scroll through the list
of parameters. It is possible to change the parameters and view the RF devices.
Select Add RF devices; you are asked for the name of the group/zone where the RF device is to be inserted.
Select the group/zone from the ones previously created; insert the battery in the RF device to be associated
with the chosen group/zone and follow the instructions given in the “OPERATIONS TO CARRY OUT” column
of the table below.
Each SAI radio interface enables configuring up to 40 RF devices; on the control panel, each of the RF devices configured in a radio interface is marked by a number (shown on the right) that indicates its area of origin.
Code
01819
01737
01738
DESCRIPTION
OPERATIONS TO CARRY OUT
Two-way remote control
Press the OFF and ON 1 buttons together; the control
panel signals successful saving.
Passive infrared intrusion detector.
Insert the battery in the detector; the red LED briefly
lights up and the control panel signals successful
saving. To configure the external N/C contact it is
necessary to move dip-switch 2 onto ON.
Magnetic contact for doors and windows.
Insert the battery in the contact; the red LED briefly
lights up and the control panel signals successful
saving. To configure the external N/C contact it is
necessary to move dip-switch 2 onto ON.
165
Configuration
Code
DESCRIPTION
OPERATIONS TO CARRY OUT
01744
Water detector for protection against
flooding
Insert the battery in the detector; the red LED briefly
lights up and the control panel signals successful
saving.
01747
Siren for outdoor use
Insert battery 00912 in the siren; the control panel
signals successful saving. Then turn on the system;
the siren confirms with 6 beeps.
n Remove bus devices
It is possible to remove the bus devices directly from the following menu:
Main menu  Setup Control Panel  Configuration  Group Management
alarm system  Select group/zone  Remove Device
 Intrusion detection
n Reset bus devices
• As regards the passive infrared presence detectors (Eikon 20485 or 20486, Idea 16935 and Plana 14485) the
contact interface (Eikon 20490.1 or 20491, Arké 19490.1 or 19491, Idea 16940.1 or 16941 and Plana 14490.1),
digital keypads (Eikon 20483, Idea 16933 and Plana 14483), mini surface-mounting detectors 01828, sirens for
indoor use (Eikon 20495, Idea 16945 and Plana 14495), radio interfaces (Eikon 20493, Idea 16943 and Plana
14493), the procedure, that we will indicate with A, is similar to that of the automation devices, namely:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Reset Management  Device Reset
Press the device configuration button and release it only after the red LED has gone out.
• For all the other SAI devices, the procedure, which we will indicate with B, is as follows:
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Reset Management  Device Reset
Press and release the device configuration button and press Back on the control panel; lastly, press
the device button again and release it only after the red LED has gone out.
Device
Reset
type
Infrared detector
(art. 20485, 16935,14485)
A
Adjustable infrared detector
(art. 20486)
A
Notes
Dual technology recess-mounting IR detector
(art. 20487, 16937,14487)
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
Digital keypad
(art. 20483, 16933,14483)
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
Backup unit (art. 01804..)
B
Backup unit for EN 50022 rail
(art. 01807)
A
166
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
Configuration
Device
Reset
type
Notes
Siren for outdoor use (art. 01806)
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
Siren for indoor use
(art. 20495, 16945, 14495)
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
contact interface
(art. 20488, 16938, 14488)
B
2-input contact interface
(art. 20490.1, 19490.1, 16940.1, 14490.1)
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
Contact interface 12 V
(art. 20491, 16941, 14491)
A
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
Relay actuator
(art. 20489, 16939, 14489)
B
Mini infrared detector for surface-mounting
(art. 01828)
A
Dual technology surface-mounting detector
(art. 01829)
B
Transponder reader
(art. 20470, 16470, 14470)
B
Smart card reader
(art. 20471, 16471, 14471)
B
Radio interface
(art. 20493, 16943, 14493)
A
Connector
(art. 20482, 16932, 14482)
B
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
The setup LED blinks red/green for a few seconds after reset
n Deleting RF devices
It is possible to remove the RF devices directly from the following menu:
Main menu  Control Panel Setup  Configuration  Group Management  Intrusion detection
alarm system  Select group/zone  Select SAI Radio Interface  Parameters  Display RF devices  Select RF device  Remove
The RF radio interface is reset according to the device reset procedure that will delete its address and all the
radio frequency devices stored in it.
n
Parameters.
With this menu you can change the parameters of all the configured bus devices in the system.
Main menu  Control Panel Setup  Configuration  Group Management
alarm system  Select group/zone  Select Device  Parameters
 Intrusion detection
167
S.A.I. Setup
7. S.A.I. Setup
7.1. Partitions.
This menu is fundamental as it permits creating groups of zones in the system (partitions) that can be turned on/
off and allows adding/removing zones to/from these partitions.
In the phase of configuring the partitions, it is important to bear in mind that each zone can be added to one and
only one partition; on the contrary, the control panel will display the following error message:
“Unable to continue. Partitioning not complete“. In addition, error messages will be displayed if there are any
empty partitions (that is without any associated zones) or empty zones (that is without any devices) associated
with the partition.
The By-me intrusion detection alarm system, in both the phases of turning on and off, enables creating different
partitions of the system, differentiating them for each user; this is by using either SAI Keys or Special SAI Keys.
The SAI Keys function with each connector of the system (each one of which can have a different partition) while
the Special Keys only function on the connectors that, via the control panel, have been associated (it will then be
with the control panel, by associating the connectors, that you choose which partitions these will turn on/off).
Using the remote control 01819 it is possible to partition the system with the "ON 1" button or the "ON 2" button
(that will be associated with a user); for “ON1” simply set the partition for the code of the RF remote control.
The different partitions, lastly, can be associated with the PINs of the numerical keypad 20483-16993-14483; each
set code corresponds to a specific list of partitions that allows easily turning the system on/off totally or partially.
The operations to carry out are, in sequence:
1. Configure connectors, digital keypads, detectors and all the other burglar alarm devices.
2. Add the various SAI Keys, SPECIAL Keys, set the PIN codes of the keypad, etc.
3. Create the various partitions associating the respective zones.
4. Associate the various partitions with the connectors, SPECIAL Keys, PIN codes of the keypads, RF remote controls
to the control panel, etc.
n Partition management
Main menu
partitions
 Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  Partitions  Manage
The menu permits creating up to 9 partitions; in addition it is possible to name and delete the partitions and
associate the zones to these partitions. After selecting a partition, you turn on (via "Add Group") a zone from
among the ones not yet associated with any partition; having done this it is necessary to press the Save button
to save the new configuration.
Each zone that is removed from a partition becomes free and can therefore be associated with another
partition; remember that a zone can be assigned to only one of the partitions defined in the phase of
system configuration.
If a zone must be able to be managed, for example, by two users with a different keypad PIN, it is wise to
add this zone on its own to a partition and then associate this to both PINs. n Associating partitions
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  Partitions  Ass, par-
titions
168
This menu permits associating partitions to devices such as connectors, keys, keypads, remote controls in
the intrusion detection alarm system.
S.A.I. Setup
1) Associate partitions with SAI control panel
This is used, by the users recognized by the system, to associate the corresponding partitions to be turned on or off:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  Partitions  Ass. partitions
 Control Panel  Select user
It is now possible to select the partitions associated with the selected user by adding the character P on
the corresponding item. If it is marked "Totally ON" the user can turn on the entire system, while if some
partitions are marked the user only turns on the zones belonging to the indicated partitions. If it is marked "Totally OFF", the user can turn off the entire system, while if this item is not selected the user can turn off
only the zones belonging to the partitions marked with a P. The user configuration “Ut. Prog.Even" permits
turning on the system by an events programme according to an assigned profile.
2) Associating partitions with a connector
With this menu it is possible to associate the connectors with the corresponding partitions to turn on or off:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  Partitions  Ass. partitions
 Connector  Select the connector
It is now possible to select the partitions associated with the selected connector by associating the character
P on the corresponding item. If it is marked "Totally ON" the connector can turn on the entire system, while
if some partitions are marked the connector only turns on the zones belonging to the indicated partitions. If
it is marked "Totally OFF", the connector can turn off the entire system, while if this item is not selected the
connector can turn off only the zones belonging to the partitions marked with a P.
3) Associating partitions with interfaces
This menu is used to associate a user with the interface:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  Partitions  Ass. partitions
 Interfaces
On selecting the desired communicator interface or USB interface, the control panel enables associating a user
with it by means of the User button and thus setting the desired profile. Now, with the request to turn on from
the interface, the system will turn on according to the association of the set partitions for that specific user.
4) Associate partitions with SPECIAL keys
With this menu it is possible to associate the special keys with the corresponding partitions to turn on or off:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  Partitions  Ass. partitions
 Special keys  Select the special key
It is now possible to select the partitions associated with the selected special key by adding the character
“Totally ON” the special key turns on the entire system, while
if some partitions are marked the special key only turns on
P on the corresponding item. If it is marked
169
S.A.I. Setup
the zones belonging to the indicated partitions. If it is marked “Totally OFF” the special key can turn off the
entire system, while if this item is not selected the special key turns off only the zones belonging to the partitions marked with a P.
5) Associating partitions with the codes of the digital keypad 20483-16933-14483.
This menu permits associating partitions to the PIN codes of the digital keypads with the corresponding partitions to turn on or off:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  Partitions  Ass. partitions
 Keypad codes
It is now possible to select the partitions associated with the PIN of the selected keypad by adding the character P on the corresponding item. If it is marked “All Partitions” the PIN can turn the system on and off
completely and partially, while if some partitions are marked the PIN only turns on and off the zones belonging
to the indicated partitions. The digital keypad with which changes are made to the system status (on, off,
etc.) emits an audible warning that signals the operation has been performed. For the characteristics and
parameters of the digital keypad, see par. 3.4 on page 113 of this manual.
6) Associating partitions with RF remote controls
This menu allows associating the radio remote control with both the user and the partitions to turn on and off:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  Partitions  Ass. partitions
 RF Remote Controls
On selecting the desired RF remote control with the “Select” button, the control panel permits associating the
partitions with the “ON 1” button. After selecting the partitions press “Save”.
Turning these partitions on/off, and therefore the associated zones, can be differentiated also according to
the user profile associated with that remote control. After selecting the RF remote control from the list with
the  and  buttons, press the “User” button and set the desired profile; now, on pressing the “ON 2”
button of the remote control, the system will turn on according to the association of the set partitions for
that specific user.
N.B.: If there is more than one remote control, to know which one you want to partition you need to identify
it by following the instructions of paragraph 7.2 under the heading “SAI key identification”.
7.2. S.A.I. key management
This menu is used to add, remove and identify the transponder keys and the codes of the keypad
that are necessary for turning the system on/off, as well as monitoring them.
The SAI keys that turn on the zones associated with the connectors are copied onto all the connectors automatically;
these keys can therefore be used on all the connectors present. The SPECIAL SAI keys turn on only the partition
zones associated with the key and only via the connector through which the enabling operation was performed
for that key (therefore they can only be used on that connector).
There can also be “SAI Keys” and “Special SAI Keys” belonging to connectors of the Access Control system (transponder and/or smart card reader); before being configured in the intrusion detection
alarm system (as “Access Control Key” or as “Special Access Control Key”) they must be associated with the
respective device according to the procedures for the Access Control system.
170
S.A.I. Setup
The “Special Keys” can be configured on a number of connectors to each one of which a dedicated partition can be associated for each special key with which it is associated.
The PIN codes of the keypad 20483,16933 and 14483 are managed by the system as if they were SAI keys and
therefore, once configured, they are automatically copied onto all the other keypads in the system.
n Register a new key and digital keypad PIN.
This is used to configure and enable the transponder keys and digital keypads that are to switch the system
on and off according to the desired type.
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  SAI Key Management 
Register New Key
The following modes of configuration are possible:
- SAI key (numbering from 1 to 24)
- Special SAI key (numbering from 25 to 88)
- CA Access Control System key (as SAI key)
- CA Access Control System special key (as SPECIAL SAI key)
- CA Validator special key (as SPECIAL SAI key)
- PIN code of the digital keypad 20483, 16933 and 14483 (numbering from 1 to 30).
1) SAI key and special SAI key
- Bring the key near to one of the connectors; the control panel will save the code. Press Accept to confirm.
- Repeat this operation for all the keys to store in memory.
During this phase all the SAI keys must be enabled with the same connector and the Special SAI keys must
be saved in their connector (that is the one on which they must work).
2) PIN code of the digital keypad 20483-16933-14483
-Enter the 5-digit PIN on the keypad you want to save and press ok on the keypad.
- Check that the control panel display shows the PIN is correct and press “Accept” to confirm.
n Identification of SAI key, PIN code of the digital keypad and RF remote controls.
By bringing the keys near to one of the connectors on which it is saved, it enables identifying the information
on the SAI key (key number, type, etc.). In addition, it enables identifying the codes for the digital keypads
and radio remote controls in the system.
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  SAI Key Management 
Identify Key
Bring the key near the connector that, in its turn, will send the code to the control panel; in the case of the
“special key”, if it is enabled on that connector the control panel will display the information related to that key.
With this procedure all the types of key configured in the system are identified.
To identify the PINs of the keypad it is necessary to enter this PIN in the device and press ok; then press button 0 and lastly confirm again with ok. The control panel will display the keypad number (1, 2, etc. according
to the number of keypads in the system), the name of the device and the PIN code keyed in.
For the RF remote controls, simply press the ON 1 or ON 2 button; the control panel will display the code of
the RF remote control.
171
S.A.I. Setup
n Associate special key with connectors.
After identifying a Special SAI Key it is possible to associate the key with more connectors in other zones:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  SAI Key Management 
Select the Special Key  Assoc  select connectors  ON
It is then possible, after selecting the connector, to turn the key on it on or off. Before completing the operation
it is necessary to save the settings with the Save option.
If all the connectors are deselected for a special key, the key is automatically removed from the system.
Therefore if you want to associate the special key with a new connector, removing it from all the others, it is
first necessary to select the new connector and then deselect the other connectors.
n Removing SAI key and PIN codes of the digital keypads.
After identifying a SAI Key or a Special SAI Key or the PIN of a digital keypad, it is also possible to remove the
Key or the PIN:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  SAI Control Panel Setup  SAI Key Management 
SAI Key identified  Remove
7.3 Message Management
With this menu you can set the zone for sending one or more messages from the ones available in order to assign
a particular function to the devices that are in the same zone; in addition, it is possible to choose the length of
time within which the control panel keeps on sending the set message. Thanks to these options it is possible, for
example, to send a message to a zone where a relay is configured that will switch over when this message arrives.
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  Central unit Setup  Message Management
- The system is able to send the following messages:
• “System status” (on, off)
• “Alarm” (intrusion)
• “Tamper alarm” (tampering)
• “Low battery” (the battery of the back-up unit is running down)
• “No mains” (no voltage on the bus).
N.B.: It is possible to associate the management of a number of messages to the same zone provided that
the actuator configured in it is set as one-position stable.
172
S.A.I. Setup
n The “System Status” message:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel Central unit Setup  Message Management  System
Status  Select
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the “System Status” message
is to be sent; after making the selection it is necessary to save the settings.
If an actuator is configured in the selected zone, it will switch over on turning on the system (whereas if
the actuator is set as two-position stable, it will switch over onto the previous status only by turning off the
system).
n The “Alarm” message:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  Central unit Setup  Message Management  Alarm
 Select
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the alarm message generated
by any system device is to be sent.
In addition it is possible to set the duration (in minutes or seconds) of the signal to send to the chosen
destination; the length of time can be set in the range between 0 s and 20 min or as “Permanent” (the display
will show --:-- in the selection window).
If an actuator is configured in the selected zone, it will switch over when an alarm message arrives (whereas
if the actuator is set as two-position stable, it will switch over automatically at the end of the set time).
n The “Tamper Alarm” message:
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel
Tamper Alarm  Select
 Central unit Setup  Message Management 
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the tamper alarm message
generated by any system device is to be sent. In addition it is possible to set the duration (in minutes or
seconds) of the signal to send to the chosen destination; this value can be set in the range from 0 s to
20 min. (in steps of 10 s) or “Permanent” (the display will show --:-- in the selection window).
If an actuator is configured in the selected zone, it will switch over when an alarm message arrives (whereas
if the actuator is set as two-position stable, it will switch over automatically at the end of the set time).
173
S.A.I. Setup
n The “Low Battery” message:
Main menu  Others
Battery  Select
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the “Low Battery” message
generated by the back-up unit is to be sent if the batteries discharge due to a protracted mains power shortage.
In addition it is possible to set the duration (in minutes or seconds) of the signal to send to the chosen
destination; this value can be set in the range from 0 s to 20 min. (in steps of 10 s) or “Permanent” (the display
will show --:-- in the selection window).
n
 SAI Control Panel Central unit Setup  Message Management  Low
The “No Mains” message:
Main menu  Others
Mains  Select
It is used to select the destination zone or the ID (address) of the group where the “No Mains” message
generated by the back-up unit is to be sent.
In addition it is possible to set the duration (in minutes or seconds) of the signal to send to the chosen
destination; this value can be set in the range from 0 s to 20 min. (in steps of 10 s) or “Permanent” (the display
will show --:-- in the selection window).
7.4 Antitamper
With the control panel it is possible to enable or disable the antitamper device for all the system components or that
of the control panel; the latter manages the optical antitamper device on module 01960.
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  Central unit Setup  Antitamper
The options available are: Control unit tamper sensitivity and Default tamper; then select the desired option and
enter the desired value with the Set button.
 The tamper sensitivity can be set to 0 = disabled or a value from 1 to 15.
 If the Default tamper parameter is set to ON, all the tampers of the devices configured afterwards will be on as
well.
174
 SAI Control Panel  Central unit Setup  Message Management  No
S.A.I. Setup
7.5 Walk test
The Walk test is a useful function that allows checking the area of coverage of the motion sensors, contact
interfaces, etc. (configured in zones from 1 to 30) and generally the operation of the system without the
audible warning of the sirens for outdoor use.
During the Walk test, the system behaves as if it were normally turned on but with these differences:
• the sound of the sirens and indoor audible warnings is blocked;
• the alarm signals from the devices are signalled and shown on the control panel display;
• the entry and exit delays are cancelled that is the sensors configured as delayed behave as if they
were instantaneous;
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  Control Panel Setup  SAI Walk test
• Running the test
- Move in front of the detectors and check that the motion is detected and signalled on the LED of the
detector and on the monitor of the control panel;
- Generate an alarm on the perimeter devices (magnetic contacts) and on those for detecting technical
alarms (gas detectors, etc.), check that the alarm is detected and there is the relevant signal on the LED of
the contact interface and on the monitor of the control panel;
To end the test press STOP; a list of the devices that detected the alarm during the Walk test is displayed;
lastly, press CLOSE.
Note: The Walk test does not involve the radio frequency detectors.
7.6 Events List
By selecting this option you can view the main operations performed by and on the system (for example the
days elapsed since activating the system, alarms occuring, switch ons and offs). The maximum number of
events that can be saved is 80.
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  Central unit Setup  Events list
A list of the registered events is displayed; pressing button Canc.Li deletes the entire list of saved events while
Details displays the properties of the event such as date, time, type of event, device generating the alarm and
the zone, if any, to which a signal has been sent (if set with the Message Management menu).
Press Reset and the red LED of a previously alarmed device will go out.
175
S.A.I. Setup
7.7 List of alarms
By selecting this option you can view the alarms that have occurred and with Details you will display the date
and time of the alarm, the zone and the devices involved, the type of alarm and the zone, if any, to which a
message associated with this type of alarm is sent.
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  Central unit Setup  Alarms List
The alarms list is deleted only by deleting the events list (see par. 7.5 on the previous page).
176
Setting parameters
8. Setting parameters
By scrolling through the list of zones of the intrusion detection alarm system it is possible to select them to display
the configured devices and if necessary refer to and modify the operating parameters.
8.1 Back-up unit
The available parameters are:
- beep NO or YES: to have the beep at the time of turnign the system on and off:
- tamper/cover NO or YES
- type of sound (can be selected to identify a system tamper alarm, cover tamper alarm, intrusion alarm,
watchdog);
- duration of sound: up to 5 min (can be set in steps of 5 s).
8.2 Siren for outdoor use
The available parameters are:
- microswitch: ON or OFF
- alarm in case of low battery: ON or OFF
- horn check: ON or OFF;
- check “Broken filament” of the flasher light bulb: ON or OFF;
- Anti-foam check: ON or OFF;
- Anti-flame check: ON or OFF;
- type of sound (can be selected to identify a system tamper alarm, siren tamper alarm, intrusion alarm,
watchdog);
- duration of sound: up to 5 min (can be set in steps of 5 s).
8.3 IR presence detector
The available parameters are:
- tamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- brightness threshold: a value can be set from 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
- ON delay: 0 s = instantaneous. Can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 1 s;
- Time threshold: Can be increased up to 8 s in steps of 0.1 s;
- pulse threshold: a value can be set from 1 to 10.
- Duration of actuation: a value can be set from 1 to 250 seconds.
8.4 Connector
The available parameters are:
- tamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- Open if ON
- Open if on STAND-BY
8.5 Contact interface
The available parameters are:
- tamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- ON delay: 0 s = instantaneous. Can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 1 s;
- access signalling: NO or YES;
177
Setting parameters
- technical alarm signalling: NO or YES.
- contact threshold: from 0 to 3;
- roller shutters threshold: from 0 to 31 with or without check on short circuit.
8.6 Dual technology surface-mounting detector
The available parameters are:
- antitamper: NO if disabled, YES if enabled
- LED control: YES or NO - pulse threshold: can be set to a value from 1 to 20
- ON delay: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
8.7 Radio frequency interface
The available parameters are:
-tamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity
- activation delay zones from 1 to 10: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
- activation delay zones from 11 to 20: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
- activation delay zones from 21 to 30: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
-supervision: it can be off, on at 4 hours or on at 8 hours.
8.8 Smart card reader
The available parameters are:
-tamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity
- Open if ON
- Open if on STAND-BY
8.9 Transponder reader
The available parameters are:
-tamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity
- Open if ON
- Open if on STAND-BY
- Buzzer on: ON or OFF
8.10 Relay actuator
The available parameters are:
- tamper threshold: 0=tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- Operation: One- or two-position stable;
- external tamper: NO or YES;
- On delay: 0 = instantaneous. Can be increased up to 250 s in steps of 1 s;
- OFF delay: 0 = instantaneous. Can be increased up to 250 s in steps of 1 s.
178
Setting parameters
8.11 Backup unit for EN 50022 rail
The available parameters are:
- enabling external tamper: “ON” or “OFF”.
8.12 Siren for indoor use
The available parameters are:
- antitamper threshold: 0=tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- enabling on/off sounds: “ON” or “OFF”;
- type of sound: see siren for outdoor use;
- duration of sound: see siren for outdoor use.
8.13 Dual technology recess-mounting detector
The available parameters are:
- antitamper threshold: 0=tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- LED disabling: “ON” or “OFF”;
- brightness threshold: a value can be set from 0% to 100% in steps of 1%
- ON delay: 0 s = instantaneous. Can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 12 s;
- PIR time threshold: Can be increased up to 8 s in steps of 0.1 s;
- number of PIR pulses: a value can be set from 1 to 10;
- duration of activation: a value can be set from 1 to 250 seconds.
The available parameters are:
- antitamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- brightness threshold: a value can be set from 0% to 100% in steps of 1%
- ON delay: 0 s = instantaneous. Can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 12 s;
- PIR time threshold: Can be increased up to 8 s in steps of 0.1 s;
- number of PIR pulses: a value can be set from 1 to 10;
- duration of activation: a value can be set from 1 to 250 seconds.
The available parameters are:
- antitamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- enabling buzzer: “ON” or “OFF”;
- “Open if ON”: “ON” or “OFF”;
- “Open if on STAND-BY”: “ON” or “OFF”.
8.14 Mini IR detector for surface-mounting
8.15 Digital keypad
179
Setting parameters
8.16 2-input contact interface
The available parameters are:
- antitamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- contact threshold: from 0 to 3;
- roller shutters threshold: from 0 to 31 with or without check on short circuit.
- activation delay from 10 to 20: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 1 s.
Input 1 operation
The input can be set as:
- input for electro-mechanical rope contacts;
- input for magnetic contacts;
- input for technical alarms;
- deactivated.
Input 2 operation
The input can be set as:
- input for electro-mechanical rope contacts;
- input for magnetic contacts;
- input for technical alarms;
- deactivated.
8.17 12 V contact interface
The available parameters are:
- antitamper threshold: 0 = tamper off; 15 = maximum sensitivity;
- contact threshold: from 0 to 3;
- roller shutters threshold: from 0 to 31 with or without check on short circuit.
- activation delay from 10 to 20: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 62 s in steps of 1 s.
Input operation
The input can be set as:
- input for electro-mechanical rope contacts;
- input for magnetic contacts;
- input for technical alarms;
- deactivated.
180
Using the system
9. Using the system
There follow the main operations to carry out for normal system use.
9.1 Turning On
The system is turned on directly from the control panel, transponder key set in contact with the surface of the
connector in the position shown by the arrow, or by entering the code on the keypad, or with the remote control
01818 or lastly with a smart card and reader.
N.B. If the control panel is in one of the submenus related to the S.A.I. Setup menu, the above operations for
turning on are not carried out.
The system is turned off:
- directly from the control panel with the “SYSTEM OFF” option, first keying in a password (if set beforehand);
- setting the transponder key in contact with the connector (which turns off all the zones and silences any
alarms).
-through trasponder reader;
-through smart card reader;
-through the radio interface (via remote control);
-through the phone dialler;
Turning off the system is signalled on the display of the control panel and the LEDs of the connectors will go
back out if there are no alarms in the system.
In this way all the non-partitioned zones associated with that specific connector are turned on (activated).
The control panel display and the LEDs of the related connectors will be signalled in this way:
- if the connector LEDs are green and on steady the system is completely switched on;
- if the connector LEDs are green and blinking the system is switched on in partitioned mode;
- if the key is not recognised the red LED of the connector blinks;
9.2 Temporary partitioning from control panel
From the “Zone ON/OFF” it is possible to cut off some zones irrespective of the connector, key or remote
control used to turn on the system. Removing the tick P next to the zone in any case partializes this zone.
Main menu  Others  SAI Control Panel  Zone On/Off
After turning the required zones on/off, confirm by pressing Save.
9.3 Partitioning from connector
When the system is turned on with a connector, all the zones associated with it will be turned on while the other
zones will remain partitioned (off).
181
Using the system
9.4 Delayed detectors
All the detectors can be programmed as instantaneous or delayed (see previous chapter) so as to allow the
user to leave a protected room (when turning on the system) or enter it (turning the system off obviously within
the set delay time).
9.5 Alarm management
The possible alarms are:
- intrusion alarm;
- tamper alarm;
- technical alarm;
- panic alarm;
- no mains alarm;
- low battery alarm.
• Intrusion alarm
The intrusion alarms, generated only with the system turned on, cause a high power sound to be emitted by
the outdoor sirens and by the indoor siren in the back-up unit; the intrusion alarm counters are reset every time
the system is then turned on and on that occasion the memory LEDs are turned off.
• Tamper alarm
The alarm is generated with the system turned both on and off and it can be caused by:
- tampering with one or more devices for attempted extraction, cutting wires on contact interface, etc.;
- damaged device;
- cutting the bus.
• Technical alarm
It is generated with the system either on or off, provided that the corresponding input has been enabled. No
audible warning is generated; the control panel saves the alarm and, via the relay actuator, turns on the phone
dialler (where applicable) that calls the set numbers. For this purpose see chap. “Other applications”.
• Panic alarm
It is generated by a device (an ordinary NO or NC button, remote control, etc.) connected to a contact interface
or a radio frequency interface configured in zone 31. No messages are displayed on the control panel and
the alarm signal can be blocked by turning the intrusion detection alarm system on and off or directly on the
control panel by pressing the Stop alarms button. In addition, it is possible to obtain a silent alarm if the contact
interface is configured in another zone where there is also a relay actuator (to turn on the phone dialler for
instance).
• No mains alarm
It is genered in the event of a power failure with the transmission of a message that makes a relay switch over
(to turn on the phone dialler for instance).
• Low battery alarm
It is generated with the transmission of a message that makes a relay switch over if the batteries of the back-up
unit are running down due to extended mains power failure.
182
Summary of indicators
10. Summary of indicators
Problem
Cause
Solution
During the phase of adding a
device “device already present”
appears on the display of the
control panel.
There are 2 devices with the
same address.
The device's red LED in the configuration
phase is on. On the control panel exit the
Add Device menu and enter the Device
Reset procedure; now carry out the
procedure described on page 168.
During an alarm signal the siren
does not emit any sound but
the flasher makes its visual
signal.
The parameter of the siren
sound setting is disabled or
the horn wire is not connected.
From the “Configuration menu - Group
Management - Burglar alarm - Select
group/zone 31 - Select device Parameters”.
After viewing the list of configured
devices, select “Siren”: “OK” to confirm
and select the type of sound (see page
127).
The control panel display shows
the flat battery message.
Battery flat or damaged or fuse
blown.
Check the battery charge, its connection
and the integrity of the fuse on the
electronic card of the back-up unit.
During the phase of configuring
the transponder keys they are
not saved.
The connector is not able to
acquire the codes.
From the “SAI Control Panel - Setup SAI Key Management - Register New
Key” menu, proceed again with saving
the transponder keys according to the
desired type.
Check moreover that the key is positioned
correctly on the connector (the LED of
the device must be blinking green).
After supplying power to the
system the various components
do not switch on.
The twisted pair does not
power the devices (the twisted
pair is not live)
Check the power supply on the input of
the power supply.
Check that the output voltage is 29 V d.c.
If there is no voltage, check that the
circuit wiring is correct, that the twisted
pair is not shorted and check that the
polarities of the devices are respected.
183
Summary of indicators
Problem
Cause
Solution
In the test/configuration phase
one or more devices fails to
turn on.
The twisted pair is broken
or has been damaged during
installation.
Check that the output voltage of the power
supply is greater than 24 V.
If it is lower check the current delivered; if
it exceeds 320 mA check the power input
of the single components starting with the
outdoor siren.
If you find none of the above, check there is
voltage on the relevant devices; if it is less
than 24 V check the connections and/or
that the twisted pair is not damaged in the
relevant section.
If there is no mains supply, the
system will send a message to
the control panel.
The back-up unit is not able to
power the system
Check the power input of the system;
check the state of the battery; check the
fuse of the back-up unit; check the polarity
of the devices is correct.
The system generates the
tamper alarm.
Incorrect setting of
antitamper threshold.
the
Decrease the value of the antitamper
threshold of the devices and check the
cover of the back-up unit and of the
outdoor siren is closed properly.
Attempting to turn on the
system will display this
message: “Unable to continue.
Partitioning not complete”.
At least one zone is not
associated with any partition.
Partitioning via the “Device Management”
menu.
Attempting to turn on the
system will display this
message: “Unable to continue.
At least one system partition
is empty”.
At least one zone has been
created, but there are no
devices inside it.
Delete all the empty zones.
184
Other applications
185
Other applications
The purpose of this chapter is to illustrate the applications related to the other functions that can be performed by
the intrusion detection alarm system.
The following pages, step by step, describe the configuration operations to be performed on the devices in order
to obtain each of the available applications. It is important to observe that when using the relay actuator it is
possible to control other devices (phone dialler, bells, etc.) using the appropriate outputs (the common terminal,
NO contact and NC contact are available).
The following applications will be illustrated:
1. Activation of a bell with the passive IR detector;
2. Activation of a bell with the contact interface;
3. Activation of an electric lock with the connector;
4. Signalling alarm with no audible warning (anti-robbery);
5. Closing the gas flow solenoid valve in the event of leakage (technical alarm);
6. Activation of audible alarm warnings (panic button).
N.B. Reading this chapter is only recommended after getting familiar with the use of the menus on the control
panel (chap. 6).
186
Other applications
11.1. Activation of a bell with the passive IR detector
The aim of this application consists of activating a signalling device, for example a bell, via an IR detector so as to
signal entry of a person into the room.
With the burglar alarm system turned off, the IR detector detects the entry of a person and, via the BUS,
communicates the operation of the bell to the relay acuator.
The following figure shows an example of this application:
Entrance bell
Burglar alarm
system
Detector
PIR
Actuator
with relay
Configuration
The aim is to activate the relay via the IR regulator.
It is therefore necessary to place the actuator and the detector in the same zone, doing the configuration according
to the procedures described in chapter 6.
For the IR detector to send the command signal to the relay it is fundamental for both devices to be assigned to
the same zone.
The “brightness threshold” parameter (which by default is set to 250) must be set to command the relay only when
the brightness of the room is less than the selected brightness.
187
Other applications
11.2 Activation of a bell with the contact interface
The aim of this application consists of activating a signalling device, for example a bell, via a contact interface so
as to signal the opening of a door into a room and therefore entry of a person.
With the burglar alarm system turned off, as soon as the door opens, the magnetic contact installed on the latter
opens and the entry of a person is detected. The contact intervace, via BUS, communicates the operation of the
bell to the relay acuator.
The following figure shows an example of this application:
Entrance bell
Magnetic
contact
Burglar alarm
system
Contact
interface
Relay
actuator
Configuration
For the contact interface to send the command signal to the relay it is fundamental for both devices to be assigned
to the same zone.
The parameters of the actuator and contact interface must be set as follows:
- Relay actuator: behaviour = one-position stable, OFF time = n seconds.
- Contact interface: access signalling = YES.
188
Other applications
11.3. Activation of an electric lock with the connector
The aim of this application consists of activating an electric lock by using the transponder key on one of the
connectors of the burglar alarm system. Only assigned persons, equipped with an enabled key, have access to
the room protected by turning off the intrusion detection system and, at the same time, opening the electric lock.
This type of application is extremely useful to create functions of access control.
The following figure shows an example of this application:
Burglar alarm
system
Relay
actuator
Connector
Configuration
The aim is to activate the relay via the connector. It is therefore necessary to place the actuator and the connector
in the same zone, doing the configuration according to the procedures described in chap. 6.
The parameters of the connector and relay actuator must be set as follows:
- Connector: Open if ON = YES, Open if on standby = NO.
- Relay actuator: behaviour = one-position stable, OFF time = n seconds.
189
Other applications
11.4. Signalling alarm with no audible warning (anti-robbery)
The aim of this application is to signal an alarm situation (anti-robbery) via the burglar alarm via bus system, without
this signal interfering with the state of the system and without this generating any sound alarm.
The alarm is generated by pressing a NC button that, via the contact interface, activates the relay actuator, which
in its turn activates the phone dialler to make the required call.
The NC button must be connected between the terminals C and M of the contact interface.
When the button is pressed, the LED on the contact interface blinks and the relay actuator is activated; the latter,
in its turn, activates the dialler that will transmit the message. To stop the transmission of the alarm or cancel the
signals it is necessary, via the control panel, to press the “Stop alarm button.
The following figure shows an example of this application:
Phone dialler
Burglar alarm
system
Relay actuator
Contact
interface
NC button
190
Other applications
Configuration
The aim is to activate the relay (and therefore the phone dialler) via the contact interface. It is therefore necessary to
place the actuator and the contact interface in the same zone, doing the configuration according to the procedures
described in chap. 6.
The parameters of the actuator and contact interface must be set as follows:
- Relay actuator: behaviour = one-position stable, OFF time = n seconds.
- Contact interface: access signalling = YES.
Note: Alarm signalling with no audible warning can also be obtained with a remote control 01818 associated with
an RF interface; if this is configured in the same zone as the relay actuator (zone from 1 to 30) that is connected,
for instance, to a phone dialler, pressing the “PANIC” button on the remote control will cause the relay contact
to close.
191
Other applications
11.5. Closing the gas flow solenoid valve in the event of leakage (technical alarm)
If there is a gas leak it is possible, using the burglar alarm system, to close the solenoid valve and make the
technical alarm call with the phone dialler.
The (gas) detector detects gas and the contact interface, which is connected to this detector, sends the message
to the control panel and moreover activates the relay actuator that closes the solenoid valve of the gas system.
The technical alarm generated in this way stays active until the end of the alarm condition (that is when gas is no
longer detected).
The gas detector output must be connected between the terminals C and T of the contact interface.
The following figure shows an example of this application:
Gas detector
Burglar alarm
system
Phone dialler
Relay actuator
Orif.
25
Volt
Seal
s
12
BUN
A
...
N
Art
mm
. 165
p
max
13
5
192
90
1,5
W
IP6
bar
Contact
interface
Relay actuator
Other applications
Configuration
The aim is to have the contact interface activate the relay and therefore the phone dialler and/or the solenoid valve.
It is therefore necessary to place the actuator and the contact interface in the same zone, doing the configuration
according to the procedures described in chap. 6.
The parameters of the actuators and contact interface must be set as follows:
- Relay actuator connected to solenoid valve: behaviour = two-position stable.
- Relay actuator connected to telephone dialler: behaviour = one-position stable.
- Contact interface: Techncial alarm signalling = YES.
At the end of the signalling, that is when the detector no longer signals any leakage, the contact interface will send
an OFF command to the actuator (the system is ready to detect a new alarm condition).
193
Other applications
11.6. Activation of audible alarm warnings (panic button)
The aim of this application consists in the possibility of voluntarily activating the sirens in order to generate a loud
audible warning as a deterrent for burglars. This function, called “panic button”, can also be activated with the
system switched off and under any condition of system partialization. When the NC button connected with the
contact interface on terminals C and M is pressed, the devices that generate the audible warnings are activated.
To silence the sirens it is necessary, from the control panel, to press the “Stop Alarm” button.
The following figure shows an example of this application:
Burglar alarm
system
NC button
Siren for
outdoor
use
Contact
interface
Configuration
The aim is to use the burglar alarm system for the function of a panic button.
It is necessary to configure the contact interface in zone 31 and set the parameter “access signalling= YES”. 194
Glossary
12. Glossary
Alarm
Signal of a state of danger for life, property or the surrounding environment.
Intrusion alarm
Alarm generated by a presence, entry or attempted intrusion in a surveilled place.
Tamper alarm (tampering)
Alarm generated by the detection of attempted tampering with the device. This function is often indicated with the
term 24 h to specify that it is always on.
Technical alarm
Alarm generated by systems other than a burglar alarm such as, for example, gas detection, water, smoke, etc.
Self-powering
Characteristic of an appliance, operating with a power demand, to have its own power supply.
Self-protection
Capacity of various devices and connections to recognise and generate an alarm signal when faced with
attempted tampering and/or alteration of their physical and functional state.
Path of last exit/first entry
Place where a detector is usually installed that is programmed with a time lag to allow exit or entry without
immediately causing an alarm.
Detector
Device able to generate an intrusion signal in response to detecting an abnormal condition indicating the presence
of danger.
Burglar alarm system
This is an alarm system to detect and indicate the presence, entry or attempted entry of an intruder in a place
that may or not be surveilled
Zone
Part of the system comprising a specific group of detectors and/or connectors.
Partitioning
Set of zones that can be switched on/off at the same time.
195
Glossary
Operating states of the system
System on
The system is defined to be On when it is working and able to generate an intrusion alarm from one of the zones
into which it has been divided.
System in Configuration
The system is defined to be in Configuration when, after setting this operating mode with a suitable sequence of
commands, the control panel is set up for programming the devices.
When the system is in the phase of Configuration, it inhibits the reception of alarm signals and therefore the sound
of the sirens.
Partitioned System
The system is defined to be Partitioned when only some zones are active and can therefore generate a burglar
alarm. The technical and tamper alarms are always active in all the zones of the system regardless of the partitions
on/off. System on Stand-by
The system is defined to be on stand-by when it is working and able to generate a tamper alarm or a technical
alarm but not an intrusion alarm.
Walk test
It is a particular operating mode of the system that permits checking and/or testing the operation of the detectors
and contact interfaces without generating audible alarm signals.
Types of alarm
Signal on control panel Meaning
PIR alarm Alarm generated by one or more detectors.
Tamper alarm Alarm generated by attempted tampering to the detriment of one or more devices.
Con. alarm
Alarm generated by a contact interface that detects the opening of one or more
contacts connected to it.
Technical alarmAlarm generated by a contact interface connected to a device for detecting technical alarms.
Not resp. Alarm generated by the state of malfunctioning of one or devices.
N.B. Every type of alarm is always displayed with an indication of the device that generated it and the zone to
which that device is assigned.
196
197
Manual
Manual for configuring radio-frequency devices with the EnOcean module used
with the By-me automation system.
198
Manual
Instructions
This manual is necessary in order to configure the radio-frequency devices when used with the
By-me automation system through the specific Bus interface with the EnOcean module (Eikon
20508 and Plana 14508).
WARNING: The Bus interface with the EnOcean module Eikon 20508 and Plana 14508
is compatible with:
- By-me 8-module flush and surface mounting control unit ver. 3.0 and later.
- EasyTool Professional LT Software ver. 4.1 and later.
The Bus interface (Eikon 20508 and Plana 14508) and the flat control with two rocker
push buttons (art. 20505) are compatible and therefore can be used with all the devices
equipped with EnOcean receivers RCM100, RCM120, RCM122, RCM130, RCM140,
RCM152 and RCM250.
199
Manual
Bus interface with EnOcean module
The Bus with EnOcean module interface allows using the radio frequency devices to extend coverage in places or accesses where it
is not possible to add any cables and devices via Bus.
The interface permits integrating the By-me system and the radio-frequency devices with the EnOcean module that allow carrying out
all the automation functions such as, for instance, controlling lights and shades, scenes, etc.
The interface manages all these functions via pairs of configurable radio buttons such as rocker switches, dimmer switches, roller shade
and scene controls and radio relay actuators.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20508: 2 Eikon modules
14508: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Plana
Technical characteristics
• Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-30 V d.c.
• Protection class: IP30
• Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
• Installation: flush or surface mounting
• Consumption: 20 mA typ
• Frequency of reception and transmission: 868 MHz
• Configuration button
• Indicator LED
• It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the Bus (+ and -).
• Maximum number of radiofrequency devices that can be stored:
 16 double rocker switches (each rocker switch can be saved to at most 4 different groups, group depth = 4), configurable as:
- 16 ON/OFF, dimmer or roller shade controls, at most;
- 32 scenes, at most;
- 16 ON/OFF-, Dimmer- oder Rollladensteuerungen
- 32 Szenarien, max.;
 no limit on the number of RF actuators, provided they belong to at most 32 groups.
• Maximum number of interfaces with the EnOcean that can be installed in a system: depends on the By-me control panel used.
200
Manual
List of radio frequency devices that can be used
VIMAR Code
20505
20506 - 14506
01796
DESCRIPTION / COMPOSITION
Flat control with two rocker buttons with EnOcean radio transmitter without batteries, power supply
from the built-in electro-dynamic generator, to be completed with the dedicated buttons Eikon
20506 or Plana 14506
Pair of buttons for control with EnOcean module 20505
Actuator with EnOcean module with relay output, power supply 230 V~ 50 Hz
N.B.: The flat control with two rocker push buttons 20505 is the radio unit on which pair of button must be mounted (Eikon 20506
and Plana 14506); this combination permits obtaining radio-frequency “lighting points”.
Operation
The device receives the signals emitted by the radiofrequency rocker push buttons and transmits the commands to the radio actuators.
• Normal operation from radio-frequency to Bus: it receives information from the radio rocker push buttons (pressing and releasing
the button) and controls the actuators over the Bus.
• Normal operation from Bus to radio-frequency: it receives the group messages from the devices over the Bus (single push-buttons,
rocker switches, etc.) and controls the actuators by radio-frequency.
• Radio interface configuration: in the phase of configuration the control panel passes minimal information to the interface: enabling
LED, index of the interface.
• Replacing radio interface: in this phase the By-me control panel transfers the radio devices present in the interface being replaced
to the new interface.
• Configuring radio-frequency devices: in the phase of adding radio devices, the interface with the EnOcean module saves the characteristics of the radio rocker button that responded and sends them to the control panel. In addition, the interface saves all the
information related to the configured radio actuators.
Indicators
• red LED on steady:
- during the configuration phase;
• green LED blinking (only if the LED enabling parameter is not Off):
- the interface is receiving or transmitting a radio-frequency message.
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
• Enabling LED:
- Normal: the green LED is normally off and blinks when receiving or transmitting a radio-frequency message.
- Inverted: the green LED is normally on and blinks when receiving or transmitting a radio-frequency message.
- Off: the green LED never lights up.
Standard compliance
R&TTE directive
Standards EN 50428, EN 301 489-3, EN 300 220-2.
201
Manual
Pair of buttons for flat control with EnOcean module
The pair of buttons, suitably hooked onto the flat control with two rocker push buttons, permits obtaining the lighting point by radio
through which it is possible to carry out all the functions of automation (lights, roller shades, scenes, etc.) in a similar manner to the
conventional By-me control appliances.
IMPORTANT: The buttons can be specially customized with any symbol.
The pair of buttons can be supplied in the following versions:
20506: 2 Eikon modules
14506: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Plana
The flat control with the EnOcean module with two rocker push buttons, art. 20505, is supplied in the 2-module version.
20505
Technical characteristics
• Rated supply voltage (Vn): no kind of power supply is needed.
• Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
• Transmission frequency: 868 MHz
• Installation: flush or surface mounting. Surface mounting installation, thanks to the special mounting frame (art. 20507 or 20507.B),
can be on materials such as, for instance, wood, masonry, etc.
• Capacity: 70 m in an open field; this value is less when there are walls and/or metal partitions. Before installing the device, always
take care to check the strength of the radio signal.
IMPORTANT: When the button is pressed, for the radio control to be transmitted, you must hear a mechanical “click”.
202
Manual
Hooking the pair of buttons 20506-14506 onto the flat control with two radio rocker push buttons 20505.
Flat control 20505
Pair of buttons 20506 -14506
Pair of buttons hooked onto the flat control 20505
Installation on flush mounting box
Warning: Installation can be performed also on mounting
frames with 3, 4 and 7 modules (art. 14613, 14614 and
14617) and related cover plates.
Mounting frame 20612-14612
The distance from flush with the wall mounting frame + cover plate +
control + buttons is 9.5 mm for Eikon and 10.5 mm for Plana.
Cover plate 20652.. - 20682.. - 14652..
203
Manual
Surface-mounting installation
Warning: Installation can also be performed with 2-module
cover plates (20652.., 20682.. and 14652..) thanks to the
special knockouts on the mounting frame 20507 (available
in grey and white versions).
Mounting frame 20507 - 20507.B
The distance mounting frame + cover plate + control +
buttons is 13 mm for Eikon and 14 mm for Plana.
Cover plate 20652.. - 20682.. - 14652..
Functionality
With the By-me control panel, each single button of the pair can be configured as an On/Off, dimmer switch, roller shade button or
scene control button.
For configuring the rocker push buttons with the EnOcean module, see par. “Managing Bus interface with EnOcean module” in the
By-me control panel manual.
Warning: When adding a button it is necessary for it to be inserted in the same group as the relay you want to control.
OPERATION AS AN ON/OFF BUTTON.
Pressing the top of the button sends an ON message to the group or groups where this button has been saved; afterwards an
actuator in the group will switch over. On the contrary, pressing the bottom of the button sends an OFF message to the group(s)
where this button has been saved.
OPERATION AS A DIMMER SWITCH
- Briefly pressing the top of the button: an ON message is sent to the group to which the button belongs.
- Pressing and holding the top of the button: sends a START brightness increase message while pressing the button and a STOP
message on releasing it.
- Briefly pressing the bottom of the button: an OFF message is sent to the group to which the button belongs.
- Pressing and holding the bottom of the button: sends a START brightness decrease message while pressing the button and a STOP
message on releasing it.
204
Manual
OPERATION AS A ROLLER SHADE BUTTON
- Briefly pressing the top of the button: a STOP opening roller shade message is sent to the group to which the button belongs.
- Pressing and holding the top of the button: a START opening roller shade message is sent to the group to which the button belongs.
- Briefly pressing the bottom of the button: a STOP closing roller shade message is sent to the group to which the button belongs.
- Pressing and holding the bottom of the button: a START closing roller shade message is sent to the group to which the button belongs.
OPERATION AS A SCENARIO BUTTON
Pressing the top of the button calls up the associated scenario (scenario 1) whereas pressing the bottom of the button calls up another
associated scenario (scenario 2).
Standard compliance
R&TTE directive
Standards EN 301 489-3, EN 50371, EN 300 220-2.
Customizing buttons 20506 - 14506.
The buttons can be specially customized with any symbol even for minimum quantities; the customizing is done by laser.
In addition it is possible to reorder the same customization at different times with identical results since all the customizations are saved to
magnetic media.
Buttons 20506 - 14506 can be customized with:
• symbols and text illustrated in the tables on page 206; for ordering, clearly state the symbols to be put on the right and left buttons
and on their bottom and top respectively.
• symbols and text on request.
As regards customizing with symbols and text on request, take account of the following:
- provide a printout or a film of the subject to duplicate, drawn in black and white to a scale 2 or 3 times greater than the finished size;
- the subject can also be supplied on a magnetic medium (DOS or MAC diskette with image in EPS or TIFF format), together with a hardcopy
paper printout;
- check that the desired symbol and/or text are not already included in the following tables; in this case it is sufficient to state the relevant
code in addition to the article code on the request.
Important:
- Do not provide photocopies of the subject to duplicate.
- Do not transmit the subject to duplicate by fax since the low resolution of faxes prevents duplicating the transmitted document with the
quality of the laser system.
To request customization, follow the instructions given in the specific section of the General Price List.
For the delivery times, please contact the Vimar sales network.
205
Manual
Eikon - Library of standard symbols and text
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
Plana - Library of standard symbols and text
51
52
62
63
indietro
31
42
206
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
apre
avanti
bagno
cantina
chiude
esterno
garage
generale
giardino
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
luce
OFF
ON
ripostiglio
scale
solaio
terrazza
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
alarm
do not
disturb
49
50
Manual
Actuator with EnOcean module 1 relay (01796)
The actuator with the EnOcean module is able to receive both the radio signal transmitted by the Bus interface with the EnOcean
module following a command made with the button of a By-me device and the radio command of the radio-frequency rocker push
button to actuate, via relay output, the load to which it is connected.
If there is no mains power supply, the actuator keeps the previous configuration.
01796
Technical characteristics
•Power supply: 230V~, 50Hz.
•Reception frequency: 868 MHz
•Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
•Configuration push-buttons:
- LRN (learning push-button). On pressing LRN the actuator enters the learning phase, signalling this condition with
intermittent switchover, every 2 s, of the relay output. When a new button is saved, the output remains active for a
few seconds and then starts switching again; on pressing LNR or after approximately 30 s of no activity, the actuator
exits the learning phase.
- CLR (memory delete push-button). Pressing the CLR push-button for a few seconds deletes all the saves made and
the actuator directly enters the learning phase (see previous point).
•Two-position stable relay output with the following controllable loads:
- Resistive loads: 1100 VA (cos ? =1)
- Incandescent lamps (tungsten): 400 W
- Ballast (fluorescent lamps): 360 W (cos ? =0.4-0.6)
•Maximum number of radio transmitters that can be saved on the relay: 30.
207
Manual
Front view
LRN
push-button
Connection example
CLR
push-button
Connection to the load
Line
Neutral
Neutral
N
L
Functionality
ADDING RADIO ROCKER PUSH BUTTONS
The configuration procedure is as follows:
1) Connect the actuator 01796 to the electric mains.
2) Press the LRN push-button using an object with a non-metallic tip; the device is now awaiting a radio message and this standby
mode is confirmed by its output continually changing status (intermittent switchover).
3) To access the actuator acquirement mode, please see the By-me control panel manual. The code sent by the control panel is saved
on the actuator and, to confirm acquisition, the output remains active for approximately 4 s; after this time has elapsed, it starts
switching again and the actuator is then ready for saving again.
4) To exit the saving phase, simply press the LRN push-button again or wait for a time out of 30 s with no radio activity.
REMOVING A RADIO ROCKER PUSH BUTTON
A previously saved button can be selectively deleted; this operation is performed using the By-me control panel menus, therefore please see
the relevant manual.
DELETING ALL THE SAVED BUTTONS
To delete all the buttons saved on the actuator, simply hold down the CLR button for approximately 2 s. Confirmation of deletion is highlighted by
the output status changing continually; the actuatoris then already in the phase of saving and is ready to acquire new radio transmitters. To exit
this phase, simply press the LRN button.
208
Manual
Actuator operation without the By-me control panel
ADDING RADIO ROCKER PUSH BUTTONS
The pair of rocker push button devices (radio transmitter) and actuator with 1 output (receiver) can also function without the aid of the By-me control
panel and the interface with the EnOcean module; the controls sent from the rocker push buttons can indeed be intercepted directly by the actuators.
The configuration procedure is as follows:
1) Connect the actuator 01796 to the electric mains.
2) Press the LRN push-button using an object with a non-metallic tip; the device is now awaiting a radio message and this standby mode is confirmed
by its output continually changing status (intermittent switchover).
3) Then press either the top or the bottom of the toggle button with which you want to control the actuator.
Saving is confirmed by the actuator output remaining active for approximately 4 s after which it starts switching again and the device is then ready
for saving again.
4) To exit the saving phase, simply press the LRN push-button again or wait for a time out of 30 s with no radio activity.
REMOVING A RADIO ROCKER PUSH BUTTON
A previously saved radio button can be selectively deleted.
1) Press the LRN push-button using an object with a non-metallic tip; the device is now awaiting a radio message and this standby mode is
confirmed by its output continually changing status (intermittent switchover).
2) Then press the button you want to remove from the actuator memory. Deletion is confirmed by the actuator output remaining active for
approximately 4 s after which it starts switching again and the device is then ready for deleting again.
3) To exit the deletion phase, simply press the LRN push-button again.
DELETING ALL THE SAVED BUTTONS
To delete all the buttons saved on the actuator, simply hold down the CLR button for approximately 2 s. Confirmation of deletion is highlighted
by the output status changing continually; the actuator is then already in the phase of saving and is ready to acquire new radio transmitters.
To exit this phase, simply press the LRN button.
Standard compliance
R&TTE directive
Standards EN 60669-2-1, EN 301 489-3, EN 300 220-2, EN 61000-6-2.
209
Manual
Warning: The following illustrates the situations that reduce the transmission/reception capacity of the radio devices.
-
Radio lighting point installed in a metal casing;
Plasterboard walls with insulation of wool and aluminium foil;
False ceilings made of metal or carbon fibre;
Lead glass or glass with covering of metal, steel jewellery;
BARRIE
R
Radio signal penetration
Material
Penetration
Wood, plastic, glass 90....100%
Bricks 65....95%
Concrete 10....90% Metal, aluminium walls 0....10%
Rad
sign io
shad al
ow
- Transmitter or receiver installed on the floor or in a niche in a wall;
- Moisture;
- Devices that transmit RF signals such as computers, audio and video appliances or dimmer switches for lamps: keep
at a distance of at least 0.5 m.
W
thick ALL
ness
20 c
m
Lo
atten w
of th uation
e rad
sign io
al
210
L
WAL 0 cm
6
ness
thick
High tion
nua
atte e radio
of th ignal
s
211
Manual to configure the radio-frequency devices when used with the burglar
alarm via bus system.
212
Manual
This manual is necessary in order to configure the radio-frequency devices when used with the
VIMAR burglar alarm via bus system through the specific radio interface (Eikon 20493, Idea
16943 and Plana 14493).
WARNING: The Eikon 20493, Idea 16943 and Plana 14493 radio interface is compatible with:
- By-me 8-module recess and surface mounting control panels ver. 3.0 and later.
- 2-module burglar alarm control panels ver. 5.0 and later.
- EasyTool Professional LT Software ver. 4.0 and later.
213
Manual
Radio interface
The radio interface allows using the radio frequency devices to extend coverage in places or accesses where it is not possible to add
any cables and devices via BUS. In addition it permits using one or more radio controls as a key to switch the system on/off.
The device turns the system on and off (completely or the associated partitioned zones) after receiving the code emitted by the remote
controls.
Iì’t is supplied in the following versions:
20493: 2 Eikon modules
16943: 2 idea modules
14493: 2 Plana modules
Eikon
Idea
Plana
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage (Vn): BUS 20-30 V d.c.
- Protection class: IP30
- Operating temperature: -5 -- +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Type of protection: against opening and removal with passive infrared sensor built in
- Consumption: 20 mA typ
- Frequency of reception and transmission: dual at 433 MHz and 868 MHz
- Configuration button
- Indicator LED
- It has two terminals for the polarized connection to the bus (+ and –).
- The receiver is governed, for turning the system on and off and partitioning it, by one or more remote controls with over 65,000 possible combinations.
- Maximum number of radiofrequency devices that can be stored: 40 for each radio interface
- Maximum number of radio interfaces that can be installed in a system: 4.
214
Manual
List of Radio frequency devices that can be used
VIMAR code
DESCRIPTION / COMPOSITION
01819
Two-way remote control
01737
Passive infrared intrusion detector, battery power supply (supplied).
01738
Magnetic contact for doors and windows, battery power supply (supplied).
01744
Water detector for protection against flooding, battery power supply (supplied).
01747
Siren for outdoor use, battery power supply (supplied)
00912
9 V 12 Ah alkaline battery for siren for outdoor use
N.B.: The detectors 01737 and 01738 are equipped with an input terminal on which an NC or a roller-shutter contact can be connected; to enable it, use the dip switches on the device card.
Operation
The device receives the transmissions of the radio wave signals
emitted by the radiofrequency devices and by the remote control.
• Regular operation: receives the information from the radiofrequency devices (tamper alarm, burglar alarm, technical alarm, low
battery). It receives the codes from the remote controls and sends them to the control panel; in addition it receives information from
the control panel on the system status and sends it to the siren and remote controls.
• Configuration: in the phase of adding radio frequency devices it saves the characteristics of the component that has responded
and communicates some information to the control panel.
• Supervision: this function checks the configured Radio Frequency devices work properly; If a device does not signal its presence for
a time of 4 h, the interface sends a “no device” message to the control panel. To obtain this function the “Supervision” parameter
must be active.
Note: If the intrusion detection alarm system is turned on and a contact has accidentally been left open (a window for instance), the
system will not turn on and the control panel will display the alarm message and the zone to which the contact left open belongs.
If you repeat the process for turning it on, the system will activate itself as normal even with the contact open.
215
Manual
Indicators
• red LED on steady:
- during configuration and reset;
• red LED blinking:
- due to system in alarm or an attempt at tampering with the device. The LED keeps on blinking until the alarm that generated it is
deleted or the system is turned on again; therefore it is not enough to turn off the system to cut off the alarm.
• green LED blinking:
- the system is turned on in partitioned mode;
• green LED on steady:
- the system is turned on not partitioned;
• red/green two-colour LED blinking:
- it blinks for a few seconds after the phase of resetting the device.
Settings (programmable via the control panel)
1) Zone: the assignment zone from 1 to 30, set from the control panel by selecting the number of the chosen zone in the specific
menu; the interface can be configured in zone 31 when you need the “PANIC” button of the remote control 01819 to activate the
audible panic alarm.
2) Sensitivity of the antitamper device: (default 0 that is disabled). Value that adjusts the sensitivity of the optical antitamper in the radio
interface. Adjustment range from 0 (disabled) to 15 (maximum sensitivity);
3) Supervised (default OFF). Supervision of the Radio Frequency detectors on (ON) or off (OFF);
4) Activation delay zones from 1 to 10: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s;
5) Activation delay zones from 10 to 20: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s;
6) Activation delay zones from 20 to 30: 0 s = instantaneous. It can be increased up to 60 s in steps of 1 s.
Note: If a radio frequency detector for alarms of a technical type (water detector, for instance) is configured in the same zone as a relay
actuator (one-position stable), this will switch over when the detector signals the alarm.
Standard compliance
R&TTE directive
Standards EN 60065, EN 50130-4, EN 61000-6-3, EN 301489-1,
EN 301489-3, EN 300220-2.
216
Manual
Remote control (01819)
The remote control has 4 keys to transmit 4 different commands to the radio interface. The radio interface communicates
these commands to the control panel. Command transmission is indicated by the orange LED of the remote control
lighting up.
Control transmission
and confirmation LED
OFF button
PANIC button
ON 1 button
ON 2 button
01819
Technical characteristics
- Power supply: 2 alkaline batteries 3 V CR2016
- Radio range: 100 m in an open field
Standard compliance
R&TTE directive
Standards EN 60950-1, EN 50130-4, EN 301489-1, EN 301489-3,
EN 300220-2.
Operation
Pressing the 4 keys on the remote control provides 4 different functions.
• OFF button 1: Turning the system off (according to the partitions associated with the remote control code).
• ON 1 button 2: Turning the system on (according to the partitions associated with the remote control code).
• PANIC button 3: used to manage the panic signal.
• ON 2 button 4: Switches the system on (according to the partitions associated with the control).
217
Manual
LED indicators
• blinking orange: code transmission
• green: system off or interface in off zone
• red: system on or interface in active zone
The remote control has the function of a connector; in addition, for button 3 it is possible to select:
PANIC BUTTON function with audible warning: the radio interface must be configured in zone 31. In this way, on pressing the PANIC
button the siren is activated.
PANIC BUTTON FUNCTION WITHOUT AUDIBLE WARNING but with message: the radio interface and an actuator must be configured
in the same zone from 1 to 30. The actuator must be connected to a channel of the dialler. In this way, on pressing the PANIC button
the message is sent.
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION: the radio interface and an actuator must be configured in the same zone from 1 to 30. In this way, on
pressing the PANIC button the state of the actuator is switched over (one-position stable actuator).
The various PANIC functions are mutually exclusive.
To silence the sirens turn the system on and off with the remote control by pressing the ON (1 and 2) and OFF buttons in sequence, or on the
control panel with “Alarm Reset”
Configuring the remote control
- Prepare the control panel for configuring the radio-frequency devices (see the control panel manual).
- Press remote control buttons 1 and 2 together.
Inserting/changing batteries.
The power supply is provided by 2 alkaline batteries CR2016 3 V.
CR 2016
CR 2016
3V
3V
CR 2016
3V
• Change the batteries solely with ones of the same type.
• Connect the batteries observing the correct polarity.
WARNING:
Dispose of batteries in the specific differentiated
collection bins.
218
• If scrapping the remote control, the batteries must be taken
out beforehand.
Manual
Infrared detector (01737)
The infrared presence detector 01737, installed in the rooms to surveil, is able to generate an alarm message when it
detects motion of heat-emitting bodies in its areas of coverage. In addition, it is equipped with a N/C input that is used
to connect another sensor (magnetic contact, for instance) to protect a nearby frame.
IMPORTANT: After detecting motion, the sensor stays off for 2 minutes after which it then starts working regularly
again.
IR sensor
Trasmission LED
Transmitter enclosure
01737
Technical characteristics
- Power supply: 9 V alkaline battery type 6LR61
- Cover: angle 90°, distance 10 m
- Volumetric cover: 17 sectors on 3 floors (with a range of 10 m) and 11 sectors on 2 floors (with a range of 5 m)
- Operating temperature: from -5 °C to +45 °C
- Protection class: IP30
- Anti-sabotage protection against opening; the tamper alarm is only detected on the main sensor (infrared)
- Radio range: 100 m in an open field
- Dimensions: 120 x 35 x 33 mm
- Operating life: 2 years under conditions of normal use
- Transmission: dual frequency
- Maximum length of cables for connecting the contacts to the N/C terminal: 2 m (with shielded cable)
- Block of 2 minutes between one detection and the next even with the SYSTEM SWITCHED OFF.
Standard compliance
R&TTE directive
Standards EN 60950-1, EN 50130-4, EN 301489-1, EN 301489-3, EN 300220-2, EN 50371.
219
Manual
Connection example
Connections
N/C contact
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
6LR61-9V
Inserting/changing battery.
• Change the battery solely with one of the same type.
• Connect the battery observing the correct polarity.
• If scrapping the detector, the battery must be taken out
beforehand.
6LR
61
9V
olt
WARNING:
Dispose of batteries in the specific differentiated
collection bins.
220
Manual
2,5 m
The angle of coverage is 80°/90° horizontally for a reach of 10 m. Installation must be at a height of between 2.10
m and 2.50 m off floor level.
A
1,6 m
B
C
1m
5,4 m
90°
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B B B B
A
A
10
m
B
A
Operation
• It detects motion of heat-emitting bodies in its areas of coverage.
• Opening the contact that may be connected will cause an alarm warning that can be made to differ from that of the IR sensor (to
distinguish between different break-ins) by using the detector’s dip-switches.
• The N/C terminal block is self-learning; it is then necessary for it to remain closed for at least 6 s when inserting the battery.
• The detector LED lights up when an alarm is detected.
• Approximately every 30 minutes, the detector sends a correctly operating signal to the control panel (via radio interface).
• Anti-sabotage protection: Opening the battery compartment causes the tamper alarm; before changing the battery it is necessary to set the control panel on Walktest. With the compartment open, the detector produces an alarm without shutting down
for 2 minutes thus making it possible to test the device.
• Walktest: During this phase an alarm is generated so as to check that the device works properly. In addition, the control panel
identifies the type of detector and provides an indication on the level of radio reception.
• Flat battery warning: besides the warning on the control panel, the detector LED blinks for each alarm.
221
Manual
Dip-switches
1 2 3 4
1 ON = Maximum range equal to approximately 10 m
1 OFF = Maximum range equal to approximately 5 m
2 ON = Selector for configuring the N/C input. It permits transmitting two different codes to differentiate the alarm detected by the infrared sensor from the one detected by the contact.
2 OFF = Infrared alarm only
3 ON = N/C contact input enabled to count 6 pulses (for roller shutter detectors)
3 OFF = Input enabled for all other types of contact (recess mounting magnetic ones, for instance)
4 ON = Reduced sensitivity; two detections are needed to have an alarm signal
4 OFF = Normal sensitivity
Configuring the infrared detector 01737
Warning: To configure the infrared sensor, all the dip switches must be OFF.
- Prepare the control panel for configuring the radio-frequency devices (see the control panel manual).
- Open the enclosure.
- Put the dip-switches 1,3 and 4 onto the desired position and leave 2 OFF (the dip-switches must be positioned before
inserting the battery).
- If used, make the connections to the N/C input.
- Prepare the control panel for configuring the radio-frequency detector then insert the battery into the device; the control
panel will confirm reception of the message. The display will show a configuration message.
222
Manual
6LR
61
9V
olt
- If the N/C contact is used too, prepare the control panel for configuration (the detector connected to the N/C contact can
also be assigned to a different zone to that of the infrared sensor) and then put dip-switch 2 onto ON; the control panel
will display configuration of the device.
Warning
Connect the N/C contact detectors as illustrated in the figure. Using fast contacts such as those for roller shutters and/or inertia
sensors, put dip-switch 3 onto ON; in this case the alarm will be signalled if, within 30 s, there are 6 quick openings of the contact.
N.B: The N/C terminal block is self-learning; it is then necessary for it to remain closed for at least 6 s.
Important: Bevor er einsatzbereit ist, braucht der Melder nach Einlegen der Batterie eine gewisse Zeit zur Stabilisierung (rote Led leuchtet
etwa 30 Sekunden lang mit Dauerlicht).
Warning:
- do not place any objects in front of the infrared sensor (plants, curtains, furniture, etc.);
- do not expose it to direct light from lamps or sunlight;
- do not subject it to the direct action of sources of heat;
- do not place it in the direction of sources of heat.
NO
NO
NO
NO
223
Manual
Detector with magnetic contact for doors and windows (01738)
The magnetic contact detector enables surveilling the opening of a door and/or window in the room. It is equipped with
a N/C input that allows connecting another sensor, for instance a roller shutter detector, to increase the protection of the
opening (protecting, for example, both the shutter and the window itself).
Transmission LED
Magnet
Transmitter enclosure
01738
Technical characteristics
- Power supply: alkaline battery 9 V 6LR61
- Operating temperature: from -5 °C to +45 °C
- Protection class: IP30
- Anti-sabotage protection against opening; the tamper alarm is only detected on the main sensor (radio magnetic contact)
- Radio range: 100 m in an open field
- Dimensions: 120 x 25 x 45 mm
- Operating life: 2 years under conditions of normal use
- Transmission: dual frequency
- Maximum length of cables for connecting the contacts to the N/C terminal: 2 m (with shielded cable)
Standard compliance
R&TTE directive
Standards EN 60950-1, EN 50130-4, EN 301489-1, EN 301489-3, EN 300220-2, EN 50371.
224
Manual
Connections
N/C contact
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
6LR61-9V
Inserting/changing battery.
• Change the battery solely with one of the same type.
• Connect the battery observing the correct polarity.
• If scrapping the detector, the battery must be taken out
beforehand.
6LR
61
9V
olt
WARNING:
Dispose of batteries in the specific differentiated
collection bins.
225
Manual
Funktionsweise
• Moving the magnet away from the body of the sensor (and moving it nearer) causes radio transmissions for opening
(and closing) the door or window, signalling an alarm (and, if enabled, the end of the alarm) as a result.
• Opening the contact that may be connected to the N/C terminal will cause an alarm and end-of-alarm warning as in the
case of the magnet. This signal can be differentiated (to distinguish between different break-ins) by using the detector
dip-switches.
• The detector LED lights up when an alarm is detected.
• Approximately every 30 minutes, the detector sends a correctly operating signal to the control panel (via radio interface).
• Anti-sabotage protection: Opening the battery compartment causes the tamper alarm; before changing the battery
it is necessary to set the control panel on Walktest.
• Walktest: During this phase an alarm is generated so as to check that the device works properly. In addition, the control
panel identifies the type of detector and provides an indication on the level of radio reception.
• Flat battery warning: besides the warning on the control panel, the detector LED blinks.
• The N/C terminal block is self-learning; it is then necessary for it to remain closed for at least 6 s when inserting the
battery.
Dip-switches
1 2 3 4
1 ON = Transmission of alarm (contact opening) and end of alarm (contact closing)
1 OFF = Alarm transmission only (contact opening)
2 ON = Selector for configuring the N/C input.
It permits transmitting two different codes to differentiate the alarm detected by the infrared sensor from
the one detected by the contact.
2 OFF = Transmission of a single code for both alarms
3
3
4
4
ON = N/C contact input enabled to count 6 pulses (for roller shutter detectors)
OFF = Input enabled for all other types of contact (other wire magnetic contacts, for instance)
ON = In this position the N/C contact is inhibited; for it to be used, it must be turned OFF
OFF = Usable N/C contact
Configuring the detector with magnetic contact 01738
Warning: To configure the magnetic sensor, all the dip switches must be OFF.
- Prepare the control panel for configuring the radio-frequency devices (see the control panel manual).
- Open the enclosure.
226
Manual
- Put the dip-switches 1 and 3 onto the desired position and leave 2 OFF (the dip-switches must be positioned before
inserting the battery).
- If used, make the connections to the N/C input.
- Prepare the control panel for configuring the detector then insert the battery into the device; the control panel will confirm
reception of the message. The display will show a configuration message.
6LR
61
9V
olt
- If the N/C input is used too, in the event of an alarm on the magnetic contact or on the N/C contact the detector will
transmit a single code; on the control panel it will not therefore be possible to know whether the alarm has been detected
by the N/C contact or by the magnetic one.
- If the wire N/C contact is used and you want to differentiate the second alarm, prepare the control panel for configuration
(the detector connected to the N/C contact can also be assigned to a different zone to that of the radio contact) and
then put dip-switch 2 onto ON; the control panel will display configuration of the device.
227
Manual
Warning:
- Connect the N/C contact sensors as illustrated in the figure; to use this contact you need to put dip-switch 4 onto
OFF. Using fast contacts such as those for roller shutters and/or inertia sensors, put dip-switch 3 onto ON; in this case
the alarm will be signalled if, within 30 s, there are 6 quick openings of the contact.
- The end-of-alarm function (dip-switch 1 in the ON position), permits checking the device status on the control panel
(contact open or closed).
Warning:
- Secure the magnet of the contact on the striker of the door or window at a distance from the contact of max 5 mm.
- The electronic part of the contact (including the battery) must be secured at the top on the fixture of the door or window.
- Fixtures that are made of metal or contain a metal structure can attenuate or completely cancel the strength of the
magnet regardless of whether it is used correctly.
228
Manual
If the N/C contact is used with a rope detector for roller shutters:
- Secure the rope contact inside the roller shutter box.
- Use a single rope detector per device.
1 2 3 4
max 2 m
2 x 0,15 mm
max 2 m
2 x 0,15 mm
229
Manual
Water detector for protection against flooding (01744)
The detector installed in the rooms to protect activates the alarm when it detects a level of water on the ground greater
than 2 mm.
Transmitter
enclosure
Transmission LED
Water level sensor
01744
Technical characteristics
- Power supply: 9 V alkaline battery type 6LR61
- Operating temperature: from -5 °C to +45 °C
- Protection class: IP30
- Anti-sabotage protection against opening;
- Radio range: 100 m in an open field
- Dimensions: 120 x 25 x 33 mm
- Tube length for sensor 140 mm
- Operating life: 2 years under conditions of normal use
- Transmission: dual frequency
Standard compliance
R&TTE directive
Standards EN 60950-1, EN 50130-4,EN 301489-1, EN 301489-3, EN 300220-2, EN 50371.
230
Manual
Inserting/changing battery.
• Change the battery solely with one of the same type.
6LR61
9 Volt
• Connect the battery observing the correct polarity.
• If scrapping the detector, the battery must be taken out beforehand.
WARNING:
Dispose of batteries in the specific differentiated
collection bins.
Operation
• In the protected room, it detects a water level higher than the threshold and signals the technical alarm to the control panel.
• The detector LED lights up when an alarm is detected.
• Approximately every 30 minutes, the detector sends a correctly operating signal to the control panel (via radio interface).
• Anti-sabotage protection: Opening the battery compartment causes the tamper alarm; before changing the battery
it is necessary to set the control panel on Walktest.
• Walktest: In this phase, the control panel identifies the type of detector and provides an indication on the level of radio
reception.
• Flat battery warning: besides the warning on the control panel, the detector LED blinks.
Configuring the water detector 01744
- Prepare the control panel for configuring the radiofrequency devices (see the control panel manual).
- Open the enclosure.
231
Manual
- Prepare the control panel for configuring the detector then insert the battery into the device; the control panel will confirm
reception of the message. The display will show a configuration message.
6LR61
9 Volt
Warning:
- Secure the flooding sensor near electrical household appliances (washing machine, dishwasher, etc.) or potential
sources of flooding, with the probe tube in contact with the floor.
232
Manual
Siren for outdoor use (01747)
The siren for outdoor use enables audible (can be heard far away) and visual warning of all alarm conditions. The radio
transmission is two-way so the siren receives messages on the system status and sends alarm messages to the control
panel.
Audible warning
Visual indicator
01747
Technical characteristics
- Power supply: alkaline battery pack 9 V 12 Ah (art. 00912)
- Operating temperature: from -25 °C to +55 °C
- Sound pressure level at 1 m: 110 dB
- Protection class: IP32
- Anti-sabotage protection against opening and ripping off the wall
- Radio range: 100 m in an open field
- Dimensions: 270 x 203 x 73 mm
- Operating life: 4 years under conditions of normal use
- Transmission and reception: dual frequency
Standard compliance
R&TTE directive
Standards EN 60950-1, EN 50130-4, EN 301489-1, EN 301489-3, EN 300220-2, EN 50371.
233
Manual
Connections
Trimmer for adjusting the
loudness of the beeps
Battery pack connector
Inserting/changing battery.
• Change the battery solely with one of the same type.
1
• Connect the battery observing the correct polarity and repeat the configuration procedure.
• If scrapping the siren, the battery must be taken out beforehand.
2
WARNING:
Dispose of batteries in the specific differentiated
collection bins.
234
Manual
Operation
• Audible alarm governed by the control panel lasting 3 min. for each alarm cycle.
• Alarm signalling delay equal to approx. 12 s with audible pre-alarm warnings (beeps).
• Audible warning to confirm the system is on (1 beep), off (2 beeps) and partitioned (3 beeps). The volume of this audible
warning is adjustable with the special trimmer.
• Extended audible warning when putting out of service for maintenance; set the control panel on Walktest before opening the siren.
• Successful configuration signal (6 beeps and flashes).
• Siren enclosure protection contacts closing signal (1 beep).
• Approximately every 30 minutes, the siren sends a correctly operating signal to the control panel (via radio interface).
• Anti-sabotage protection: Opening the siren enclosure causes the tamper alarm; before changing the battery pack
it is necessary to set the control panel on Walktest.
• Walktest: In this phase, the control panel identifies the type of detector and provides an indication on the level of radio reception.
• Flat battery warning with signal on control panel.
Siren configuration 01747
- Open the siren and secure it to the wall; configuration then takes place in two phases:
235
Manual
1st Phase
- Prepare the control panel for configuration (see the control panel manual) then connect the battery pack to the siren. The
control panel will display configuration of the siren device.
2nd Phase
- Close the siren; correct closure of the enclosure is confirmed by an audible warning (beep) emitted by the siren.
- The siren configuration is then completed by carrying out the procedure for turning the system on and off; the operation
is then confirmed with audible signals (6 beeps).
Warning: If there is no audible warning, the siren is probably outside the radio range.
N.B.: The siren emits only one type of audible signal for both the intrusion alarm and the tamper alarm.
236
Section
Speaker system
237
238
Table of Contents
1. General characteristics of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
2. Devices and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
3. Topology and installation rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4. System constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
5. Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
6. System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
7. Group/zone definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
8. Types of system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
9.Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
239
Presentation of the system
1. General characteristics of the system
The By-me speaker system enables creating systems able to transmit up to 4 audio sources in different rooms at the
same time with high signal quality (CD quality).
Thanks to the various system devices, integration with all the existing By-me controls and the range of coordinated
speakers, it is possible to create mono or multi-channel systems completely integrated in the By-me system.
In the various rooms there is total freedom of choice and control and it is possible, thanks to the multi-channels, to
transmit different music in different rooms.
The possibility of free distribution of the transmitter and receiver nodes and of the commands keeps the wiring simple
allowing perfect integration with the controls and actuators of the home automation system.
The performance, numerous functions, installation flexibility and above all the quality of the sound enable using the
system both in the residential sector (from apartments to villas) and in the tertiary sector (health centres, shops, cafés,
restaurants, supermarkets).
The main characteristics can be summed up in the following points:
1.2-wire system (uses the By-me BUS cable art.01840.B) with in-out linear wiring that enables perfect integration with
the By-me automation devices (that can be connected to the “audio” branch through a special branch shunt for By-me
devices 01903 or through the special terminal on all the devices of the speaker system).
2.Possibility of using the By-me controls (buttons, touchscreen and also the ones connected to the automation line)
for system control (switching on/off, volume adjustment, source selection, song selection or radio station, etc.).
3.Distributed architecture (therefore with no central node that requires star wiring) that enables installing transmitters
and receivers at any point in the system.
4.4 simultaneous stereo channels, with CD audio quality.
5.Up to 30 independent audio zones.
6. Possibility of using the BUS as an FM antenna (in this case the auxiliary external antenna is not necessary).
7.Possibility of programming the maximum audio levels for each zone.
8.Possibility of making microphone calls.
9.Audio monitoring function.
10. Baby control function.
11. Integration with the scenarios and events programmes of the By-me system (for instance radio alarm function).
240
Devices and functions
2. Devices and functions
The speaker system is composed of the following categories of devices:
• Transmitter devices
• Receiver devices
• Acoustic speakers
• Accessory modules
2.1 Transmitter devices
The transmitter devices enable transmitting the sound coming from a sound source (e.g. HiFi system, CD player, portable MP3 players, etc..) to the system receivers.
Each transmitter configured in the system occupies one of the 4 available channels and can be connected to any
point of the system.
20582-14582: Input module with 2 RCA connectors.
Galvanic decoupling of the audio inputs in relation to the By-me bus.
Flush-mounting 2M mechanism.
01900: FM radio tuner with RDS on 2 DIN modules.
Managed via By-me control panels and touchscreen, displaying RDS info
(tuning, station, song, etc..). 8 tuning memories available.
Possibility of using internal antenna (BUS) or external antenna with coaxial
connector (type F).
20585-14585: Docking station for iPod.
Flush-mounting 2M mechanism with docking station for iPod.
Capable of controlling the iPod (play/stop, skip + /-). Capable of charging
the iPod if connected to the auxiliary power supply 32V, 1M.
20586-14586: Microphone call module
Call (selective or general) enabling module, 2M flush mounting. Front
buttons for activating the call, built-in microphone.
241
Devices and functions
2.2 Receiver devices
The receiver devices enable listening to the audio transmitted through one of the channels in the system.
These devices are also equipped with a high quality audio amplifier that enables direct connection to the acoustic
speakers.
20581-14581: Output and control module with amplifier 1+1W. Flushmounting 2M mechanism. Power supply from By-me bus or 32Vdc (via
specific auxiliary power supply 32V, 1M) with dedicated input
01901: Output module with amplifier 10+10W
Mechanical /DIN 6M.
Power supply 110-230V~, 50-60Hz 2.3 Acoustic speakers
The system has a complete range of acoustic speakers, both flush-mounting and surface-mounting (including versions
for ceilings, light walls, etc.).
20588-14588: Flush-mounting passive acoustic speaker 4+4M, 10W 8Ω
14587, 20587: Flush-mounting passive acoustic speaker 3M, 3W 8Ω
01906: Passive acoustic speaker, 30W 8Ω
01907: Ceiling-mounting passive acoustic speaker, 30W 8Ω
01908: Surface wall-mounting passive acoustic speaker, 30W 8Ω
242
Devices and functions
2.4 Accessory modules
The accessory modules are those devices that, while not having any direct use by the user, are needed by the system
for its operation or for creating the various possibilities of wiring/construction (see chap. 3 and 4).
01902: Decoupler for By-me power supply
Decoupling module to be used at the By-me power supply output (or at
the output of a line coupler).
Enclosure/DIN 2M
01903: Branch shunt module for By-me Automation devices
Retrofit enclosure
01904: Branch shunt module for speaker system devices
Retrofit enclosure.
20580-14580: Auxiliary power supply 32V
Power supply 110-230V~, 50-60Hz
Output 32Vdc, 3W.
Flush-mounting 1M mechanism.
20584-14584: Control of stereo sources with remote control (not supplied) via cable with IR transmitter (supplied).
243
Topology and installation rules
3. Topologies and installation rules
The new type of transfer of musical information in digital form over the same BUS where the By-me data packets transit
requires some constraints for the wiring and in the construction of the system, while maintaining perfect integration
with the By-me home automation system.
To facilitate installation a coloured BUS cable art.01840.B (dark blue in colour) has been introduced to identify the part
of the system or branches of the bus dedicated to the speaker system easily and with no error.
3.1. Installation topologies
The speaker system lends itself to various constructions according to the needs and dimensions of the system.
Example 1: speaker system on the same logical branch (Area/Line), but with separate wiring.
Speaker system branch
01902
Decoupler for By-me
power supply
By-me branch
01801 Power supply
In this case the separation is purely with the wiring and not the logic: the speaker system devices and the By-me
devices are configured on the same line.
Example 2: dedicated logic branch
01801
Power supply
01845
Line coupler
01902
Decoupler for By-me
power supply
01801
Power supply
244
01902
01801
Power supply 01801 and decoupler for
By-me power supply
OPTIONAL: to add if necessary
Topology and installation rules
In this case, the speaker system devices are configured in a different line to the other By-me devices. The second
power supply and the dedicated decoupler are optional and must only be included when necessary for reasons of
consumption.
Example 3: By-me automation and speaker system on the same branch
01902
01801
Power
supply
01903
Decoupler for By-me
power supply
20582
20581
20581
20581
By-me branch:
free wiring
By-me branch:
max 10 devices
free wiring
20582
01904
20581
01901
01901
20581
01801
Power
supply
01902
20582
20581
By-me branch. Free wiring
Speaker system branch. By-me devices cannot be connected; In-out wiring (linear,
not star); Max length 300 m; Max number of speaker system devices: 64.
The shunt for the speaker system enables creating By-me branches that contain a
max of 10 automation devices. Max no. of shunts 01903=64
The speaker system shunt enables shunting speaker system branches.
Decoupler for By-me power supply/speaker system. It must be inserted between
the power supply and the audio line; none of the By-me devices between the
decoupler and the power supply are “seen” by the speaker system.
This explains how it is possible to make a completely integrated system with the By-me automation and speaker system
devices on the same branch.
245
System constraints
Notice: By-me devices are not connected directly to the branch of the speaker system (blue branch) but through
special shunts or through the devices of the speaker system (that have a special terminal).
3.2 Installation rules
The following installation rules are compulsory in the sections of By-me Bus dedicated to the speaker system:
1. Free wiring is not permitted in the sections dedicated to the speaker system, but only the in-out linear type. For
shunting it is necessary to use the special branch shunt for the speaker system art.01904 (max.10 By-me devices).
2. No more than 2 branch shunts can be wired per speaker system (art.01904) between a transmitter and a
receiver: this is because the branch shunt introduces strong signal attenuation.
3. The section of BUS dedicated to the speaker system is separated from the power supply (or from the line coupler
if used) by the special “By-me power supply/speaker system decoupler” art.01902.
4. In the sections dedicated to the speaker system (dark blue sections) it is possible to connect only the devices of
the speaker system: the By-me devices (where applicable) must be connected either through the specific branch
shunt for By-me devices (art.01903, max. 10 By-me devices) or through the dedicated terminal in each speaker
system device (branch with max. 3 By-me devices).
5. Finally, the devices at the ends of the speaker system branches (at the start and at the end of the blue lines)
must be terminated via the special jumper present in each device. This applies to any device, whether it be a By-me
power supply/speaker system decoupler or a normal transmitter or receiver.
4. System constraints
In order to ensure correct system operation and complete functionality, it is necessary to respect constraints to be
taken account of in the installation.
4.1 Distances
The following table illustrates the constraints of the system related to the distances between the transmitters and the
receivers.
Maximum distance between a receiver and a transmit- 300 m
ter with no intermediate shunts
See fig. A
Maximum distance between a receiver and a transmit- 200 m
ter with 1 intermediate shunt
See fig. B
Maximum distance between a receiver and a transmit- 100 m
ter with 2 intermediate shunts
See fig. C
246
System constraints
A
Max 300 m
20581
20582
L
+
R
- +
-
Recess-mounting speakers
3 modules
20587
20587
B
Max 200 m
01901
Receiver
01904
20582
Transmitter
L
+
20587 +
-
L
+
-
R
R
-
+
-
20581
20588
20588
Recess-mounting speakers 8
modules (4+4)
20587
Recess-mounting
speakers 3 modules
C
01904
Shunt
20582
Transmitter
01901
Receiver
01904
Shunt
ax
M
0
20
m
+
00
x2
Ma
L
L
m
+
20582
Transmitter
R
-
+
-
-
20588
+
-
20588
R
01901
Receiver
01908
01908
Surface-mounting speakers
Recess-mounting
speakers 8 modules
(4+4)
247
System constraints
The following table illustrates the constraints of the system related to the distances between the receivers and the
speakers.
Distance between receiver 1+1W (art.14581, 20581) 10 m
and speakers
See fig. D
Distance between receiver 10+10W (art.01901) and
speakers
See fig. E
30 m
D
L
R
+
- +
20587
Max 10 m with
cable sect. 1 mm2
-
20587
Recess-mounting speakers 3
E
01901
Receiver/DIN
Amplifier 10+10 W
Max 30 m with
cable sect. 1.5 mm2
L
+
01908
R
-
+
-
01908
Surface wall-mounting speakers 10 W min.
248
System constraints
4.2 Absorption of the devices and sizing of the system
Since the system is completely integrable with By-me automation and uses the power supplies 01801, the limits of
absorption to calculate for each line in the system apply generally: max. 2 By-me power supplies 01801 and therefore
max. 2x800mA.
The speaker system devices have different absorptions than the conventional By-me devices and this must therefore
be taken into consideration when sizing the system.
The following table, useful for correctly sizing the system, gives the absorptions of the devices.
Device
Absorption
Notes
20582-14582 Tx flush-mounting 2M 2-RCA
35 mA
Equivalent to 3 By-me devices
01900 TX /DIN with FM radio
35 mA
Equivalent to 3 By-me devices
20584-14584 IR control for stereo
15 mA
Equivalent to 1 By-me device
20585-14585 TX docking station for iPod
35 mA
Equivalent to 3 By-me devices
20581-14581 RX with amplifier for flush mounting 150 mA max
1+1W (if powered via BUS)
Equivalent to 15 By-me devices
20581-14581 RX with amplifier for flush mounting 20 mA
1+1W (if powered via power supply 20580-14580)
Equivalent to 2 By-me devices
01901 RX with amplifier 10+10W /DIN, 230V ac
20 mA
Equivalent to 2 By-me devices
20586-14586 Microphone call module
35 mA
Equivalent to 3 By-me devices
WARNING: The absorptions given in the table are to be considered only for the audio devices and do not take account
of any other automation devices that may be connected to the By-me branch shunting terminal.
The high absorption of the receiver 1+1W 20581-14581 (if powered directly by the BUS and not through the auxiliary
power supply 20580-14580) has limits also as regards its distance from the system power supply, especially if it is
present in a number of points on the same branch.
With 1 receiver 20581-14581 powered by Bus
300 m
With 2 receivers 20581-14581 powered by Bus
150 m
With 3 receivers 20581-14581 powered by Bus
100 m
With 4 receivers 20581-14581 powered by Bus
75 m
These data refer to the case in which there is a number of receivers 1+1W (art.14581, 20581) on the same branch and
on the same side in relation to the By-me power supply 01801 (see figure below).
Receivers 1+1 W
01801
01902
20581
20581
20581
20581
Max 75 m
249
System constraints
Whereas, in the case in which the devices are always on opposite branches in relation to the By-me power supply, the
distance must be calculated in relation to the power supply counting the devices on the branch.
01902
01801
Receivers 1+1 W
Receivers 1+1 W
20581
20581
Max 150 m
20581
20581
Max 150 m
Therefore depending on the number of transmitters and receivers (and on their type) it is possible to calculate the
absorption of the system and therefore the number of power supplies necessary, that in any case can be at most 2.
If you want to install numerous receivers 1+1W (art. 20581-14581) it is advisable to use the auxiliary power supplies
20580-14580.
4.3 Number of devices
As regards the number of devices that can be used on the branches of the speaker system the following restrictions apply:
Description
Number
Notes
Maximum No. of inputs (transmit- 4
ters)
4 stereo channels
Maximum No. of “Audio” devices
(inputs, outputs, accessories)
64
Limit fixed by the input impedance of the
“audio” nodes.
No. of receivers not powered by
Bus
64 – no. of inputs – no. of Total: max 64 devices (transmitters, receivaccessories (shunts, decou- ers, accessories). Each receiver can choose
plers, etc).
the audio channel from the 4 available ones
No. of receivers powered by BUS A receiver powered via BUS The limits of the By-me power supplies
20581-14581
consumes as much as 15 01801 apply: 800mA
By-me devices: therefore max
4 devices per power supply
No. of branch shunts for the speak- 2
er system (art.01902) between a
transmitter and a receiver
Given the strong attenuation of the signal due to
the shunts, it is necessary to make sure that the
path between a transmitter and a receiver does
not pass more than 2 of them.
Max. No. of microphone modules 8
20586-14589
Possibility of making up to 8 different selective calls
No. of By-me “audio” shunts 01903 64
Each shunt enables shunting a By-me branch
beginning from the “audio” branch.
No. of By-me devices that can be con- 10
nected to the By-me “audio” shunt 01904
In each shunt created by the decoupler I can
connect max 10 By-me devices
250
Functionality
From what has been illustrated so far in relation to the topology, installation criteria and system constraints, we can
summarise that:
• installation is linear (in-out) with the possibility of shunting via the special branch shunts for the speaker system
01904.
• By-me devices must not be connected directly to the branch of the speaker system but only through the shunt 01903
or through the devices of the speaker system (special terminal on each device in the speaker system).
• A decoupling device is necessary to between the power supply and the audio transmission line: Bus line/speaker
system decoupler 01902
• Between the power supply and the By-me power supply/speaker system decoupler the line maintains the By-me
characteristics (free wiring, max 128 By-me devices).
• The shunts for the By-me branch 01903 enable shunting a By-me line with max 10 devices and free wiring from the
audio transmission line. There can be at most 64 shunts.
• The maximum distance between the transmitter and receiver is:
- 300 m if there are no shunts 01904 in between
- 200 m if there is one shunt 01904 in between
- 100 m if there are 2 shunts 01904 in between.
• The maximum number of speaker system devices is 64 (including the shunts, decouplers and miscellaneous accessories).
• From each speaker system device it is possible to shunt a mini By-me line with max. 3 devices.
• 2 power supplies can be used according to the absorption of the system; the second power supply can be connected
at any point on the audio transmission line (not necessarily at the end as in the previous diagram), but the connection
must always be made through the Bus line/speaker system decoupler 01902.
5. Functionality
As mentioned above, the main function of the speaker system is to transfer an audio signal from one point of the system
to another; thanks to the system devices, moreover, it is possible to create a wide range of functions so as to satisfy
every type of requirement:
• The transmitter module can be connected to any audio source (MP3, DVD players, Hi-Fi systems) through the RCA
connectors.
• The FM tuner transmitter module transmits the radio signal.
• The call microphone module enables making half-duplex voice communications.
• The receiver modules enable transmitting the audio source with a different power output according to the context
and the environment;
• The IR stereo control module enables controlling the Hi-Fi system with the By-me controls..
251
Functionality
5.1 Control buttons
The buttons perform commands that affect the whole zone with which they are associated. For instance it is possible to configure the By-me rocker switches to carry out actions such as switching the speaker
system on and off, adjusting the volume, switching the audio source (channel) and skipping to the next/previous track.
Rocker switch for switching on and off (brief pressure) and adjusting the volume (long pressure)
Rocker switch for switching to the audio source (top button) and skipping to the next track (bottom
button)
Important: The button for passing on to the next track takes on a different meaning depending on the transmitter
being controlled: in the case of the FM tuner it will pass on to the next station memory, while in the case of an iPod or
a HiFi system it will pass on to the next song.
5.2 Zone priority
If more than one zone is connected to the same channel, it is possible to associate a priority level to each one of these
zones; parallel to this, the only actions performed will be by the command modules (buttons, touchscreen, station,
etc.) associated with the zone that, at that moment, has the highest priority.
5.3 Microphone call
Besides playback it is possible to make voice calls by using the special microphone call module.
The call occupies one of the available channels and is transmitted by the receivers involved in the call; if the channel
is already used, all of the receivers tuned onto that channel will transmit the call according to the zone to which they
belong.
It is not possible to make two calls at the same time.
The following types of call are possible:
• General call that involves all the audio zones present in the system.
• Selective call that involves one or more audio zones chosen by the user in the phase of configuration
• Baby Control call that involves one or more audio zones chosen by the user in the phase of configuration and controlled by the local button.
•Audio Monitoring call that involves one or more audio zones chosen by the user in the phase of configuration and
controlled by the local button.
252
Functionality
5.4 Baby control function
The microphone module enables activating the selective call when the volume perceived by the microphone exceeds a
set threshold. If installed in a child’s room, the system puts the parents’ room into audio contact (Baby Control) according to the loudness of the noise.
The call is automatically deactivated if it remains below the threshold for a certain timeframe or if it is locally silenced by
pressing the microphone module button.
5.5 Audio monitoring function
Remote activation of the microphone module is possible and as a result also selective calls.
To do this it is necessary to configure a By-me push-button within the same group in which the microphone module is
configured or to configure a specific button on the touchscreen.
5.6 Alarm clock function
This function, activating one of the scenarios created by the user, enables turning on an audio zone for a specific time
period (configurable)
5.7 Timed shutdown function (Sleep)
On activating this function an audio zone is switched off after a specific (configurable) time interval. On receiving an OFF
message the receiver switches off even if it is in the timed switch-off period.
5.8 Silencing function
At the time of a certain event, the volume of a zone is automatically limited to a value of low loudness (configurable).
This function is used during a video door entry call.
5.9 Voice communications function
The system does not permit implementing intercommunicating communications but, by using the microphone module
and the receivers, it is possible to make one-way voice communication between two zones.
5.10 Scenarios
The speaker system devices can be integrated in the By-me Automation scenarios enriching the application opportunities offered by the system.
253
System components
6. System components
The By-me automation system enables controlling a speaker system using the control panel for configuring the devices
and for setting the operating parameters.
6.1 Control panel.
The control panel governs the operation of the entire system. It displays all the control information and is used for
preliminary programming, configuration and, more generally, manage the system in its various states of operation.
Control panel main screen.
To access the screen that displays the speaker system control menus it is sufficient to select Audio in the main menu
of the control panel.
The control panel will now display the icons relating to the options most frequently used by the user:
• Zone (on or off): turns the selected audio zone on/off.
• Audio source: selects the source of the audio signal to transmit in the audio zone
• Details: displays the control menu of the associated transmitter module.
• Next: switches onto the next track depending on the type of transmitter.
254
System components
6.2 Audio input with 2 RCA connectors, automatic volume adjustment, integrated line terminator.
This device is used, via the 2 RCA connectors, to acquire, digitalize and transmit a generic analogical audio source
(for instance a Hi-Fi system, CD player, portable MP3 player, etc.) over the By-me Bus.
The By-me Bus is galvanically decoupled from the audio inputs.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20582: 2 Eikon modules
14582: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Protection class: IP30
- Galvanic decoupling of the audio inputs in relation to the By-me bus.
- Possibility of manual control of the input volume.
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Consumption: 35 mA.
- Possibility of programming the relevant group via the control panel
- Push-button for configuration and manual setting of the volume
- Two-colour LED for configuration and manual setting of the volume
Indicators
- red LED: on steady during the configuration phase;
- green LED on steady: the device is lit;
- green LED blinking fast: control phase to raise the volume of the device
- green LED blinking slow: control phase to lower the volume of the device
- orange LED (fixed or blinking): volume approaching the highest threshold
Operation
This device enables transmitting via bus the audio signal from an analogue sound source (all the audio sources marked
with the "headphones" symbol are suitable).
When the device is active the LED, if enabled via the control panel, is a steady green light; whereas the LED becomes
orange if the input signal volume approaches the maximum threshold.
The optimal setting for the volume is obtained when the LED is mainly lit green and the orange LED rarely comes on.
Note: A volume that is too high can distort the audio signal.
255
System components
Settings which can be configured directly from the device
To adjust the sensitivity of the audio inputs on the device manually, proceed as follows:
- Activate the device (status LED on) by switching on a listening zone.
- Press and hold down the configuration button to increase the sensitivity.
The LED blinks quickly; if the maximum value is reached, or in any case on releasing the button, the LED will return to
its normal operating status.
- Press and hold down the configuration button to decrease the sensitivity.
The LED blinks slowly; when the minimum value is reached, or in any case on releasing the button, the LED will return
to its normal operating status.
- Whenever the configuration push-button is pressed, the sensitivity adjustment is inverted.
It is possible to run through the whole sensitivity adjustment scale, from the minimum to the maximum value and vice
versa in approximately 60 sec.
As in normal operation, also while making the adjustment, the orange LED will light up to indicate that the intensity of
the input audio is approaching the maximum threshold.
The optimum adjustment is reached when the orange LED is seen to light up with a certain frequency. A LED that is
always green indicates too low an input signal; a LED that is always orange indicates too high an input signal.
Settings that can be configured via the control panel
• LED control: Normal/Off; default value Normal
If the device is active the green LED is lit.
• Mono/Stereo: default value Stereo.
Select the type of signal supplied on the RCA connectors; use the LEFT input for mono signals.
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select Device Reset and press the device configuration button; the red
LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.).
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
256
System components
6.3 FM radio tuner with RDS, coaxial connector for external FM aerial, integrated line terminator,
installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 2 modules of 17.5 mm.
The FM tuner 01900 is able to send the digital audio signal and the RDS messages received by radio over the bus. The
FM tuner receives the radio stations (with the related RDS information) in the 87.50 - 108.00 MHz band and in addition
allows saving up to 8 different radio stations, to then be able to call them up with commands sent over the Bus by the
By-me control devices or save in the scenarios.
NB: If the radio function is included in the scenarios, together with the groups of the receivers also the radio module
must be added so as to save the station to call up.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Consumption: 35 mA
- Dissipated power: 1 W
- Installation: on DIN rail (60715 TH35), size 2 modules
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Configuration button
- Two-colour LED for configuring and indicating ON/OFF status of operation
- F-type female connector for external antenna
- Jumper to insert the line termination
- Jumper to select the type of antenna (1 = external antenna on connector F; 2 = use the Bus cable as an antenna)
Indicators
- red LED: on steady during the configuration phase;
- green LED on steady: the device is lit;
Operation
The FM radio receiver with RDS 01900 is used as a digital audio signal transmitter within the speaker system. It therefore receives the FM radio signal of the station tuned to, digitalizes it and sends it to the various receiver devices of the
system that requested it.
The main functions of the device are:
• Enabling or disabling the transmission of the audio content related to the FM radio (ON / OFF)
• Selecting a specific radio station
• Tuning onto the previous or next frequency in steps of 5 kHz
• Automatic frequency search with SNR above a given settable threshold
• Saving up to 8 different radio stations
• Possibility of calling up a specific memory/station (also from a scenario)
• Scanning the memories in succession in both increasing and decreasing directions
• Scenario management, calling up a specific radio station on activating the scenario
• Compatibility with the call mechanism: the device frees the audio transmission channel if the call takes place on the
same channel it uses (the "call" is a service provided by other "transmitter" devices of the speaker system).
• Sending information related to the tuned frequency
• Sending information related to the strength of the radio signal received (RSSI)
• Sending information related to the On / Off status
257
System components
Settings which can be configured directly from the device
• To set the type of antenna, that is to say external on connector F or internal on the bus, you need to use the jumper
situated next to the antenna connector as shown in the figure, that is:
1.Antenna on connector F: Connect together pins 3 with 5 and 4 with 6
2.Antenna on bus: Connect together pins 3 with 1 and 4 with 2
To set the FM radio input volume manually, proceed as follows:
- Activate the device (status LED on) by switching on a listening zone.
- Press and hold down the configuration button to increase the volume.
The LED blinks quickly; if the maximum value is reached, or in any case on releasing the button, the LED will return
to its normal operating status.
- Press and hold down the configuration button to decrease the volume.
The LED blinks slowly; when the minimum value is reached, or in any case on releasing the button, the LED will return
to its normal operating status.
- Whenever the configuration button is pressed, the volume adjustment is inverted.
It is possible to run through the whole sensitivity adjustment scale, from the minimum to the maximum value and vice
versa in approximately 90 sec.
As in normal operation, also while making the adjustment, the orange LED will light up to indicate that the input volume
is approaching the maximum threshold. The optimum adjustment is reached when the orange LED is seen to light up
with a certain frequency. A LED that is always green indicates too low an input volume; a LED that is always orange
indicates too high an input volume.
Settings that can be configured via the control panel
• LED control: Normal/Off; default value Normal.
If the device is active the green LED lights up to indicate information on the volume of the radio, otherwise it is off. If
this parameter is set with the value 0, the green LED always remains off.
• Mono/Stereo: default value Stereo.
Selects the type of signal to transmit over the bus
• Percentage level of SNR: Default value 10%.
It is used during automatic frequency searching
• RDS On: default value On.
This value allows the device to send the RDS information over the bus (when available).
If set to Off, the device sends no information.
• RSSI On: default value On.
This value allows the device to send the RSSI (received signal strength indication) information over the bus.
If set to Off, the device sends no information.
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select Device Reset and press the device configuration button; the red
LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.).
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device;
- deletes the scenarios;
- deletes the saved stations.
258
System components
6.4 Control equipment with two toggle switches and 8 ohm 1 + 1 W amplifier, incorporated line
terminator, to be completed with 1 or 2 module interchangeable buttons
This device enables playing the audio data received on the Bus through the speakers connected to its outputs. In
addition, on the front of the device there are two rocker switches that can be configured for audio or automation
functions (control of lights, roller shutters, etc.).
It is supplied in the following versions:
20581: 2 Eikon modules
14581: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Auxiliary power supply (possible in the case of high consumption) (Vn): 32V d.c.
- Terminals:
1) 2 for the bus
2) 2 for a bus output for connecting up to 3 By-me devices
3) 2 for the auxiliary power supply at 32V
4) 4 for the connection to the 2 audio speakers
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- Consumption on the bus: 150 mA max. if powered via BUS
20 mA if connected to auxiliary power supply
- Possibility of programming the relevant group of both buttons and receiver via the control panel
- Configuration button
- Central red configuration LED
- Two front rocker switches with the following possible functions:
1) On/Off audio zone plus volume adjustment
2) Changing track and audio source
3) Sleep (timed switch-off)
4) Audio monitoring (implementable only if configured in a group with microphone call devices)
5) ON/OFF switch
6) Dimmer control
7) Roller shutters control
8) Activation of 2 scenarios
- Two green LEDs located in the middle of the 2 rocker switches with functions that can be configured via the control panel
Configuration
Configuration must be done with the device without the button cap to be able to press
the central configuration button.
• Functional blocks: 3 (2 buttons, 1 audio receiver).
Each functional block can belong to at most 4 groups except for the receiver functional block that can belong to one
group only.
• Selection of the functional block in the configuration phase:
- Press the central button;
- Within 3 s, press the right-hand button to select the right functional block or the left-hand button to select the left
functional block; the red LED will light up.
If neither button is pressed within approximately 3 s the red LED will light up; in this case, the selected functional block
is the third one, the one for the audio receiver;
259
System components
- With the red LED on, the control unit will configure the functional block; at the end of this operation the LED will go
out.
Parameters
• For the functional blocks related to the two buttons it is possible to set the operating mode:
- On/Off audio zone plus volume adjustment
- Changing track and audio source
- Sleep (timed switch-off)
- Audio monitoring
- ON/OFF button;
- dimmer control;
- roller shutters control;
- scenario command;
• Operation as On/Off audio zone plus volume adjustment:
- pressing the top button for less than 0.5 s switches on the associated audio zone with the saved volume and channel;
- pressing the top button for more than 0.5 s increases the volume until it is released;
- pressing the bottom button for more than 0.5 s decreases the volume until it is released;
- pressing the bottom button for less than 0.5 s switches off the associated audio zone.
• Operation as changing track and audio source:
- on pressing the top button the device sends a change audio channel message and then the associated audio zone
"listens" to the next audio source;
- on pressing the bottom button the device sends a request to change track.
• Operation as Sleep button:
- on pressing the top button the device sends a timed switch-off request.
• Operation as audio monitoring:
- on pressing the top button the device sends a request to activate the audio monitoring service configured in the
associated microphone module;
- on pressing the bottom button the device sends a request to switch off the audio monitoring service configured in
the associated microphone module;
• Operation as OnOff:
- on pressing the top button the device sends a request to switch on the associated audio zone
- on pressing the bottom button the device sends a request to switch off the associated audio zone.
• Operation as dimmer control:
- pressing the top button for less than 0.5 s switches on the associated load with the dimming at the saved point;
- pressing the top button for more than 0.5 s increases the brightness of the associated load until it is released;
- pressing the bottom button for more than 0.5 s decreases the brightness of the associated load until it is released;
- pressing the bottom button for less than 0.5 s switches off the associated load.
• Operation as roller shutters control:
- pressing the top button for more than 0.5 s opens the roller shutter completely; it stops when fully open or when
briefly pressing the button (either above or below);
- pressing the bottom button for more than 0.5 s closes the roller shutter completely; it stops when fully closed or
when briefly pressing the button (either above or below).
• LED parameters:
- LED disabled;
- LED with normal operation;
260
System components
- LED with reverse operation;
- LED always on for location in the dark;
- central LED with normal operation;
- central LED with reverse operation;
- central LED always on for location in the dark.
If the functional block belongs to more than one group, the command is confirmed with a change in LED status that
lasts approximately 3 s.
If a double button is used, it is necessary to set the central LED behaviour to make the status visible. In this case,
configure the left-hand button only.
• Parameters of the audio zone to which the receiver belongs (3rd functional unit)
- priority
- sleep time (timed switch-off);
- max volume of the zone
- max switch-on volume
- call volume
- max silencing volume
- behaviour of the zone switched off in the case of a general call
- behaviour of the zone switched off in the case of a selective call made to it
Scenarios
Each rocker switch can be dedicated to activation of one or two scenarios. The receiver can belong to up to 4 different scenarios and, for each scenario, save the status (volume and channel) to retrieve when activating the scenario
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select Device Reset and press the button on the device; the red LED will
light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.).
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
6.5 Stereo amplifier with 2 outputs for speakers 8 ohm 10 + 10 W , power supply 110-230 V 50-60
Hz, integrated line terminator, installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 6 modules size 17.5
mm.
The stereo amplifier 01901 enables playing the audio signal received on the Bus through the speakers connected to
its outputs.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: 110-230V~, 50-60Hz
- Terminals:
1) 2 for the speaker system bus
2) 2 for a bus output for connecting up to 3 By-me devices
3) 2 for the power supply at 110-230V~
4) 4 for the connection to the 2 audio speakers
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
261
System components
- Consumption on the bus: 20 mA
- Possibility of programming the receiver zone via the control panel
- Configuration button
- Installation: on DIN rail (60715 TH35), size 6 modules
- Red/green two-colour LED:
1) on red during configuration
2) blinking red following overheating of the amplifier
3) green to signal the state of the receiver, depending on the LED control parameter (which can be set at the time
of configuration).
Configuration
During configuration, the audio receiver block saves the parameters and settings to work in its audio zone. This functional block can belong to only one group.
At the time of configuration, when the control panel asks you to press the device button, it is sufficient to press the
device configuration button. The red LED emits a steady light that goes out at the end of configuration or after pressing the configuration button again.
Parameters
• LED control
• Power reduction
Besides these parameters there are the typical ones of the relevant zone:
• Priority;
• Sleep time (timed switch-off);
• Max volume of the zone
• Max. switch-on volume
• Call volume
• Max. silencing volume
• Behaviour of the zone switched off in the case of a general call
• Behaviour of the zone switched off in the case of a selective call
Scenarios
The receiver can belong to up to 4 different scenarios and, for each scenario, save the status (volume and channel)
to retrieve when activating the scenario.
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select Device Reset and press the button on the device; the red LED will
light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.).
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
262
System components
6.6 Docking station for iPod and iPhone devices, supplied with power supply - 2 modules.
(The article is composed of 2 appliances of 2 modules each, can be installed also separately)
The docking station is a transmitter device that enables connecting audio sources such as iPod/iPhone (or other mp3
players, CD players, etc.) to the speaker system; the docking station acquires, digitalizes and sends over the By-me
bus the signal of one of the analogue audio sources connected to it.
The device not only sends an audio signal to the receiver devices, but also remotely controls the iPod/iPhone (play/
pause, skip+/- song, database navigation, playback property settings), by sending the appropriate commands over
the bus.
The By-me bus is galvanically decoupled from the audio inputs (connector for iPod/iPhone or 3.5mm stereo jack).
It is supplied in the following versions:
20585: 2 Eikon modules
14585: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Consumption: 35 mA
- Galvanic decoupling of the audio inputs in relation to the By-me bus.
- Protection class: IP30
- Possibility of manual control of the input sensitivity.
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975…)
- 30-pin connector for Apple iPod/iPhone devices.
- Auxiliary 3.5 mm stereo jack for external audio sources (iPod/iPhone audio automatically excluded when the jack is in).
- Push-button for configuration and manual setting of the input sensitivity.
- Two-colour LED for configuration, manual setting of the input sensitivity and indication of the ON/OFF status of operation
Indicators
- red LED: on steady during the configuration phase;
• red LED flashing for about 60 s: indicates either no or incorrect voltage on the input terminal (5V -1A) for charging
the iPod/iPhone;
- green LED on steady: the device is lit;
- green LED blinking fast: control phase to raise the device input sensitivity
- green LED blinking slow: control phase to lower the device input sensitivity
- orange LED (fixed or blinking) : input signal approaching the highest threshold
When the device is active the LED, if enabled via the control panel, is a steady green light whereas it becomes orange
if the input audio signal approaches the value beyond which distortion is produced.
The optimal setting for the input signal is obtained when the LED is mainly lit green and rarely becomes orange.
Note: An input signal that is too high can distort the audio signal.
Operation
The docking station enables connecting an iPod/iPhone to the speaker system and controlling its main functions of
navigation and playback; in addition, the device charges the batteries of the iPod/iPhone.
The remote controls are always available (both from the control panel and from the controls of the speaker system)
and are the following:
• Play/Pause: starts/stops playback of the selected song.
• Skip Next/Previous: plays the next or previous song in the playlist.
263
System components
If the device remote control mode is also enabled, via the control panel it is possible to navigate within the database
of the connected iPod/iPhone and if necessary select the songs to play.
The additional controls of the remote control mode are the following:
• Select the navigation category (choose from Playlists, Artists)
• Next/Previous Playlist: displaying the next or previous Playlist
• Next/Previous Artist: displaying the next or previous Artist
• Next/Previous Album: displaying the next or previous Album
• Next/Previous Song: displaying the next or previous Song
• Display information on the the song currently being played: title of the song, name of the artist and title of the album.
• Select the song playback mode (Shuffle):
1.Shuffle OFF
2.Shuffle Songs
3.Shuffle Albums
• Select the song playback mode (Repeat):
4.Repeat OFF
5.Repeat 1 Song
6.Repeat all Songs
Important: The changes to the Shuffle and Repeat settings that are made while the iPod/iPhone is connected to the
docking station have effect only as long as the device remains connected and therefore do not change those previously
set. These settings will be restored as soon as the Apple device is disconnected from the docking station.
IMPORTANT: The 30-pin connector can be used only for connecting and charging iPod/iPhone devices. The list of
compatible Apple products is given on the label on the outside of the packing of the docking station 20585-14585.
The 3.5mm auxiliary jack input enables connecting different sound sources to the iPod/iPhone (for example, MP3 players, CD players etc.); inserting such a jack automatically cuts off the audio coming from the iPod/iPhone.
Important: It is not possible to control external players connected via the auxiliary jack and therefore not even receive
information about them.
Settings which can be configured directly from the device
To manually adjust the sensitivity of the audio inputs on the device, proceed as follows:
- Activate the device (status LED on) by switching on a listening zone.
- Press and hold the configuration push-button to increase the sensitivity.
The LED blinks rapidly; when the maximum value is reached or the push-button is released, the LED returns to its
normal operating status.
- Press and hold the configuration push-button to decrease the sensitivity.
The LED blinks slowly; when the minimum value is reached or the push-button is released, the LED returns to its
normal operating status.
- Whenever the configuration push-button is pressed, the sensitivity adjustment is inverted.
It is possible to run through the whole sensitivity adjustment scale, from the minimum to the maximum value and vice
versa in approximately 60 sec.
Just as in normal operation, during adjustment the illumination of the orange LED indicates that the input audio intensity is approaching the maximum threshold.
The optimal setting is reached when the orange LED lights up rather frequently; the green LED on steady indicates too
low an input signal while the orange LED on steady indicates too high an input signal.
264
System components
Settings that can be configured via the control panel
• LED control: Normal/Off; default value Normal
If the device is active the green LED is lit, otherwise it is off; if this parameter is set with the value Off, the green LED
always remains off.
• Mono/Stereo: default value Stereo.
Select how the input audio signal must be handled.
By setting Stereo, the right and left channels are treated as independent; with the Mono setting only the "left" channel
audio line is used that is then duplicated on the "right" channel.
• Control: Remote/Local (default value Remote).
- Remote: it is possible (via the control panel or touchscreen) to control the connected Apple device completely,
however this disables the interface for the local controls of the iPod/iPhone.
- Local: the local interface remains active for navigation on the iPod/iPhone, while remote control is reduced to only
the Play / Pause and Skip Next / Previous controls
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select Device Reset and press the device configuration button; the red
LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.).
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
6.7 Microphone for selective or general call, voice activation function to control the children
(Baby Control) and for audio monitoring - 2 modules
The microphone 20586-14586 is a transmitter device capable of picking up the signal detected by the built-in audio
source and transmitting it, via a call procedure, to specific zones in the system (selective calls) or to all the zones
(general call). The zones involved in the call switch over the receivers onto the carrier channel signalled by the call, they
play back the audio content picked up by the microphone and finally, after the end of call message, they recommence
the operation immediately prior to the call.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20586: 2 Eikon modules
14586: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Terminals:
1) 2 for the speaker system bus
2) 2 for a By-Me bus output for connecting up to 3 By-Me devices
- Operating temperature: -5 to +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: flush or surface mounting (with surface mounting box 09975..)
- Consumption: 35 mA
- Configuration button
- Central red configuration LED
- Maximum number of microphones that can be installed in the system: 8
265
System components
- Front right-hand rocker switch that can be configured with the following functions:
- If configured in an audio output group:
1) On/Off audio zone plus volume adjustment
2) Changing track and audio source
3) Sleep (timed switch-off of an audio zone)
- If configured in a Call group
1) Audio Monitoring command, if configured with a remote call module
2) General and Selective Call command if configured with the local call module (primary function of the button
associated with the interchangeable buttons provided in the package).
- If configured in an automation group:
1) ON/OFF switch
2) Dimmer control
3) Roller shutters control
4) Scenario control
- Bottom left-hand front push-button associated with the module's Baby-Control function - Two green LEDs positioned in the centre of the 2 rocker switches with control panel configurable functionality - Jumpers to insert audio
line termination
Configuration
• Functional Units: 2 (right-hand rocker switch and microphone transmitter).
The functional unit related to the button, when not associated with the transmitter on which it resides, can belong to
at most 4 groups; the microphone transmitter functional unit can belong to one group only.
• Selection of the functional block in the configuration phase:
a. Press the central button;
b. Within 3 s, press the right-hand rocker switch to select the “right-hand rocker switch” functional unit or the lower
left-hand button to select the “microphone transmitter” functional unit; the red LED will light up.
c. With the red LED on, the control unit will configure the functional block; at the end of this operation the LED will
go out.
Operation
In the standard configuration of the front buttons, the following functions can be used:
• “Push To Talk” general call.
Instantaneous call on pressing the top right-hand front button and directed to all the system's zones; they will transmit
the voice signal picked up by the device's microphone as long as the button is kept pressed.
The call ends when the button is released.
By using the control panel or EasyTool Professional LT, it will be possible to set the behaviour of every zone following
a General call (for example the behaviour of the zone if switched off, the call playback volume, etc.).
• “Push To Talk” selective call.
Instantaneous call on pressing the bottom right-hand front button and directed to a subset of system zones; by using
the control panel or EasyTool Professional LT, it is possible to set the zones receiving the selective call by accessing
the device parameters (on the control panel the parameter is "Call Zone").
Only the audio zones corresponding to the selected ones, indicated in the selective call start message, will switch onto
the call channel and will transmit the user message as long as the button is kept pressed.
The call ends when the button is released.
By using the control panel or EasyTool Professional LT, it will be possible to set the behaviour of every zone following
a Selective call (for example the behaviour of the zone if switched off, the call playback volume, etc.).
266
System components
• “Baby Control” service.
To turn this function on/off simply press and then release the bottom front left-hand button that will be followed by
the LED signal.
Once the function has been activated, if the volume of the voice signal picked up by the microphone exceeds the set
threshold, a selective call is sent to a set of system zones; the threshold value can be set with the control panel ("Baby
Control Threshold" parameter) or with Easy Tool Professional LT.
The call remains active until a few seconds after the audio has returned under the threshold value to then reactivate
automatically when later on the threshold gets exceeded.
By using the control panel ("Baby Control Zones" parameter) or Easy Tool Professional LT, it is possible to set the zones
intended for the Baby Control service
The typical application of this function is monitoring children during their rest.
• Audio Monitoring.
This function enables remote activation of the call microphone with a By-me automation button provided that both
devices are configured in the same group.
It is then possible to monitor the audio of a specific room; this audio monitoring function is accomplished with the
By-me button that activates a selective call, initiated by the microphone module, for a set of system zones .
By using the control panel ("Audio Monitoring Zones" parameter) or Easy Tool Professional LT, it is possible to set the
zones for Audio Monitoring.
IMPORTANT:
• As an alternative to the standard configuration, that is forgoing "Push To Talk Calls" and maintaining the "Baby
Control" and "Audio Monitoring" function, the two right-hand buttons of the microphone 20586-14586 can be used
as By-Me automation commands (lights, roller shutters, audio).
To do this, simply configure the right-hand rocker switch of the microphone in a lights or audio group.
• If there are a number of microphones 20586-14586 in an installation, only one active Call is permissible (general or
selective) in the system irrespective of audio channel availability.
• During call playback, the central LED of the rocker switches of the microphones 20586-14586 signal there is a call
by blinking (obviously this happens if the rocker switch is configured for the call functions).
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select Device Reset and press the device configuration button; the red
LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.).
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
267
System components
6.8 Interface for transmitting By-me commands to IR receiver, together with 3 m cable.
The IR interface enables controlling audio sources (stereo combo, CD/DVD players, etc) learning and emulating the
commands of the original remote control of the equipment to control. Associated with an RCA transmitter (art. 2058214582) it then allows having sound sources controlled directly by the By-me system.
It is supplied in the following versions:
20584: 2 Eikon modules
14584: 2 Plana modules
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Terminals: 2 for the By-me bus
- 2.5mm jack connector
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: recess-mounting 1 module
- Consumption: 20 mA
- Possibility of programming the group via the control panel (it must be associated with an RCA input module)
- Possibility of recording and repeating max. 12 buttons of an infrared remote control
- Configuration button
- Two-colour LED for configuring and indicating infrared transmission and reception
- 3 m cable with 2.5mm jack and IR transmitter (supplied)
Indicators
- red LED: on steady during the configuration phase;
- green LED on steady: the device is lit;
• blinking green LED: reception of a By-me command that requires sending IR commands
• blinking red LED: error in managing/recording an IR control
• blinking orange LED: reception of the By-me command for starting the learning phase and waiting for the configuration button to be pressed
• orange LED on steady: starting recording phase and waiting for an IR remote control button to send an infrared code
Operation
The device is able to save the button of an infrared remote control and repeat its operation after a By-me command.
When the interface is active the LED, if enabled on the control panel, is lit steady on green; it flashes briefly each time
a By-me command is received that involves sending IR commands.
It is possible to acquire up to 12 actions (action = repetition of an infrared remote control button) that, in the control
panel menu, are named as follows:
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Button 5
Button 6
Button 7
Button 8
Button 9
Button 10
Button 11
Button 12
268
System components
Operation is ensured when, starting with the actions, the following commands thus named on the control panel are
coded:
Command
Meaning
On
Powering up the device, selecting the source and starting playing
Off
The device goes onto stand-by
Skip +
Next track/memory
Skip -
Select previous track/memory
Play
Start playing
Stop
Stop playing
Pause
Pause playing
Resume
Exit pause and start playing again
Sel. Source 1
Select source 1
Sel. Source 2
Select source 2
Sel. Source 3
Select source 3
Each command can be coded as the sequence of 1, 2, 3 or 4 actions and this corresponds to consecutively pressing
up to 4 buttons on the remote control of the controlled device.
Configuration
The IR interface 20584-14584 is configured by the control panel in two phases:
1.Record button of a remote control (action)
2.Associate actions with the actual command.
Record button of a remote control
Menu Setup Configuration  Group management Audio Groups
Enter the Group and select the IR interface by scrolling through the list of functional units; then press the Param.
button.
Select Acquire Actions and press the Selection button.
The control panel will read the actions already configured in the IR interface and will show them on the display: all
the actions already configured will be marked P .
Select which action you want to save from the list to the IR interface and activate recording by pressing On; the
device LED will flash orange.
Press the configuration button of the interface 20584-14584; the orange LED will be lit steady.
N.B In this phase, pressing the Stop button will not stop the operation. To do this, it is sufficient to briefly press the
IR interface configuration button or wait approximately 10 seconds to exit automatically.
Move the remote control near to the IR interface (to a distance of about 10 cm) and continuously press the button
you want to record.
269
System components
If acquisition is successful, the interface LED will flash green; the acquired action will be marked P and displayed on
the control panel in the list of actions.
Otherwise the action will not be authenticated and the interface LED will flash red.
To cancel an action already authenticated it is sufficient to choose it from the list and press Del.
If the acquisition has not correctly succeeded carry out the following check:
- position the remote control towards the window of the IR interface at a distance of about 10 cm;
- if the orange LED does not become red or green (flashing) check the operation of the remote control button on the
audio device;
- check that the infrared frequency of the audio device is between 30kHz and 60kHz;
- if the LED is blinking red try the entire sequence again.
As regards the remote control, you should save the buttons that are generally used for the ON, OFF, SKIP, PLAY, STOP,
PAUSE and source selection (in the case of a multi-source device) operations and in the table below note down the
reference between the name of the memory used and the corresponding remote control button.
Action
Remote control button
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Button 5
Button 6
Button 7
Button 8
Button 9
Button 10
Button 11
Button 12
The following page gives an example of configuring the remote control buttons and filling in the above table.
270
System components
Associate actions with the actual command.
This menu is used to create the commands associating up to 4 already recorded actions.
Menu Setup Configuration  Group management Audio Groups
Enter the Group and select the IR interface by scrolling through the list of functional units; then press the Param.
button.
Select Associate Actions and press the Selection button.
Use the Commands option to choose the command you want to define and press Confirm.
Under the Commands selection line there are 4 selection fields ("action 1", "action 2", "action 3", "action 4") each
of which represents an action associated with the command; the 4 fields will indicate "None" if there is no associated action.
It is now possible in each field to choose any of the recorded actions; the fields are indexed from 1 to 4 that is the
order in which the actions will be performed by the command.
Lastly press the Save button that causes the data to be transferred to the IR device.
By pressing the Check button it is possible to verify actuation of the commands and receive confirmation that the
programming is correct
On the screen for the parameters of the IR interface there are another two parameters
- LED control: (Default value 1 = enabled) If the device is active the green LED is lit.
- Inter-time: (default value 1 s). Time in seconds that must pass between one repetition of an IR button and another
one, that is between consecutive actions mapped within the same command.
If the consecutive actions refer to the same button, the inter-time is not applied.
Example.
Action
Remote control button
Button 1
POWER
Button 2
SKIP+
Button 3
SKIP-
Button 4
PLAY
Button 5
STOP
Button 6
PAUSE
Button 7
CD
Button 8
RADIO
Button 9
AUX
Button 10
-
Button 11
-
Button 12
-
271
System components
Command
Action 1
Action 2
Action 3
Action 4
On
Button 1
Button 7
Button 4
None
Off
Button 5
Button 1
None
None
Skip+
Button 2
None
None
None
Skip-
Button 3
None
None
None
Play
Button 4
None
None
None
Stop
Button 5
None
None
None
Pause
Button 6
None
None
None
Resume
Button 4
None
None
None
Sel. Source 1
Button 7
None
None
None
Sel. Source 2
Button 8
None
None
None
Sel. Source 3
Button 9
None
None
None
In the example above note that the On command is coded as the playback sequence of Button 1, Button 7 and
Button 4 that correspond to pressing the POWER, CD and PLAY buttons of the original remote control in sequence.
The operation of switching on is then associated with the actions of the three buttons indicated alternated by the
inter-time parameter that causes switching on the device, selecting the CD source and starting playback as required
for the Power On command.
Device reset
On the control panel, via the specific menu, select "Device Reset" and press the device configuration button; the red
LED will light up. Hold down the button until the LED goes out (approximately 10 sec.)
Resetting:
- deletes the groups;
- resets the default parameters;
- deletes the physical address of the device.
The Reset operation does not delete the memory of the infrared remote control buttons or the coding of any commands.
Summary of signals of IR interface 20584-14584
Problem
During the phase of adding a
device the monitor of the control
panel shows the notice "not a valid
Cause
Solution
There is no association with an
RCA 2-input device.
First add an RCA 2-input device and
then the IR interface to the group.
The green status LED does not
come on or does not flash.
The green status LED does not
come on or does not flash yet.
272
Check that the LED parameter is
enabled.
Before being able to receive
other types of commands, the
IR interface must be on
Send the on command (if enabled,
the green LED must be on steady to
receive other commands)
System components
Problem
Cause
The audio system is not controlled.
A command does not produce
the desired function.
Solution
Check that, on sending the By-me command, the green LED blinks.
Check the IR cable; it must be positioned about 1 cm from the receiver. If
necessary, before positioning the transmitter with the adhesive, test the send
sequence varying the position.
Check you have recorded the button
for the desired command with the corresponding By-me command.
While having been correctly
coded, it might not be sufficient to send the command
by pressing the associated IR
button just once.
Map the repetition of the same Button
on the same Command in consecutive
positions.
For example, the Play command could
be coded as Action 1 = Button 4, Action
2 = Button 4, Action 3 = None, Action
4 = None (this is presuming you have
saved the Play button of the remote
control on Button 4). This action causes
repeated pressing of the play button
associated with the Play command.
6.9 Decoupler for Bus line / speaker system for By-me power supply, integrated line terminator,
installation on DIN rail (60715 TH35), occupies 2 modules of 17.5 mm.
The line decoupler 01902 is the device that divides the By-me system into:
- automation part (free wiring, BUS cable art. 01840);
- speaker system part (in-out linear wiring, BUS cable art. 01840.B).
The speaker system is therefore delimited by this device that depending on the case can be directly connected at the
output to the power supply 01801 or to the line coupler 01845 or directly to the Bus of the automation part.
Technical characteristics
- Rated supply voltage: BUS 29 V
- Operating temperature: -5 - +45 °C (for indoor use)
- Installation: on DIN rail (60715 TH35), size 2 modules
6.10 Tap-off for By-me command devices, flush mounting (retrofit).
The shunt 01903 is used for shunting from the speaker system line (in-out linear wiring, Bus cable art.01840.B) to
make an automation branch (free wiring, Bus cable art.01840) to which can be connected up to 10 By-me devices.
6.11 Branch tap-off for speaker system devices, flush mounting (retrofit)
The shunt 01904 is used for shunting two new audio branches from a speaker system line thus making it possible to
create a star. This solution is useful in all those cases where the linear wiring is difficult or not feasible.
273
Group/zone management
7. Group/zone definition
To configure the system it is necessary, first of all, to create the groups/zones for the speaker system; the procedure to
follow is similar to the one for creating home automation system groups (Automations, Load Control, HVAC control, etc.).
See also the Automation section on page 22.
7.1 Managing audio groups
7.1.1 Creating a group
When creating groups it is necessary to follow some rules concerning the logical subdivision of the parts comprising
the audio system.
The maximum number of groups relating to the transmitter modules is equal to 4 except for the microphone call
module whose maximum number is 8.
First create the groups where there are transmitters adding, for each group, a single transmitter (for example Audio
source 1, etc.); it is advised to choose names containing the name of the room.
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Management  Audio Groups
7.1.2 Removing a group
Menu  Setup  Configuration  Group Management Audio Groups
It is a good rule to configure the transmitter devices first; then create the groups related to the receiver modules
and the control buttons (including those connected to the automation line).
Scroll through the groups as far as the one to delete, press Remove and confirm with YES.
It is not possible to remove a group as long as it is associated with an Audio zone.
7.2 Managing audio zones
7.2.1 Creating an audio zone
Menu  Audio  Setup Audio zone management  Select 01 New zone  Select
The control panel displays the audio groups created in the configuration menu related to the receiver modules.
Using the Select button, set the group for the desired zone. The control panel confirms the operation and returns
the screen to the list of registered zones. To associate other groups repeat the operation on New zone.
7.2.2 Removing an audio zone
Menu  Setup Audio zone management
Select the zone to remove by pressing Select; then press Delete and confirm with YES.
7.2.3 Setting an audio zone
For each configured audio zone, this enables setting the parameters associated with it (not frequent).
Menu  Audio  Setup Setting Audio zones
Select the zone and press Select to confirm; then proceed to set the parameters following the instructions given
in the paragraphs below.
274
Group/zone definition
To change the numerical values press Edit and set the desired value using the  and  buttons; confirm with
Set and at the end of the operation press the Save button.
Menu  Audio  Setup Audio zone management  Select 01 New zone  Select
The control panel displays the audio groups created in the configuration menu related to the receiver modules.
Using the Select button, set the group for the desired zone. The control panel confirms the operation and returns
the screen to the list of registered zones. To associate other groups repeat the operation on New zone.
n Priority
An audio channel can be transmitted from one or more zones simultaneously by tuning onto a specific transmitter module.
The control buttons for the various zones can perform actions involving the transmitter module (change radio
station, play/stop a song); therefore the command generated by one zone could also affect the sound in another.
This parameter determines the right to execute these commands, that will be performed if one zone has a
priority greater than or equal to another.
3= maximum priority
0= minimum priority
n Audio source
One zone transmits the audio source selected by the user in the specific menu.
This parameter enables selecting which audio sources must be considered as active for this zone.
Scroll through the list of channels using the  and  buttons and select the desired ones by pressing
Select.
At the end of the operation press Save.
n Maximum volume
This parameter sets the maximum value of the volume used by the receivers in this zone as a percentage.
0= minimum value
100= maximum value
Note: For uniformity it is advised to create audio zones with receivers that all have the same sound power.
n Maximum switch-on volume
This parameter sets the maximum value of the volume used by the receivers in this zone at the time of
switching on as a percentage.
0= minimum value
100= maximum value
Note: For uniformity it is advised to create audio zones with receivers that all have the same sound power.
n Call volume
This parameter sets the value used by the receivers in this zone at the time of the voice microphone call on
as a percentage.
0= minimum value
100= maximum value
n Maximum silencing volume
This parameter sets as a percentage the maximum value used by the receivers in this zone at the time of
the request for operation in Silencing mode.
0= minimum value
100= maximum value
275
Group/zone management
n Maximum silencing volume
This parameter sets as a percentage the maximum value used by the receivers in this zone at the time of the
request for operation in Silencing mode.
0= minimum value
100= maximum value
n Timed switch-off function
This parameter sets the time in minutes after which the zone is switched off; the time is counted by the
receivers from the moment the dedicated command is received.
0= minimum value
300= maximum value
7.3 Alarm clock function
It is possible to create the alarm clock function by taking advantage of the capacity offered by the By-me control panel.
It is basically a matter of activating one of the audio zones at a certain time, with a state of operation established by
the user; it is possible to associate these two characteristics respectively with an "event" and with a "scenario".
For example if you want to use an audio zone for waking up in the morning.
The first operation to carry out is to create a scenario that includes the audio groups related to the desired zone including
the group of the transmitter:
Scenarios Setup Scenario management  01 New scenario  Select
To create a more complete setting, the scenario can also include the Automation groups.
(for more information see the section of the manual on Scenarios).
The second operation to carry out is to create an event
Events Setup  01 New Programme  Select
After setting the name, enable the timed function of the event setting the Time parameter with the Periodical Clock
mode; it is possible to configure up to two Start and Stop events for each day of the week.
Afterwards, set the relevant parameter for the outputs with the Scenario type and select the audio scenario previously
created (for more information see the section of the manual on Events).
7.4 Viewing the audio zones
After creating the groups and therefore the audio zones, the main menu shows the zones created, that can be scrolled
through by pressing the Zone  and Zone  buttons.
276
Group/zone management
For each zone the display shows the number and the description, the description of the group of the transmitter module
associated with the channel (audio source), the description of the transmitter module and, where applicable, some
supplementary information (in this case the frequency for the FM tuner).
Using the Audio Source button it is possible to pass on to play the next audio source; with the Zone OFF button
(dynamic according to the status) you can switch off the zone; with the Next button you move on to the next track
according to the type of transmitter (for the FM Tuner it is the station); with the Setup button you go to the parameter
setting menu; with the Details button you go to the management menu for the associated transmitter module.
7.4.1 FM tuner control
The above figure shows the control page for the FM tuner transmitter module.
In the top zone there is the frequency being used, the related signal strength (RSSI) and the Stereo symbol that
indicates the relative playback mode. Immediately underneath, only if enabled, the RDS text is displayed.
The Station abbreviation indicates one of the three selectable setting modes as active, Station, Scan and Freq; the
Up and Down buttons increase and decrease according to the selected mode.
In Station mode the frequency being used corresponds to the value of one of the station memories, in this case 8.
n Saving the radio stations
Pressing the Station button activates the related mode; with the Up and Down buttons you move on to the
next station.
If a different mode is instead active (Scan or Freq) the Memo button also appears; press it to save the fre
quency being used in one of the available station memories.
Via the specific menu, use the  and  buttons to set the number of the desired station and lastly press
Save.
277
Group/zone management
n Timed switch-off function
This parameter sets the time in minutes after which the zone is switched off; the time is counted by the
receivers from the moment the dedicated command is received.
0= minimum value
300= maximum value
n Behaviour of the zone in the case of general and selective calls
This parameter determines if, when off, the zone must switch on when a general or selective call arrives.
•Switch-on for general voice call: Off, On
•Switch-on for selective voice call: Off, On
7.5 Managing the Docking Station
The Docking Station is controlled with two menus:
- the track playback menu (Playback) that is accessed from the Zone Menu;
- the database navigation menu in the Docking Station that is accessed from the Playback Menu.
If no iPod/iPhone is connected to the Docking Station or a jack connector is connected to the socket of the auxiliary
source, the Zone Menu will show the notice iPod/iPhone disconnected and it will not be possible to use the Playback
Menu or play back songs (the button at bottom right and the one at bottom left are inhibited).
If an iPod/iPhone is connected, the Docking Station sends a message to the control panel and it is then possible to
open the Playback Menu by pressing Details.
Pressing instead the Next" button activates playing back the next track on the iPod/iPhone.
7.5.1 Playback Menu
The Playback menu of the Docking Station is composed of a main screen on which the middle part is
used for a full display of the relevant information on the tracks being played.
278
Group/zone management
The buttons used to manage the iPod/iPhone are the following:
•
and
to play the previous or next track.
•
to access the Navigation Menu of the Docking Station.
•
to pause track playback and restart it at the point where it was stopped.
• Back to return to the Zone Menu.
• Loop to set repetition of a single track or of a group of tracks.
• Shuffle to set random repetition of a group of tracks.
Each time the Loop and Shuffle buttons are pressed they operate cyclically selecting the options from a
limited list:
Loop: off
Shuffle: off
single track
random group of tracks
group of tracks
random group of albums
Each time the button is pressed the change in the relevant icon will be displayed.
If the Docking Station is controlled Locally (that is to say directly from the iPod/iPhone) the Playback Menu will
not display the song being played and the tracks will be managed with the three command and playback
buttons.
7.5.1.1 Operation
The main screen of the Playback Menu shows the relevant information on the Artist, Album, and Song being
played.
This information will always be displayed when the iPod/iPhone is on Play or Pause while if it is on Stop the
displayed fields will be empty.
In the case of Stop and Pause the
and
icons will not be displayed.
Pressing each of the three / , and buttons of the main screen changes song
playback as preferred.
279
Group/zone management
The information on the song being played is continually updated: when the iPod/iPhone starts playing a track
the control panel immediately displays the relevant information.
Song playback can also be changed by the events generated by By-me rocker switches configured in Audio
Groups or by the rocker switches of the receivers.
Pressing the
button within 3 s of the start of the track will play the previous track.
Pressing the
button after 3 s of the start of the track will play the current track from the start
Pressing
plays the next track.
7.5.2 Docking Station Database Navigation Menu
From the Playback menu, pressing the
button accesses the Navigation menu.
The Docking Station database navigation menu is composed of a main screen on which the middle part is
used for a full display of the navigation information.
The buttons used to navigate through the Database are the following:
•
and
to select the elements belonging to one type of category.
•
and
to scroll through the types of categories.
• Back to return to the Playback Menu.
• Play to play the selected category.
Pressing Back while playing a song or Play when a specific category has been selected takes you back to
the Playback menu.
7.5.2.1 Operation
The database of the iPod/iPhone can be browsed by Playlist or Artist and navigation is permissible also
while playing a song.
During navigation, the type of category currently selected is highlighted in orange while the categories that
will be able to be populated are accompanied by the symbol - - -.
280
Group/zone management
After selecting the desired type of category, it is possible to send it to playback with the Play button thus
returning automatically to the Playback screen.
Pressing Back takes you back to the Playback menu.
7.6 Details menu of the RCA source associated with the IR interface 20586-14586
From the zone menu, pressing the Details button takes you to the menu of commands associated with the IR interface.
As illustrated on page 268, each command can be coded as the sequence of 1, 2, 3 or 4 actions and this corresponds
to consecutively pressing up to 4 buttons on the remote control of the controlled device.
More precisely, the association of the commands with the 4 menu buttons is the following:
COMMAND
Play
COMMANDS
COMMANDS
Pause
Resume
COMMAND
Skip +
Sel. Source 1
Sel. Source 2
Sel. Source 3
Important:
All the commands are cyclic; for example:
• Press the button 1 time to activate the Pause command; press the button again to activate Resume;
pressing the button again activates Pause and so on.
• Pressing the button once activates the Sel. command. Source 1; pressing the button again activates Sel.
Source 2; pressing the button again activates Sel. Source 3; pressing the button again activates Sel. Source 1 and
so on.
281
Group/zone management
7.7 Adding devices to a group
Used to add new devices to an existing group.
For all the details see the section of the manual on the methods of creating groups.
Menu Setup Configuration  Group management Audio Groups
Select the desired group with the  and  buttons; press the Select and Add Device buttons.
During group creation it is necessary to keep the following rules in mind:
1.Create the groups related to the transmitter modules first.
2.It is not possible to add any other devices to a group that contains the FM Tuner module or the Docking Station.
3. In a group that contains the RCA input it is possible to add only 1 call microphone 20586-14586.
4.Only the functional blocks related to the push-button or rocker switch controls can be added to a group that
contains the call module.
5.Only the functional blocks related to the rocker switch controls can be added to a group that contains one or more
receiver modules.
6.It is not possible to add any rocker switch controls and/or push-buttons to a group without any transmitter or
receiver modules.
7.A receiver can only be configured in an audio group.
8.A rocker switch that has been configured in an audio group or in a call group cannot be configured also in an
automation group and vice versa.
NOTE: Since the quantity of data exchanged is very high, the device configuration procedure can even take a few
dozen seconds.
7.8 Removing devices from a group
Used to remove functional blocks from a group
Menu Setup Configuration  Group management Audio Groups
Enter the Group and select the functional block to be removed by scrolling through the list of blocks; then press the
Remove button.
When requested to confirm, reply by pressing the YES button (the control panel will signal the deletion).
7.9 Modifying device parameters
Device parameters can be modified in order to personalize and adapt the characteristics of the system to different
installation requirements.
Menu Setup Configuration  Group management Audio Groups
Enter the Group and select the functional block for which parameters are to be modified by scrolling through the list
of blocks; then press the Param button.
For each functional block, the parameters that can be set depend on the characteristics of the block.
7.9.1 Device parameters
n Functional block – Audio output /DIN
•LED control: Off, Normal, Reverse, Always On
•Output power reduction = Off, On
This parameter must be set On when the 3M, 3W 8Ω flush-mounting passive acoustic speaker is connected
(art. 14587, 20587)
282
Group/zone management
n Functional block – RCA Audio Input
•LED control: Off, Normal
•Audio type: Mono, Stereo
n Functional block – FM tuner
•LED control: Off, Normal
•Audio type: Mono, Stereo
•Search threshold: 0%, 100%
This is the threshold beyond which a station is considered as valid during an automatic search
•RDS text: Off, On
•RSSI : Off,On
n Functional block – Microphone/Call
•LED control: Off, Normal
•Baby Control threshold = from 0 to 15 (0 = maximum activation sensitivity) This is the threshold of the audio signal captured by the microphone, beyond which the "Baby Control"
function is activated
•Call zone: On, Off, zone by zone
This is used to select the audio zones to activate during a “Push to Talk” selective call
•Baby Control zones: On, Off, zone by zone
This is used to select the audio zones to activate during a selective call corresponding to the "Baby Control"
service
•Audio Monitoring zones: On, Off, zone by zone
This is used to select the audio zones to activate during a selective call corresponding to the "Audio
Monitoring" service
n Functional block – Rocker switch for Audio control
•LED control: Off, Normal, Reverse, Always On, Ctrl LED Normal, Ctrl LED.Reverse, Ctrl LED.On
•Operation: Default = On-Off/Volume
This functional block refers to a rocker switch control, configured automatically by the By-me control panel
to perform the functions of zone switching on/off and adjusting the volume.
The Operation parameter can be changed later on according to the type of control: On-Off/
Volume, Skip Channel/Track, Sleep Audio.
The LED control parameter can also have values for the double button with the central LED (except for the
rocker switch of the call microphone 20586-14586).
Note: When “Skip Channel/Track” operation is selected LED control is automatically disinhibited: the value
of the “LED control” parameter becomes “Off”.
Operation
Skip Channel/Track
Parameter
LED control
Rocker switch DX audio/
By-me automation
OFF
Always ON
Rocker switch CX
By-me automation
OFF
Always ON
CTRL Always ON
Rocker switch SX audio/
By-me automation
OFF
Always ON
CTRL Always ON
283
Group/zone management
n Functional block – Rocker switch for Audio Monitoring
•LED control: Off, Normal, Reverse, Always On, Ctrl LED Normal, Ctrl LED.Reverse, Ctrl LED.On
•Operation: Default = On Off
This functional block refers to a rocker switch control configured automatically by the control panel to
perform the function of switching audio monitoring on/off; the Operation parameter must always remain
set to Audio Monitoring.
The LED control parameter can also have values for the double button with the central LED (except for
the rocker switch of the call microphone 20586-14586).
n Functional block – IR stereo control
•LED control
n Functional block – Dock. iPod/iPhone Station
•LED control: Off, Normal
•Audio type: Mono, Stereo
•Control: Remote, Local
This enables controlling the iPod/iPhone from a remote position (that is from the By-me control panel
and with the touch screens) or directly with the iPod/iPhone.
284
Types of system
8. Types of system
This chapter, by way of example, illustrates some types of installation that can be made with the By-me speaker
system.
8.1 Audio zones with receiver modules and By-me controls
This example illustrates a typical installation in which one or more zones can play the audio source coming from the
transmitter modules.
Zone audio con moduli ricevitori e comandi By-me
+
L
-
20585
+L
20587
20582
01900
+
R
-
20587
+
-
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20587
L
R+
-
20581 + 20587
20531.23 +
20531.24
ZONA AUDIO 02
-
20587
+
-
20587
R
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
+L
-
01901
20588
+R
-
20588
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
ZONA AUDIO 01
Configured devices: N.1 audio input, N.1 docking station and n.1 FM tuner (transmitter modules), N.4 Audio speakers (receiver modules) with the related control buttons and N.2 By-me control buttons (also on the automation line).
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules and two groups for the receiver modules with the control
buttons
Zones created: two audio zones associated with two receiver groups
Operation: the two zones work independently to play the audio channels.
The control buttons perform their actions on the entire zone in which they are configured.
285
Installation types
8.2 Audio zones with voice call function
Zone audio con funzione di chiamata vocale
20521
+ 20532.20
+
01904
L
L +
-
20582
20582
TX ingresso
01900
audio
Sintonizzatore
FM
20521
+ 20532.20
20586
Modulo di
chiamata
-
20587
20587
+
R
-
20587
+
R+
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
-
20587
ZONA AUDIO 02
L
CHIAMATA SELETTIVA
-
20587
+
R
-
20587
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
+L
-
20588
01901
+R
-
20588
20512
ZONA AUDIO 01
CHIAMATA GLOBALE
Configured devices: N.2 audio input and n.1 FM tuner (transmitter modules), N.4 Audio speakers (receiver modules)
with the related control buttons, N.2 By-me control buttons and N.1 call module
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules, one group for the call module, and two groups for the
receiver modules with the control buttons
Zones created: two audio zones associated with two receiver groups
Operation: the two zones work independently to play the audio channels.
The selective call zone setting parameter must first be set in the call module.
At the time of the call the voice message replaces the sound source being played at that moment.
On pressing the general call button this will be transmitted throughout all the present zones; on pressing the selective
call button it will be transmitted only in the Audio 02 Zone.
286
Types of system
8.3 Audio zones with Baby Control function
This example illustrates a typical installation in which one or more zones can play the audio source coming from the
transmitter modules.
Zone audio con funzione "baby control"
20521
+ 20532.20
+
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
20586
L
L +
-
20582
20582
01900
-
20587
01908
+
R
-
20587
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
R+
01901
-
01908
+L
20512
-
20588
CHIAMATA SELETTIVA PER BABY CONTROL
01901
+R
-
20588
+L
-
20588
01901
+R
-
20588
ZONA AUDIO 01
01903
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
ZONA AUDIO 02
CHIAMATA GLOBALE
Configured devices: N.2 audio input and n.1 FM tuner (transmitter modules), N.4 Audio speakers (receiver modules)
with the related control buttons, N.1 By-me control buttons and N.1 call module (transmitter)
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules, one group for the call module, and two groups for the
receiver modules with the control buttons
Zones created: two audio zones associated with two receiver groups
Operation: the two zones work independently to play the audio channels.
The selective call zone setting parameter must first be set in the call module.
To enable the Baby Control function in the call module it is sufficient to press the relevant button on the module.
At the time of the Baby Control call the voice message replaces the sound source being played at that moment in the
Audio 01 Zone.
287
Types of system
8.4 Audio zones with audio monitoring function
Zone audio con funzione ascolto ambientale
20521
+ 20532.20
+
L
01901
-
20582
20582
01900
20521 +
20532.20
20586
L +
20587
+
R
-
20587
+
20512
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
01907
R+
-
L
01907
-
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
20587
+
R
-
20587
+
ZONA AUDIO 02
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20521 +
20532.20
L
-
20587
+
-
20587
R
L +
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
-
20587
ZONA AUDIO 01
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
R+
-
20587
ZONA AUDIO 03
ASCOLTO AMBIENTALE
Configured devices: N.2 audio input and n.1 FM tuner (transmitter modules), N.5 Audio speakers (receiver modules)
with the related control buttons, N.2 By-me control buttons, N.1 call module (transmitter) and N.1 audio monitoring
control.
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules, one group for the call module with the audio monitoring
control, and three groups for the receiver modules with the control buttons
Zones created: three audio zones associated with the three receiver groups
Operation: the three zones work independently to play the audio channels; one zone is also dedicated to audio monitoring.
The selective call zone setting parameter must first be set in the call module.
To enable the audio monitoring function it is necessary to have configured the relevant On / Off control button in the
group containing the call module; on pressing the button the sound acquired by the microphone at that moment is
played only in the Audio 03 Zone.
288
Types of system
8.5 Audio zones with voice communication function
Zone audio con funzione comunicazione vocale
1
20521
+ 20532.20
+
20521
+ 20532.20
20586
L
L +
-
20582
20582
01900
-
20587
+
R
-
20587
+
20512
20588
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
R+
01901
-
L
20588
ZONA AUDIO 02
CHIAMATA SELETTIVA 3
-
20587
+
R
-
20587
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
2
20586
L +
-
+L
20587
-
20588
01901
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
R+
+R
-
-
20587
ZONA AUDIO 03
CHIAMATA SELETTIVA 2
20588
ZONA AUDIO 01
Configured devices: N.2 audio input and n.1 FM tuner (transmitter modules), N.5 Audio speakers (receiver modules)
with the related control buttons, N.1 By-me control buttons and N.2 call module (transmitter)
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules, two groups for the call modules, and three groups for the
receiver modules with the control buttons
Zones created: three audio zones associated with the three receiver groups
Operation: the three zones can work independently to play the audio channels.
The call modules n.01 and n.02 are situated respectively in the same environment as the speakers of the audio zone
02 and audio zone 03.
The selective call zone setting parameter must first be set on the call modules; in this case zone 02 will be set on module n.01
and zone 03 will be set on module n.02.
At the time of the call the voice message replaces the sound source being played at that moment.
On pressing the selective call button of the Audio 02 Zone module, this will be transmitted only in the Audio 03 Zone; likewise
on pressing the selective call button of the Audio 03 Zone module ,this will be transmitted only in the Audio 02 Zone (selective
call zone setting parameter).
This way, when necessary, it is possible to communicate in a unidirectional manner between two different rooms.
This is half-duplex communication since the channel assigned to the call is univocal and therefore shared by the two configured
modules; clearly, as long as the first call module is active it will not be possible to activate the second one, and vice versa.
289
Types of system
8.6 Audio zones with central switch-off
Zone audio con spegnimento centralizzato
ZONA AUDIO 02
20521
+ 20532.20
20521
+ 20532.20
+
L
20521 +
(2) 20531.20
-
20587
20582
01900
+
R
-
20587
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
L +
+
-
L
-
20588
20587
+
R
-
20587
R+
01901
-
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20588
20582
+
L
-
20587
+
-
20587
R
20581 +
20531.23 +
20531.24
20584
ZONA AUDIO 01
ASCOLTO AMBIENTALE
Configured devices: N.2 audio input and n.1 FM tuner (transmitter modules), N.4 Audio speakers (receiver modules)
with the related control buttons, N.3 By-me control buttons and N.1 IR interface.
Groups created: three groups for the transmitter modules and two groups for the receiver modules with the control
buttons. One By-me On/Off control is used as a scenario command.
Zones created: two audio zones associated with the two receiver groups
Operation: the two zones can work independently to play the audio channels.
It is necessary to create a scenario associating the receiver groups related to the two audio zones and save it with all
of the audio devices in the switch-off status; later on the By-me control button is associated as an external control.
With the same criterion it is possible to create a scenario and save it with the audio devices in the desired switch-on
status and associate the same button as an external control.
In this way, by pressing on the top and bottom of the By-me On/Off control button it is possible to perform central
switching on and off for the whole audio system.
290
Glossary
9. Glossary
Source
Device playing an audio signal.
Transmission channel
Frequency band associated with a transmitter used to transmit the content of the source.
Transmitter (TX)
Device that sends the source content over the communication bus.
Receiver (RX)
Device that receives the source content from the bus and transmits it in the room via acoustic speakers.
Group
Set of functional block of the devices connected logically with each other.
Zone
One or more rooms in which the same sound source is played by one or more receivers.
Track
Saved song or radio station.
291
292
Section
Light Control
293
294
Contents
1. General characteristics of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
2. Devices and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
3. Configuration on the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
3.1 Functional unit selection and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Setting/changing the parameters of the dimmers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 WHITE dimmers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 RGB dimmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
298
299
299
305
4. Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
295
Presentation of the system
1. General characteristics of the system
The Light Control range, comprising universal dimmers and lamps, reconciles the need for comfort and a reduction in
consumption, creating customized and "energy-frugal" environments, while ensuring full compatibility and total installation flexibility. The new range of universal dimmers allows you to manage every type of source, not just high energy
efficiency sources, but also traditional incandescent sources. Control that is therefore also applicable to existing plants
and provides the opportunity of fitting simply and effectively into any architecture.
Included in the By-me home automation system, the universal dimmers complete the light management range.
Using the touch screens will allow you to create and control the range of programmed lighting scenarios to make each
room unique while paying attention to energy savings, by switching the lights on and off and adjusting their brightness. The new (patented) RGB functions, available via dedicated devices, enable making elegant, sophisticated colour
changes and light effects, suitable for all needs, from residential to small businesses.
With the automation system you can then configure and afterwards call up scenarios involving various functions in the
home automation system such as, for example, combinations of lights and colours matched with the audio functions to
create customized environments featuring efficient and complete comfort.
All Vimar's solutions are part of a single universal technology that ensures "hassle-free" fittings and the ability to replace
the old dimmers in existing systems, to ensure the utmost installation flexibility.
The universal dimmers are compatible with all light sources: incandescent bulbs, LEDs and dimmable compact fluorescent bulbs, halogen lights and LED strips. Dimming technology that is therefore ideal for any type of lighting system.
Total flexibility: this is the criterion with which the technology was chosen for all the new solutions for light management
and control. In the case of both new plants and renovations, for fitting or replacement, it is possible at any time to choose
more efficient and flexible sources, thanks to the devices that are technologically capable of dimming every kind of lamp.
296
Devices and functions
2. Devices and functions
The Light Control System consists of the following devices:
20529-19529-16969-14529: Two rocker switches and actuator for SLAVE dimmers 230 V~, for LED lamps, LED electronic
transformers, RGB lamps, RGB electronic power supplies,
to be completed with interchangeable buttons with 1 or 2
modules
20549-19549-16989-14549: Three rocker switches and
MASTER dimmer actuator 230 V~ 50 Hz for incandescent
lamps 40-300 W, electronic transformers 40-200 VA, CFL
lamps 10-120 W, LED lamps 3-120 W, fuse, to be completed
with interchangeable buttons with 1 or 2 modules - 3 modules.
01870: MASTER dimmer 230 V~ 50/60 Hz for incandescent lamps 40-500 W, electronic transformers 40-300 VA,
CFL lamps 10-200 W, LED lamps 3-200 W, for LED electronic power supplies, protection fuse, installation on DIN rails
(60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules size 17.5 mm.
01871: SLAVE dimmer 230 V~ 50/60 Hz for incandescent
lamps 40-500 W, electronic transformers 40-300 VA, CFL
lamps 10-200 W, LED lamps 3-200 W, control from universal
MASTER dimmer with load adapter, fuse, installation on DIN
rails (60715 TH35), occupies 4 modules size 17.5 mm.
01877: Electronic multi-voltage power supply 230 V~ 50
Hz for dimmable RGB LED lamps 12-24 V , adjustable with
By-me devices. SELV output.
297
Configuration on the controller
3. Configuration on the controller
The main task to perform in order to configure the dimmers of the Light Control system on the controller is to create
functional groups (sets of functional units that need to work together) to which they are assigned.
The procedure to be carried out for each new group is as follows:
Setup  Configuration  Groups
Automation groups  Add
Create the selected group:
• Index of new group (00-480) that identifies the number of the group in the list of all the configured ones; touch
Next to confirm.
• New group name selecting, from among the names offered by a pre-set list, both the name of the group and the
zone of application (necessary to distinguish between rooms and functions with the same name).
Lastly, proceed to save the name of the group by touching Save.
If the operation has been carried out correctly the control unit will show Operation completed successfully
By selecting the desired group it is possible to view the information related to the group such as the address and
number of devices, the devices that may already be linked and to delete the group (Remove Group menu).
3.1 Functional unit selection and configuration.
For each device, how to select a functional unit is explained in the instructions sheet that accompanies the
product.
To configure the various functional units within a group, carry out the following:
1. Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit of the dimmer to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling through the list  Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Select the type of dimmer (SLAVE dimmer or Other):
• SLAVE dimmer  Next (Phase Cutting) LE or TE  Next  (Flash start) Yes or No  End
• Other  Next  WHITE or RGB
 Next
5. Press the configuration button and, where necessary, the rocker button of the dimmer to be included in the group.
If RGB and a rocker button has been selected in point 4, the controller will prompt you to set the function to be associated with the button too:
298
Dimmer parameters
Select the desired function by scrolling through the list  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration
is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
8. Proceed with the configuration of other functional units by repeating points 3, 4, 5 and 6 or Back to exit.
All the procedures relating to the management of the groups and functional units of the WHITE and RGB dimmers
are similar to those of all the other By-me devices.
3.2 Setting/changing the parameters of the dimmers.
Device parameters can be set and/or modified in order to customize operation to adapt the system to the various
installation requirements.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Select the group by scrolling through the
list  Associated devices  Select the functional unit by scrolling through the list  Device parameters
The modifiable parameters for each functional unit depend on the characteristics of the unit and vary by type depending on the dimmer considered.
3.2.1 WHITE dimmers
• Possible controls
- Switch on/off
- Adjust/change brightness
- Call up scenario
• Operating parameters
- Adjustment speed (minimum, normal, maximum)
- Minimum adjustment value
- Switch-on value
- Switch-on duration
- Switch-off duration
299
Device parameters
- Delay in switching off the dimmer with warning function
- Time for changing absolute brightness (Duration of absolute adj.)
- Phase cutting
- Flash start
3.2.1.1 Speed of
​​ adjustment
This parameter allows you to set the speed (selectable from the Min, Norm and Max options) with which the
adjustment is made via the associated device. 3.2.1.2 Minimum adjustment value
This parameter, to be used with CFLs, is used to set the minimum brightness value below which you cannot go.
Adjustment curve
Minimum value
300
Device parameters
3.2.1.3 Ramp Operation
This allows you to set the values ​​of the brightness ramp both while switching on and off.
Adjustment curve
Switch-on end
value
Switch-on start
value
Switch-on duration
PARAMETER
VALUES CAN BE SET
Switch-on start value
from 0% to 100%
Switch-on end value
from 0% to 100%
Switch-on duration
from 0 to 1 h
Switch-off duration
from 0 to 1 h
Last value
YES or NO
Switch-off duration
If you select Last value  NO the Initial value and End value parameters will be displayed too.
301
Device parameters
3.2.1.4 Delayed switch-off with warning function
This parameter delays switching off while decreasing the brightness, if desired, for a set time (useful, for example, when you leave the house).
Adjustment curve
Warning adjustment
Delay
switch-off
302
PARAMETER
VALUES CAN BE SET
Switch Off Delay
from 0 to 1 h
Warning adjustment
from 0% to 100%
Duration
switch-off
Device parameters
3.2.1.5 Time for changing absolute brightness.
This parameter allows you to set the time it takes to change a value of absolute brightness (for example, due
to the activation of a scenario).
Desired brightness value
Adjustment curve
Current brightness value
Duration
adjustment
PARAMETER
VALUES CAN BE SET
Duration of adjustment
from 0 to 1 h
3.2.1.6 Phase cutting
• Adjustment of leading edge (LE): used with incandescent lamps, compact fluorescent lamps and compatible
LED lamps, as well as L type electronic transformers.
• Adjustment of trailing edge (TE): used with compatible loads such as fluorescent lamps, LED lamps or
C
type electronic transformers.
Dimmering with Leading Edge mode
Dimmering with Trailing Edge mode
303
Device parameters
3.2.1.7 Flash Start
This parameter, used with CFLs, enables switching on at the maximum value for approximately 2 s and subsequent adjustment to the set value.
Adjustment curve
approximately 2 s
304
Device parameters
3.2.2 RGB dimmers
• Possible controls
- Switch on/off
- Adjustment/change to hue (H)
- Adjustment/change to saturation (S)
- Adjustment/change to brightness (V)
- Call up scenario
-“FADING-SHOW”
• Operating parameters
- Adjustment speed (minimum, normal, maximum)
- Switch-on value
- Switch-on duration
- Switch-off duration
- Delay in switching off the dimmer with warning function
- Time for changing absolute brightness (Duration of absolute adj.)
- Setting “FADING-SHOW”
The meaning of the parameters of Speed ​​adjustment, Switch-on value, Switch-on duration, Switch-off duration, Delay in switching off the dimmer with warning function and Time for changing absolute brightness
is similar to that for the WHITE dimmers.
305
Device parameters
3.2.2.1 Related adjustments
Using a previously configured rocker button you can adjust each of the following components:
Dimmer
Hue control
Saturation control
306
Device parameters
3.2.2.2 Fading-show
The Fading Show function allows you to actuate cyclical transitions in colour change and combinations
thereof on the device.
Parameters:
- Duration of transition, that is the time elapsing between colour changes
- Duration of persistence, that is the time a single colour remains
- Colour list, that is the number of colours to be reproduced (up to a maximum of 6)
Duration
persistence
Duration of transition
Duration of transition
PARAMETER
VALUES CAN BE SET
Duration of transition
from 0 to 1 h
Duration of persistence
from 0 to 1 h
The fading-show mode is started with an on/off command.
TYPE OF DEVICES
FADING-SHOW FUNCTION
By-me control devices
YES
Monochrome Touch Screens
YES
Colour Touch Screens
YES
Controllers
NO
Web Servers and applications
YES
307
Application examples
4. Application examples
• Example 1
The following example shows the configuration of a control with two rocker buttons and an actuator for SLAVE dimmers 230 V~ (20529-19529-14529) so you can control the brightness and fading-show in a room.
The configuration will be made so that the left rocker button is associated with the brightness control and the right
one with fading-show activation.
Creating functional groups.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Add
Create the functional groups within which the various functional units are to be added.
Configuring the "actuator" functional unit.
1. Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling through the list  Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
 Next
Press the device configuration button.
5. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration
is complete. The controller will display the functional unit that has just been configured.
Configuring the "left button" functional unit.
1. Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
308
Application examples
3. Select the group by scrolling through the list  Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the left rocker button.
5. Select Dimmer  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration
is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
Configuring the "right button" functional unit.
1. Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling through the list  Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the right rocker button.
5. Select Fading Show Activation  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration
is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
On pressing the right rocker button the fading show function will be activated as set in accordance with par.
3.2.2.2.
309
Application examples
• Example 2
The following example shows the configuration of a control with three rocker buttons (20541-19541-16981-14541),
which, combined with the power supply RGB 01877, is used to control the brightness, hue and saturation in a room.
The configuration will be made so that the left rocker button is associated with the brightness control, the middle one
with the hue and the right one with the saturation.
Creating functional groups.
Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation groups  Add
Create the functional groups within which the various functional units are to be added.
Configuring the "power supply 01877" functional unit.
1. Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling through the list  Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
 Next
Press the power supply CONF configuration button.
5. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration
is complete. The controller will display the functional unit that has just been configured.
310
Application examples
Configuring the "left button" functional unit.
1. Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling through the list Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the left rocker button.
5. Select Dimmer  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration
is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
Configuring the "middle button" functional unit.
1. Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling through the list  Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the middle rocker button.
5. Select Hue Control  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration
is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
Configuring the "right button" functional unit.
1. Setup  Configuration  Groups  Automation Groups
2. Select the name of the group to which you want to add the functional unit to configure.
3. Select the group by scrolling through the list Add; the procedure is started on the controller.
4. Select Other  Next  RGB
 Next
Press the device configuration button and then the right rocker button.
5. Select Saturation Control  Set; the procedure is started on the controller.
6. The device indicates that configuration is in progress by means of a red LED, which goes off when configuration
is complete.
7. The controller indicates the functional unit that has just been configured.
311
WARRANTY CERTIFICATE N°
Your VIMAR product has been subjected to rigorous controls and is covered by a warranty for 36 (thirty six) months from
the date of purchase.
The warranty is valid on condition that:
- the warranty card attached to the product has been filled out in full and sent to the VIMAR Distributor/Branch Office
indicated below within 15 days of the date of purchase.
- Your copy of the warranty certificate is provided to the service staff specified by the VIMAR Distributor/Branch Office.
VIMAR will repair or replace the product or any part thereof which is found to be defective within the 36 months of warranty
coverage.
The analysis of the defect and the repair or replacement will be done by the service staff specified by the VIMAR Distributor/
Branch Office.
The warranty does not cover:
- defects due to accidental breakage during shipping, improper use of the product, incorrect installation, connection or
power supply, and all other defects not due to the original configuration of the product or any component thereof.
- Any components (leds, keys, control knobs, etc.) which are defective for reasons not due to their original configuration.
- Defects due to degradation of the remote control unit batteries.
The warranty is void if the product is repaired or tampered with by anyone not authorised to do so by VIMAR.
To send to:
Personal data
BY-ME SYSTEM
WARRANTY CERTIFICATE N°
I have read and understood the condition stated in the warranty certificate.
Name and Surname
Address
N°
City
Province
Date of purchase
Sign
Postcode
Country
To send to:
ATTENZIONE! Le dimensioni della 3a anta devono essere 140x210 mm
Viale Vicenza, 14 - 36063 Marostica VI - Italy
Tel. +39 0424 488 600 - Fax (Export) +39 0424 488 709
www.vimar.com
01960 iinstaller EN 06 1312
VIMAR - Marostica - Italy
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement